JP7772181B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out to the tray storage section from, for example, a payout device. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be managed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows for optimal management of the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention of claim 1 comprises a predetermined storage execution means for executing a predetermined storage process so that when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, thereby storing the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, behavior information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
a result storage execution means for sequentially storing the aspect information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means;
Equipped with
the result storage execution means includes means for causing the mode information to be stored among the mode information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means to be stored in the calculation result storage means;
the state information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means, which is not a storage target, is not stored in the calculation result storage means;
This gaming machine is
a predetermined control means capable of executing predetermined processes including a predetermined progression process for progressing a game and the predetermined storage process;
means for erasing the predetermined information from the predetermined storage means after the information calculation means has completed the calculation of the mode information;
a notification means capable of notifying the user of the content corresponding to the aspect information stored in the calculation result storage means;
Equipped with
In one processing cycle of the predetermined process, the predetermined progress process is executed, and then the predetermined storage process is executed,
When the supply of operating power is stopped, the notification means terminates the notification of the content corresponding to the status information, but when the supply of operating power is resumed, the notification means continues to notify the content corresponding to the status information before the supply of operating power was stopped.

This invention makes it possible to efficiently manage gaming machines.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration for discharging game balls that have flowed down the game area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensor are input to the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a dispensing control device and various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the dispensing CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence relationship memory; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a history memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management-side CPU. 10A to 10D are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management-side CPU. 10A to 10E are time charts showing how history information is stored in a history memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management-side CPU. 10A to 10H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the signal types is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of a management IC according to a third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. 10 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a management CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by a control CPU in the fourth embodiment; 13A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by a main CPU in the sixth embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a calculation process executed by a control-side CPU in the seventh embodiment. 19 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a control-side CPU in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the ninth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management-side CPU. FIG. 22 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 22 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main control device in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of a history memory. 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management-side CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a management CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a parameter management process executed by a main CPU. A block diagram to explain the configuration of the signal path that transmits the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and management IC in the 12th embodiment. A block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device and the audio and light-emitting control device in the thirteenth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a special chart special power control process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance control process executed by the sound and light side CPU. This is a flowchart showing the special chart change start processing executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the special call start processing executed by the main CPU. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal counter area, an opening/closing execution mode counter area, and a high frequency support mode counter area provided in the main RAM. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the normal ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by the main CPU. (a) Front view of the special map display section, (A) explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special map display section, (b) front view of the regular map display section, (B) explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the regular map display section. 10 is a flowchart showing a check waiting process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a process during display of a check result executed by the main CPU. 10A to 10G are time charts showing the progress of a check waiting period and a check result display period. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. (a) to (j) are diagrams individually showing the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the display surface of a pattern display device. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device during the check waiting period or the check result display period. 22 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a process during display of a check result executed by the main CPU. 10A to 10G are time charts showing the progress of a check waiting period and a check result display period. An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port provided in the MPU of the audio and light emission control device in the 15th embodiment. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence area provided in the audio-visual ROM; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance control process executed by the sound and light side CPU. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal counter area, an open/close execution mode counter area, and a high frequency support mode counter area provided in the sound/light side RAM. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a CPU on the sound and light side; 10 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by a CPU on the sound and light side; A front view of the main control device in the 16th embodiment. This is a cross-sectional view of line AA in Figure 78. FIG. 22 is a front view of a slot machine according to a seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning symbol combination is obtained. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the normal mode is selected. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stopping order and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected. 10 is a flowchart showing the response processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition chance management process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing the ART state processing executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a game management process executed by the main MPU. 1A and 1B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of an image display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a lighting process executed by the main MPU. 10A and 10B are time charts showing the relationship between the opening angle of the front door and the control state of the lighting device. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the front door is in an open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the opening angle of the front door is at the maximum opening angle. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM in the 18th embodiment; (b) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the total cumulative buffer; (c) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the first cumulative buffer; and (d) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the second cumulative buffer. 10A to 10H are time charts showing how game history is managed. 10 is a flowchart showing a game management process executed by the main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a target switching process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 23 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC according to a nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a first history memory and a second history memory; 10 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management-side CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a target switching process executed by a management-side CPU.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made up of wooden boards connected at all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may also be attached to the island equipment of the amusement hall.

As shown in Figure 2, the gaming machine main body 12 comprises an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a rear pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. In detail, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. A rear pack unit 15 is also rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is equipped with a locking device at its pivot tip, which functions to lock the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also functions to lock the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states can be released by using an unlocking key to unlock the cylinder lock 17, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12.

The inner frame 13 is primarily composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is approximately the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly oval window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a play area PA formed on the front of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 in the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on Figure 3. Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define part of the outer edge of the play area PA, and these inner rail portion 25 and outer rail portion 26 form a guide rail that serves as a guide means. Game balls launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the top of the play area PA by the guide rail.

The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 55a (described below) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating the launch operating device (or operating handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game balls are launched.

The game board 24 has multiple large and small openings that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. Each opening is equipped with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special symbol unit 37, and a general symbol unit 38. There are a total of four general winning openings 31, and one of each of the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls will be paid out. On the other hand, when balls enter the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize opening 32, the first actuation opening 33, and the second actuation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls will be paid out. Specifically, when one game ball enters the first actuation opening 33 or when one game ball enters the second actuation opening 34, one prize ball will be paid out; when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31, ten prize balls will be paid out; and when one game ball enters the special electric prize opening 32, fifteen prize balls will be paid out.

The number of prize balls is optional; for example, the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have fewer prize balls than the first actuation port 33, or the second actuation port 34 may be configured to have more prize balls than the first actuation port 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. The game board 24 is also equipped with numerous nails 24b to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the game balls fall, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, "entering" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball passing through an opening and being discharged from the game area PA, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area PA without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish game balls entering the outlet 24a from game balls entering the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and through gate 35, the term "winning" will also be used.

The first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 are united as an actuation port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 open upward. Furthermore, both actuation ports 33, 34 are aligned vertically, with the first actuation port 33 facing upward. The second actuation port 34 is provided with a normal power device 34a, which serves as a guide piece consisting of a pair of movable pieces on the left and right. When the normal power device 34a is in a closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second actuation port 34, but when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second actuation port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second actuation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows down. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that runs vertically through it, and game balls that enter the through gate 35 flow down the game area PA after winning. This allows game balls that enter the through gate 35 to enter the second actuation port 34.

Based on a win at the through gate 35, the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is conducted when a win is made at the through gate 35, and a changing image is displayed on the normal map display section 38a of the normal map unit 38, which is located in the lower right corner of the play area PA, an area through which game balls do not pass. If the result of the internal lottery is a win to open the normal power feature, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the changing display on the normal map display section 38a ends, the system transitions to the normal power open state. In the normal power open state, the normal power feature 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The map display unit 38a is configured as a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured as other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. Possible patterns displayed on the map display unit 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of letters are displayed in a variable manner, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed in a variable manner, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed in an alternating manner.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. Up to four game balls that enter the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

A winning lottery is triggered by a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The results of the lottery are then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special symbol unit 37 in more detail, the special symbol unit 37 is provided with a special symbol display section 37a. The display area of the special symbol display section 37a is smaller than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special symbol display section 37a, a winning lottery is held when a winning bid is made through the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, triggering a winning lottery, and a variable or predetermined display of the symbol is displayed. The result corresponding to the lottery result is then displayed. Note that the special symbol display section 37a is configured as a segment display device in which multiple segment light-emitting elements are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this and may be configured as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix display, or another type of display device. Furthermore, the symbol displayed on the special symbol display section 37a may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors.

In the special symbol unit 37, a special symbol reserve display unit 37b is provided adjacent to the special symbol display unit 37a. Up to four game balls that enter the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the special symbol reserve display unit 37b.

In more detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described below. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device with a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

When a variable or predetermined pattern display is performed on the special pattern display unit 37a based on a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 or a winning entry into the second actuation port 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined pattern display accordingly. For example, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern rows (top, middle, and bottom) set as multiple display areas, and in each pattern row, main patterns numbered "1" through "9" are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. This scrolling display first starts scrolling all pattern rows, then switches from scrolling display to standby display in the order of top pattern row → bottom pattern row → middle pattern row, and finally ends with a predetermined pattern being statically displayed in each pattern row. Then, for example, in a game where the game result is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a pre-set pay line on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41.

The pattern display device 41 not only produces display effects triggered by a win in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, but also produces display effects during the open/close execution mode to which it enters after a win. Furthermore, display on the special symbol display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 begins based on a win in either actuation port 33, 34, and one game session is played until the specified result is displayed and the game ends. Furthermore, the manner in which the pattern display device 41 displays the changing symbols is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the changing symbol display in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the changing symbols displayed on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to those described above; for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed as symbols may be used.

If a jackpot is won in a lottery based on a win through the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the system transitions to an open/close execution mode, which allows a win in the special electric winning device 32. The special electric winning device 32 has a large prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, as well as an open/close door 32a that opens and closes the large prize opening. The open/close door 32a is positioned in either a closed or open state. Specifically, the open/close door 32a is normally in a closed state, which prevents game balls from winning, but if an internal lottery is successful in transitioning to the open/close execution mode, it switches to an open state, which allows game balls to win. The open/close execution mode is the mode to which the system transitions when a win occurs. Note that while a win is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to make it more difficult for a win to occur than in the open state.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration for discharging game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and outlet 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, a game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and enters the game area PA is discharged from the game area PA by entering any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and outlet 24a. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and outlet 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back of the gaming board 24, discharge passages 42-48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a, respectively. Gaming balls that flow into the discharge passages 42-48 flow down the discharge passages 42-48, leading to the lower end of the gaming board 24 on the back side of the gaming board 24 and being collected by a discharge ball collection section (not shown). The gaming balls collected by the discharge ball collection section are then discharged to a ball circulation device in the island equipment where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall.

Each discharge passage section 42-48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a-48a for detecting game balls. These discharge passage sections 42-48 and detection sensors 42a-48a are described below. As already explained, there are four general winning openings 31, and therefore there is a discharge passage section 42-44 corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for the first discharge passage section 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31, and one detection sensor 43a is provided for the second discharge passage section 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it to the right. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the first discharge passage section 42, and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the second discharge passage section 43. A gaming ball that enters the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a as it passes through the first discharge passage 42, and a gaming ball that enters the general winning opening 31 adjacent to it on the right is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a as it passes through the second discharge passage 43. A third discharge passage 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning openings 31, and is formed to merge midway. The third discharge passage 44 has entrance-side regions corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and these entrance-side regions merge midway to form a single exit-side region. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range is located midway in the exit-side region of the third discharge passage 44. A gaming ball that enters either of the two right-side general winning openings 31 is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a as it passes through the third discharge passage 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists midway through the fourth discharge passage section 45, and a game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a as it passes through the fourth discharge passage section 45. A fifth discharge passage section 46 exists in correspondence with the first operating port 33. A first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists midway through the fifth discharge passage section 46, and a game ball that enters the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a as it passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. A sixth discharge passage section 47 exists in correspondence with the second operating port 34. A second actuation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the sixth discharge passage 47, and a gaming ball that enters the second actuation port 34 is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a as it passes through the sixth discharge passage 47. A seventh discharge passage 48 exists in correspondence with the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that its detection range is located midway along the seventh discharge passage 48, and a gaming ball that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a as it passes through the seventh discharge passage 48.

A gaming ball that is detected by one of the various detection sensors 42a-48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and gaming balls that pass through the through gate 35 on their way down the play area PA are detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

The various detection sensors 42a-49a are all electromagnetic induction proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a-49a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to this, and the HI and LOW relationship may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, which is formed by attaching the game board 24 configured as described above to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 has a window portion 51 formed therein, which allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 is approximately elliptical in shape and has a window panel 52 fitted into it. The window panel 52 is made of colorless and transparent glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, or may be made of colored and transparent as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

A display light-emitting unit 53 is provided above the window 51. A pair of left and right speakers 54 are also provided, which output sound effects according to the game status. An upper bulge 55 and a lower bulge 56, which bulge toward the front, are arranged side by side below the window 51. An upper tray 55a with an upward opening is provided inside the upper bulge 55, and a lower tray 56a with a similar upward opening is provided inside the lower bulge 56. The upper tray 55a temporarily stores game balls dispensed from the dispensing device (described below) and guides them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 27. The lower tray 56a also stores surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, we will explain the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) is equipped with a main control device 60, which is responsible for the primary control of the game. The main control device 60 consists of a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The board box 60a may be provided with a trace means or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Possible trace means include a joint structure that inseparably connects the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a and requires destruction of a specified portion when they are separated, or a structure in which a seal is affixed across the boundaries between the multiple case bodies, leaving a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the bonded object when peeled off. Another possible trace structure is a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the multiple case bodies that make up the board box 60a.

The rear pack unit 15 is installed to cover the rear side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 60. The rear pack unit 15 includes a rear pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls are successively replenished from the island equipment in the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. Game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged onto the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device aggregate unit 74 is equipped with a payout control device 77 that has the function of controlling the payout device 76, and a power supply/launch control device 78 that generates and outputs the predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the launch operation device 28. The payout control device 77 and power supply/launch control device 78 are stacked one behind the other, with the payout control device 77 at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61, which is responsible for the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67, which monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62. The MPU 62 contains a main CPU 63, which is a processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 also contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits such as a random number generator, and more.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a type of memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is randomly accessible and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared for the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control programs stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry patterns of game balls in the game area PA based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Details will be described later, but the management IC 66 keeps track of the entry history of game balls into the general entry opening 31, the special electric entry device 32, the first actuation opening 33, the second actuation opening 34, and the outlet 24a, and, based on this ball entry history, keeps track of the frequency of balls entering the general entry opening 31, the special electric entry device 32, the first actuation opening 33, and the second actuation opening 34.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67 and a dispensing control device 77 provided in the main control device 60. The power outage monitoring board 67 is connected to a power supply/launch control device 78, which has the function of supplying operating power, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors, such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a, are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a are the first prize entry detection sensor 42a, the second prize entry detection sensor 43a, the third prize entry detection sensor 44a, the special electric current detection sensor 45a, the first operating port detection sensor 46a, the second operating port detection sensor 47a, the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball has entered each entry area. The main CPU 63 also performs various lotteries based on whether a ball has entered the first operating port 33, and various lotteries based on whether a ball has entered the second operating port 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and an audio/light emitting control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, when a game ball enters a prize ball entry section among the entry sections, where the occurrence of the ball entry corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Various commands, such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command, are output to the audio/light emitting control device 81.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 62 are the special power drive unit 32b, which opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special power winning device 32, the normal power drive unit 34b, which opens and closes the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34, the special chart unit 37, and the normal chart unit 38. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a special chart display unit 37a and a special chart reserved display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal chart unit 38 is provided with a normal chart display unit 38a and a normal chart reserved display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units and displays through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the special power drive unit 32b so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. Furthermore, if the open state of the normal power device 34a is selected, the main CPU 63 controls the drive of the normal power drive unit 34b so that the normal power device 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, during each game round, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special chart display unit 37a. Furthermore, when the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal power device 34a is to be opened is to be displayed, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the normal chart display unit 38a. In addition, when a win occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a change display starts in the special chart display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special chart reserve display unit 37b, and when a win occurs in the through gate 35, or when a change display starts in the regular chart display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the regular chart reserve display unit 38b.

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall. It generates the operating power required for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, this power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage supplies power for memory retention to the main RAM 65 of the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77. The power supply and launch control device 78 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, which is activated when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The audio and light control device 81 drives and controls the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. The display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on commands received from the audio and light-emitting control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

During play, the main CPU 63 uses various counter information to perform the jackpot lottery, set the display in the special symbol display unit 37a, set the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and set the display in the normal symbol display unit 38a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 63 uses a hit random number counter C1 used to determine the hit lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 changes due to a miss, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the display duration on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the main CPU 63 uses a normal power feature release counter C4 used to determine whether the normal power feature 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the normal power release state. The above counters C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter area 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 65a provided as acquired information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The reserve storage area 65a comprises a reserve area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE comprises a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3, and a fourth reserve area RE4. Combinations of numerical information from the win random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored as reserve information in one of the reserve areas RE1 to RE4, according to the winning history of the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

In this case, if multiple consecutive wins occur in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, the numerical information is stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 in chronological order: first hold area RE1 → second hold area RE2 → third hold area RE3 → fourth hold area RE4. By providing four hold areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning ball entries in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 can be reserved and stored.

The number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or even a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the numerical information stored in the first reserve area RE1 of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 37a begins, and at the start of one game, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

We will explain each of the above counters in detail below.

First, we will explain the normal power feature release counter C4. The normal power feature release counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The normal power feature release counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal power reserve area 65c of the main RAM 65 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the normal power feature 34a to an open state based on the value of the stored normal power feature release counter C4.

This pachinko machine 10 has multiple support modes that differ from one another in the manner of support provided by the normal power device 34a. In detail, the support modes are set to a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode so that the frequency with which the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared to a situation in which game balls are continuously being released in the same manner into the play area PA.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery using the normal power device release counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 in both), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power device 34a will be in the open state when the normal power release state is won is set to be more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer. In this case, if the normal power release state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the normal power device 34a is in the open state multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time ensured between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery (i.e., the duration of one display on the normal power display unit 38a) is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 is higher than in the second actuation port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the first actuation port 33. Furthermore, when a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of normal power release state per unit time in the high-frequency support mode compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery, for example. Furthermore, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time are available between one normal power release lottery and the next (for example, the time of the variable display executed by the normal power display unit 38a based on winning through gate 35), the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of the following conditions: increasing the number of releases, lengthening the open time, shortening the reserved time between one normal power release lottery and the next, shortening the average reserved time, and increasing the probability of winning.

Next, we will explain the winning random number counter C1. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a hit/miss table. A hit/miss table for a low probability mode and a hit/miss table for a high probability mode are set as hit/miss tables. In other words, this pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as the lottery modes for the hit/miss lottery means.

In a gaming state where the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is two. On the other hand, in a gaming state where the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referenced in the above lottery, the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 20. Note that the number of random numbers that will result in a win is arbitrary, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a when a gaming ball enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

This pachinko machine 10 has multiple jackpot results set. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: (1) the manner of opening and closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode of the winning/losing lottery means after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and (3) the support mode of the regular electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing control of the special electric winning device 32 is set to a high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode so that the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 is relatively high and low from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, in either the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode, a predetermined number of rounds of play are played up to the upper limit.

Here, round play refers to play that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined maximum duration has elapsed, or a predetermined maximum number of game balls have entered the special electric winning device 32. Furthermore, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is the same fixed number of rounds, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, regardless of the jackpot result, the maximum number of rounds is set to 15.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of opening modes of the special electric winning device 32 are set, with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until when it is closed. In detail, there is a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to a short time of 0.06 seconds, which is shorter than the long time.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area PA every 0.6 seconds. The upper limit for the number of balls required to complete a round play is set to nine. In this case, the long-time mode among the above-mentioned release modes sets the release duration to a time longer than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round play. On the other hand, the short-time mode sets the release duration to a time shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round play, or more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when a single release is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round play. When a single release is performed in the short-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not win any prizes, or that, if any, only one prize will be won.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term mode during each round of play. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short-term mode during each round of play.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, the number of rounds of play, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of rounds of play in one round of play in the high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

The allocation destinations of game results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored as an allocation table in the main ROM 64. The allocation destinations are set to low-probability jackpot results, low-prize high-probability jackpot results, and the most favorable jackpot results.

A low-probability jackpot result is one in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes low-probability mode, and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode will transition to low-frequency support mode if the number of plays reaches the termination threshold number (specifically, 100 plays) after the transition.

A low-prize, high-probability jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes low-frequency win mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes high-probability mode and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue until the lottery result in a win in the win/lose lottery and the game transitions to the jackpot state.

The most favorable jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes high-frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes high-probability mode and the support mode becomes high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue until the lottery result in a win in the win/lose state and the game transitions to the jackpot state.

In relation to the above game states, the normal game state refers to a state in which the win/lose lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, rather than the open/close execution mode. Also, a low prize-winning, high probability jackpot result may not be set as a game result. Furthermore, in the open/close execution mode with a low prize-winning, high probability jackpot result, the number of rounds of play may be fewer than in the case of a low probability jackpot result and a most favorable jackpot result.

In the distribution table, of the jackpot type counter C2 values "0-29," "0-9" corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, "10-14" corresponds to a low-prize, high-probability jackpot result, and "15-29" corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. Here, the present pachinko machine 10 is configured with an expectation effect as one type of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expectation effect refers to a display state that makes the player believe that a variable display state that is likely to result in a prize-related result is one that is likely to result in a prize-related result, from the start of the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 to the derived and displayed result, in a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in which the final stop result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result is a prize-related result. Specifically, the prize-related result is the display of a combination of symbols with the same number on one of the pay lines.

There are two types of expected effects: a reach display and a warning display that is set before a reach display occurs, to anticipate the occurrence of a reach display or a corresponding result.

The reach display includes a display state in which a reach pattern combination is displayed by freezing the patterns in some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows are displayed with varying patterns. It also includes a reach display in which, while a reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern rows are displayed with varying patterns, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, creating a reach effect; and a reach display in which the reach pattern combination is displayed in a reduced size or is not displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image across substantially the entire display surface 41a, creating a reach effect.

Pre-announcement displays include a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns when symbols are displayed in a changing manner in all symbol columns or when symbols are displayed in a changing manner in some symbol columns after the display of changing symbols on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 has begun. They also include a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined mode different from its previous mode, or a mode in which the symbols on the symbol columns are displayed in a predetermined mode different from their previous mode. Such pre-announcement displays can occur in both gameplays when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game in which the same symbol combination is ultimately displayed. Furthermore, in a game in which a jackpot result occurs in which the same symbol combination is not displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Furthermore, in a game in which a miss result occurs, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referencing the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision on whether to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60, but by the audio and light control device 81. In this case, the audio and light control device 81 executes a lottery process for preview displays so that a game turn corresponding to a jackpot result is more likely to produce a preview display, and/or a preview display with a low occurrence rate is more likely to occur, compared to a game turn corresponding to a loss result. Incidentally, the result of this lottery is reflected when the effect for the game turn is executed by the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration in the special symbol display unit 37a and the display duration of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and when the symbol display device 41 begins to vary.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, we will explain the various processes executed to progress the game by the main CPU 63. The processes of the main CPU 63 are roughly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). During this power-on wait process, the system waits for a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) after the main process is started, without proceeding to the next process. During this power-on wait process, the pattern display device 41 starts operating and is initialized. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main CPU 63 are set (step S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided on the power supply/launch control device 78 has been manually operated (step S104), and further whether the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 has been set to "1" (step S105). It also executes a checksum calculation process (step S106) to calculate a checksum, and determines whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was shut off, i.e., the validity of the stored data (step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized upon power-on, for example, when an amusement hall opens for business, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch is pressed, processing proceeds to step S108. Processing also proceeds to step S108 if no power-off occurrence information has been set or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by checksum. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, processing proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, predetermined areas of the main RAM 65 are set to initial values, such as initializing the power outage flag, and a command corresponding to the current game status is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. Furthermore, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) is executed to have the management IC 66 recognize various information, and a data output process is executed to output various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 (step S111). Details of these recognition processes and data output processes will be explained later.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but timer interrupt processing is prohibited when main processing begins. This state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released when step S111 is completed and before step S112 is executed, and timer interrupt processing is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, the data output processing of step S111 ends and timer interrupt processing is not executed until before step S112 is started. Therefore, processing to progress the game in the main CPU 63 will not begin until this situation is reached.

Then, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 continues. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time will be used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S114, a fluctuation counter update process is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. These update processes read the current numerical information from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, add 1 to the read numerical information, and then overwrite the counter from which it was read. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, in step S115, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing step S115, the process returns to step S112, and steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 8. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, the power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it monitors whether a power outage signal corresponding to a power outage has been received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if a power outage is identified, the power outage process is executed and then an infinite loop is entered. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

Then, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal power feature release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and normal power feature release counter C4, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, after which the read numerical information is overwritten onto the original counter. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0." Then, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed as in step S113, and in step S204, the variable counter update process is executed as in step S114.

Then, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether a specific event set as a target for fraud monitoring has occurred (step S205). This fraud detection process monitors the occurrence of multiple types of events, and when a specific event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1". In the following step S206, it is determined whether the game has stopped by determining whether the game stop flag has been set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the process from step S207 onwards is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In port output processing, if output information was set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to provide output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 32b, 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special power winning device 32 to an open state, output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is initiated, and if information is set to switch to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, if information is set to switch the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 to an open state, output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is initiated, and if information is set to switch to a closed state, output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S209). In this ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a are read, and based on the read results, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, or through gate 35. Details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Then, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters stored in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is updated by subtraction are handled collectively, but it is also possible to configure the system to collectively update both subtractive timer counters and additive timer counters.

Then, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of gaming balls (step S211). While the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 continues, one gaming ball is launched at a predetermined launch cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the following step S212, an input status monitoring process is performed, which checks for disconnections in each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a and whether the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are open, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

Then, a special symbol special electric control process is executed to control the execution of a game round and the opening/closing execution mode (step S213). In this special symbol special electric control process, if a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 when the number of reserved information stored in the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit, the numerical information of the win random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored as reserved information in chronological order in the reserved storage area 65a. In addition, in the special symbol special electric control process, provided that the game round or the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress and reserved information is stored, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether the reserved information corresponds to a jackpot win, and if it does correspond to a jackpot win, an allocation determination process is executed to determine which jackpot result the reserved information corresponds to. In addition, the special symbol special signal control process not only performs a win/loss determination process and a distribution determination process, but also, if the pending information does not correspond to a jackpot win, performs a reach determination process to determine whether the pending information corresponds to a reach occurrence, and performs a process to select the duration of the game round using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. A variation command containing duration information corresponding to the results of each process and a type command containing information on the game result are then sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 81, and the special symbol display unit 37a begins displaying the varying symbols. Upon receiving the variation command and type command, the audio and light-emitting control device 81 initiates the display and light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to display the effects for the game round corresponding to the content of these commands. The audio and light-emitting control device 81 also transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the content of the variation command and type command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 begins displaying the varying symbols corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command on the pattern display device 41. This marks the start of one game round.

During a single game round, the special symbol special power control process determines whether the time for that game round to end has elapsed by determining whether the duration of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed. If it is time to end the game round, a process is executed to end the game round with a display corresponding to the game result. In this case, if the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of a jackpot result, a symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot result is displayed frozen on the special symbol display unit 37a. If the current game round corresponds to a loss result, a symbol corresponding to the loss result is displayed frozen on the special symbol display unit 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game round should end is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the audio and light emitting control device 81 ends the presentation for the current game round on the display light emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54. In addition, the audio and light emitting control device 81 sends the final stop command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the presentation for the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

In the special symbol special electric control process, if the result of a game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, a process is executed to start the open/close execution mode. At the start of this process, an opening command indicating that the open/close execution mode is being started is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 81. The special symbol special electric control process also executes processes to start each round of play and to end each round of play. When a round of play starts, the special electric winning device 32 enters an open state, and when a round of play ends, the special electric winning device 32 enters a closed state. During each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round of play is starting is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 81, and a close command indicating that the round of play is ending is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 81. In addition, when the special symbol special electric control process ends the open/close execution mode, an ending command indicating this is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 81. The audio/light-emitting control device 81 causes the display/light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to execute effects for the open/close execution mode in a manner corresponding to the various commands received during the open/close execution mode. Additionally, the audio and light emission control device 81 transmits commands corresponding to commands received during the opening and closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to execute effects for the opening and closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the various commands received during the opening and closing execution mode. Furthermore, in the special pattern special electric control process, when the opening and closing execution mode is terminated, processing is performed to set the win/lose lottery mode and support mode after the opening and closing execution mode has terminated to modes corresponding to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening and closing execution mode.

After executing the special power control process for special symbols in step S213 during the timer interrupt process, the normal power control process for normal symbols is executed (step S214). In the normal power control process, if a win has occurred in the through gate 35, processing is executed to acquire the reserved information for the normal symbols. If reserved information for the normal symbols is stored, an opening determination is made for that reserved information. Furthermore, processing is executed to perform a normal symbol effect in response to the opening determination. Based on the result of the opening determination, processing is executed to open or close the normal power device 34a in the second operating port 34. In this case, if the support mode is low-frequency support mode, the corresponding processing is executed, and if the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the corresponding processing is executed. Furthermore, if the open/close execution mode is active, the support mode immediately before will be low-frequency support mode, even if it was high-frequency support mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information items related to the special map display unit 37a in the special map reserved display unit 37b, and output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reserved information items related to the regular map display unit 38a in the regular map reserved display unit 38b. Also, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set to update the display content of the special map display unit 37a, and output information is set to update the display content of the regular map display unit 38a.

Then, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout status receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation results (step S216). A payout output process is also executed to set the prize ball command as the output target (step S217). An external information setting process is also executed to control the start and end of the output of external signals according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step S218). A management output process is then executed to output information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S219). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, we will explain the configuration used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and through gate 35 based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a. Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration used to input the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area where information of "0" or "1" is stored depending on the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, this area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. Although more than eight types of signals can be input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the number of signals that can be input simultaneously to eight, the group of signals that are input to the input port 63a is switched through switching control by a driver IC.

During the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), the signals to be input to input port 63a are set to the signals from each ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a. When this setting is made, bit 0 D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first prize entry detection sensor 42a, bit 1 D1 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second prize entry detection sensor 43a, bit 2 D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third prize entry detection sensor 44a, bit 3 D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric current detection sensor 45a, bit 4 D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first operation port detection sensor 46a, bit 5 D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second operation port detection sensor 47a, bit 6 D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and bit 7 D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not currently detecting a passing game ball as a detection signal when it has not detected the passing of a game ball, and outputs a HIGH level signal indicating that it is currently detecting a passing game ball as a detection signal when it has detected the passing of a game ball. Input port 63a stores a "0" in the corresponding bit when it receives a LOW level signal, and stores a "1" in the corresponding bit when it receives a HIGH level signal. In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a have not detected the passing of a game ball, a "0" corresponding to the information indicating that it is not currently detecting is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it has detected the passing of a game ball, a "1" corresponding to the information indicating that it is currently detecting is stored in the corresponding bit.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

If it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S303). The first output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a should be output to the management IC 66. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter that specifies to the main CPU 63 the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 each time the 10 prize ball command is output. When the payout control device 77 receives a 10 prize ball command, it controls the drive of the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). The second output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). The third output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and the value of the 15-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag that the main CPU 63 uses to identify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 during round play in the open/close execution mode. The special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) determines that one game ball has entered the special power winning device 32 by confirming that the special power winning flag is set to "1," and subtracts one from the remaining number of balls that can enter the special power winning device 32 during a round of play. When this process of subtracting one from the number of balls that can enter is executed, the special power winning flag is cleared to "0." The fourth output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special power detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. The 15-ball counter is a counter that specifies to the main CPU 63 the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), and the value of the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 each time the 15 prize ball command is output. When the payout control device 77 receives a 15 prize ball command, it controls the drive of the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S314: YES). In this case, the first actuation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316), and the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S317). The first actuation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the first actuation port 33. The special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8) confirms that the first activation winning flag is set to "1" and executes a process to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit of four. The special power control process (step S213) confirms that the first activation winning flag is set to "1" and clears the first activation winning flag to "0" when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed. The fifth output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first activation port detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. The single prize ball counter is a counter that specifies to the main CPU 63 the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the 1 prize ball counter is 1 or greater, a 1 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), and the value of the 1 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 each time the 1 prize ball command is output. When the payout control device 77 receives a 1 prize ball command, it controls the operation of the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a (step S318: YES). In this case, the second actuation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320), and the value of the one-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S321). The second actuation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the second actuation port 34. The special power control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8) confirms that the second activation winning flag is set to "1" and executes a process to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit of four. The special power control process (step S213) confirms that the second activation winning flag is set to "1" and, if the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the second activation winning flag is cleared to "0." The sixth output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second activation port detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal play control process (step S214) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), by confirming that the gate winning flag is set to "1," the process executes a process of storing the current numerical information of the normal play device release counter C4 as normal play device pending information in the normal play device pending area 65c, provided that the number of normal play device pending information stored in the normal play device pending area 65c is less than the upper limit of four. The normal map and normal power control process (step S214) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and if processing corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

As already explained, the timer interrupt process (Figure 8) is initiated at 4 msec intervals. Therefore, when one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a begins detecting a single game ball, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball has been detected by that ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a while that sensor continues to detect that single game ball. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first through seventh output flags.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the dispensing control device 77. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the dispensing control device 77 and the various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device 77, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 11.

The dispensing control device 77 is equipped with an MPU 91. In addition to a dispensing side CPU 92, which is a processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit, the MPU 91 also contains a dispensing side ROM 93, a dispensing side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout-side CPU 92.

The dispensing-side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The dispensing-side RAM 94 is randomly accessible and takes less time to read data than the dispensing-side ROM 93 when compared for the same data capacity. The dispensing-side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the dispensing-side ROM 93.

The payout CPU 92 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main CPU 63. By receiving a prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout CPU 92 controls the payout device 76 to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command. The payout CPU 92 also monitors whether the payout of game balls can be performed normally, and if it determines that the payout of game balls cannot be performed normally, it stops the payout device 76 even if information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the payout RAM 94. The payout CPU 92 also transmits a payout limit command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the payout of game balls cannot be performed normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout limit command, it transmits a notification command to the audio/light-emitting control device 81 so that the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 issue a notification indicating that the payout of game balls cannot be performed normally. The states in which game balls cannot be paid out normally include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 has not been replenished with game balls, an abnormal payout state in which the payout device 76 is not operating normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is open from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball passageway leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection results of this full tank detection sensor are input to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and determines that the full tank state has been released when the state in which game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released.

A no-ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided midway along the game ball passageway leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection results of the no-ball detection sensor are input to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that a no-ball state exists when the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls, and determines that the no-ball state has been lifted when the state in which the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect game balls is lifted.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection results of the payout detection sensor are input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Furthermore, the payout side CPU 92 determines that an abnormal payout state exists when the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is being driven and controlled so that a game ball is paid out, and determines that the abnormal payout state has been released when the state in which the payout detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball is released.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front portion of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the dispensing-side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the dispensing-side CPU 92, and when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the dispensing-side CPU 92. The dispensing-side CPU 92 determines that the front door frame 14 is closed when it receives a closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and determines that the front door frame 14 is open when it receives an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. In addition, the dispensing-side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main-side CPU 63 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a front door close command to the main-side CPU 63 when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when it receives a front door open command, and determines that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when it receives a front door close command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the payout CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout CPU 92. The payout CPU 92 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 96. In addition, the payout CPU 92 transmits a main body open command to the main CPU 63 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a main body close command to the main CPU 63 when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when it receives a main body open command, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when it receives a main body close command.

Referring to the time chart in Figure 12, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the dispensing CPU 92. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly activated at a predetermined interval (e.g., every 2 msec).

First, full tank processing is executed (step S401). As already explained, full tank processing determines whether the tank is full based on the detection results of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, it executes processing to stop the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the tank is full. Furthermore, if the full tank state is released, it executes processing to enable the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the full tank state has been released.

Then, no-ball processing is executed (step S402). As already explained, the no-ball processing determines whether or not the state is a no-ball state based on the detection results of the no-ball detection sensor, and if the state is a no-ball state, it executes processing to stop the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the no-ball state is in effect. Furthermore, if the no-ball state is released, it executes processing to enable the payout of game balls and sends a command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the no-ball state has been released.

Then, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). As already explained, the payout abnormality monitoring process determines whether or not a payout abnormality state exists based on the detection results of the payout detection sensor, and if a payout abnormality state exists, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a command indicating that a payout abnormality state exists is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the payout abnormality state is resolved, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a command indicating that the payout abnormality state has been resolved is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a front door open monitoring process is executed (step S404). As already explained, the front door open monitoring process determines whether the front door frame 14 is open or not based on the detection results of the front door open sensor 95. If the front door frame 14 is open, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls, and a front door open command is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a front door close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, the main body open monitoring process is executed (step S405). As already explained, the main body open monitoring process determines whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, it executes a process to stop the payout of gaming balls and sends a main body open command to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, if the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, it executes a process to enable the payout of gaming balls and sends a main body close command to the main CPU 63.

Then, a command reading process is executed (step S406). In this command reading process, a process is executed to read the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63. The prize ball command is then stored in the payout RAM 94. A prize ball setting process is then executed to add the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball count information in the payout RAM 94 (step S407), and then a payout control process is executed to control the execution of the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 (step S408). In the payout control process, if the unpaid prize ball count information stored in the payout RAM 94 is a value of 1 or greater, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and if the payout detection sensor detects one game ball, the value of the prize ball count information is decremented by 1. If the value of the prize ball count information becomes "0," the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of external signal output according to the results of the various processes executed during this timer interrupt process (step S409).

Next, we will explain the configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC installed in the gaming hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the payout CPU 92. Because the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 can externally output information to the hall computer HC, as shown in FIG. 11.

One external terminal on the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and another external terminal on the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. Regarding the detailed configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided midway along the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 has a branch path SL2 that branches off from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is then connected to the front door open external terminal on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92, but also to the front door open external terminal on the external terminal board 97. This allows a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open to be output to the hall computer HC without control by the dispensing side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in more detail, the signal relay board 98 has a branch path SL4 that branches off from the signal path SL3 that runs from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. This branch path SL4 is then connected to an external terminal for main body open on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92, but also to the external terminal for main body open on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through control by the payout side CPU 92.

Next, we will explain the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC. First, we will explain the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC.

During the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8), the main CPU 63 sets information output to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in high-frequency support mode, information indicating that one game round has ended, information indicating that a predetermined number (e.g., 100) of game balls have been discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, or second operating port 34, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operating port 34.

In the external information setting process (step S409) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 12), the payout CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

The hall computer HC can grasp the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 via the external terminal board 97. For example,
The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payout balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The payout rate in a normal game state other than the open/close execution mode and the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, this payout rate will be referred to as "B")
・Ball payout rate in the open/close execution mode ・Ball payout rate in the high frequency support mode ・Number of games played until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this rate will be referred to as "S")
B-S x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34"
The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S2")
B - (S1 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + S2 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
This allows the hall computer HC to manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls refers to the number of game balls that are paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning status of gaming balls>
Next, we will explain the configuration for managing the winning status of the gaming balls using the management IC 66. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is equipped with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 is also equipped with an I/F 101 and a read terminal 102.

I/F 101 is an interface for sending and receiving signals between the MPU 62 and devices external to it. I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a and commands from the payout CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of I/F 101, and the main CPU 63 executes various processes based on the input detection results and command content, as previously explained. Furthermore, if a signal is output to a device such as the special power driver 32b as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of I/F 101. Furthermore, if a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the audio/light-emitting control device 81 as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, the command is output through the output port of I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting the MPU 62 to a reading device, which is an external device to the pachinko machine 10. The connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a and expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may also be adopted in which an opening is formed in the board box 60a to expose the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60, allowing the reading device to be electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 without having to destroy the board box 60a.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected to each other via an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66, allowing bidirectional communication.

The management side I/F 111 is an interface that receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a group of one-way communication signal paths 118 built into the MPU 62, and transmits various signals to the reading terminal 102 via a group of one-way communication signal paths 119 built into the MPU 62. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a group of two-way communication signal paths 120 built into the MPU 62.

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain its data (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) and is used as read-only. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management RAM 114 is a memory such as an SRAM or DRAM that requires an external power supply to retain its data (i.e., a volatile storage means) and is used as both read and write. The management RAM 114 is randomly accessible and has a faster read time than the management ROM 113 when compared for the same data capacity. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like in response to the execution of the control programs stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and is capable of outputting the measured date and time information in response to instructions from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is also equipped with a backup power supply, allowing it to measure date and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM or DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is used to store information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a-122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a-122p. The contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be explained in detail later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding balls entering the game that is received from the main CPU 63 via the management I/F 111. The contents of the history memory 117 will be explained in detail later.

Next, we will explain the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111. Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with multiple buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p are provided. Each of the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p can input one type of signal via signal paths 118a-118p, and each of the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p stores "0" as first data when the input signal is at a LOW level, and stores "1" as second data when the input signal is at a HIGH level. Note that the relationship between LOW and HIGH and the first and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and outputs a HI level first signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level first signal has been input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new game balls are detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and outputs a HI level second signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level second signal has been input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and outputs a HI level third signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level third signal has been input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fourth signal has been input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game balls are detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, and outputs a HI level fifth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fifth signal has been input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when no new game balls are detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, and outputs a HI level sixth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level sixth signal has been input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and outputs a HI level seventh signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level seventh signal has been input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a low-level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is not in progress, and continuously outputs a high-level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is in progress.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW-level ninth signal when the high-frequency support mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs a HI-level ninth signal when the high-frequency support mode is in effect.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs a HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open.

An output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output the history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period of time when there is a need to output the history information. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although the 11th buffer 122k, 12th buffer 122l, 13th buffer 122m, 14th buffer 122n, and 15th buffer 122o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, they are blank in this pachinko machine 10 and do not receive normal signals. In this way, by providing a greater number of buffers 122a-122p as input ports 121 of the management I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 than the number of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, it is possible to use the management IC 66 in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This increases the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a-118p are formed between the primary CPU 63 and the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p, respectively, in a one-to-one correspondence with the first through sixteenth buffers 122a-122p, but this is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k-118o may not be formed between the primary CPU 63 and the buffers 122k-122o to be blanked.

It was determined during the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 of the management I/F 111, and the management CPU 112 can determine that an output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the types of signals that will be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o were not determined during the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. The identification of the types of these signals by the management CPU 112 is performed by sending a type identification command from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 when control is initiated in the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 following the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, as will be described in detail below. In this case, the information on the types of signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of signals while operating power is being supplied, it references the information stored in the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o, which correspond one-to-one to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The first correspondence area 123a stores information indicating that the signal input to the first buffer 122a is a general winning opening 31, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. The first correspondence area 123a also stores information indicating that the signal input to the first buffer 122a is a general winning opening 31, along with information indicating the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31. The second correspondence area 123b stores information indicating that the signal input to the second buffer 122b is a general winning opening 31, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. The second correspondence area 123b also stores information indicating that the signal input to the second buffer 122b is a general winning opening 31, along with information indicating the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31. The third correspondence area 123c stores information indicating that the signal input to the third buffer 122c is from the general winning opening 31, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition to the information indicating that the signal is from the general winning opening 31, the third correspondence area 123c also stores information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is a special electric winning device 32, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal. The fourth correspondence area 123d also stores information indicating that the signal is a special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls (15) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32. The fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the signal is a first actuation port 33, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. The fifth correspondence area 123e also stores information indicating that the signal is a first actuation port 33, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first actuation port 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is from the second actuation port 34, which is information used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal. The sixth correspondence area 123f also stores information indicating that the signal is from the second actuation port 34, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second actuation port 34. The seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that the signal is from the outlet 24a, which is information used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. The ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high frequency support mode, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. The tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating the front door frame 14, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the type of signal to be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. This allows the management IC 66 to be used in models other than this pachinko machine 10. This increases the versatility of the management IC 66.

Furthermore, rather than outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, information for recognizing the type of signal is output in advance, and information for identifying the type of signal to be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 each time a signal is output, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o.

In addition, information used by the management CPU 112 to identify the types of signals input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is output when the supply of operating power begins. This allows the management CPU 112 to identify the types of signals input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o when play begins on this pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the information that an output instruction signal will be input to the 16th buffer 122p is set during the design stage of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to omit the process of identifying the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p for output instruction signals that are reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the process for identifying the type of such signal.

Next, we will explain the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. Figure 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 has a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. The history area 124 contains multiple pointer information items, each numbered consecutively. A history information storage area 125 is also provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information item. Each history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. Each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, with 1 byte allocated as an area for storing RTC information and 1 byte allocated as an area for storing correspondence information. When correspondence information needs to be stored based on signals input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o (actually, the first through tenth buffers 122a through 122j in this pachinko machine 10), the date and time information currently measured by the RTC 115 is first stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. Then, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a-123o corresponding to those buffers 122a-122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 that corresponds to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, with regard to the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, as already explained, the first through seventh buffers 122a through 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a through 48a, and therefore the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a through 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the type of ball entry sensor 42a through 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry section corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a through 48a is stored in the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a through 123g. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, the first through third prize entry detection sensors 42a through 44a all detect game balls that have entered the general prize entry port 31, and therefore the first through third correspondence areas 123a through 123c corresponding to these first through third prize entry detection sensors 42a through 44a all store information indicating that the general prize entry port 31 is present. Additionally, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33, the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the outlet 24a. If the buffer 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is one of the first through seventh buffers 122a-122g, information on the type of ball entry point corresponding to that buffer 122a-122g is read from one of the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a-123g, and the read information on the type of ball entry point is stored directly in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

Meanwhile, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in high-frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating opening/closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating it is in high-frequency support mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating the front door frame 14.

As explained above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW-level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is not active, and continuously outputs a HIGH-level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is active. This allows the management CPU 112 to determine that the open/close execution mode has started when the LOW-level 8 signal changes from HIGH, and that the open/close execution mode has ended when the HIGH-level 8 signal changes from LOW to LOW. Furthermore, when the LOW-level 8 signal changes from HIGH to LOW, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the LOW-level 8 signal changes from HIGH to HIGH, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Furthermore, when the eighth signal changes from HI to LOW, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As explained above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW-level ninth signal when not in high-frequency support mode and a HIGH-level ninth signal when in high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that high-frequency support mode has begun when the ninth signal changes from LOW to HIGH, and that high-frequency support mode has ended when the ninth signal changes from HIGH to LOW. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from LOW to HIGH, or from HIGH to LOW, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the ninth signal changes from LOW to HIGH, not only the information indicating high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from HI to LOW, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continuously outputs a HIGH level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. This allows the management CPU 112 to determine that the front door frame 14 is open when the 10th signal changes from LOW to HIGH, and to determine that the front door frame 14 is closed when the 10th signal changes from HI to LOW. Furthermore, when the 10th signal changes from LOW to HI, or from HI to LOW, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity has occurred to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In other words, when the 10th signal changes from a LOW level to a HIGH level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Also, when the 10th signal changes from a HIGH level to a LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information are stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

The history information storage area 125 is provided for a sufficient number of times to store all history information generated during a 10-day consecutive business day, during which game balls are continuously fired from opening to closing. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times per day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This makes it possible to store and retain all history information in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separate from the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the pointer information currently being written to in the history memory 117. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the pointer area 126 is set with information specifying pointer information of "0" as the write target. Each time a new piece of history information is stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the last pointer information in the order is to be written and history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to that last pointer information, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that pointer information of "0" is the write target. As a result, if a trigger occurs to store history information that exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the oldest history information will be overwritten with the newest history information, starting with the oldest history information stored in the history information storage area 125.

In addition, when a reading device reads history information from the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0"s, and the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been read from becoming the read target again.

Next, we will explain the specific processing configuration for managing the winning status of gaming balls using the management IC 66. First, we will explain the processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116. Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing executed by the main side CPU 63. Note that the recognition processing is executed in step S110 of the main processing (Figure 7).

First, the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "15" (step S501). The recognition output counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the remaining number of times information output is required to enable the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a-122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 corresponds to. As already explained, the 15 buffers 122a-122o are the targets for signal type recognition, so the recognition output counter is set to "15".

Then, the primary CPU 63 executes the process of outputting an identification start command (step S502). The primary CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to have the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o correspond to. The first through eighth signals input to the first through eighth buffers 122a through 122h are used to output these commands. In other words, the first through eighth signals (i.e., the first through eighth signal paths 118a through 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information are used to output commands to have the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o correspond to. This allows for a reduction in the number of signal paths and simplifies the configuration compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the commands are provided separately from the signal paths 118a through 118p for outputting signals to the first through sixteenth buffers 122a through 122p. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first through eighth buffers 122a through 122h as the first through eighth signals, respectively. Furthermore, in the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HIGH level at the timing when the output of the identification start command begins, in order to allow the management CPU 112 to recognize that a new command has been sent. Furthermore, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HIGH level are set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 determines that it should begin processing to store information on the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o and signal types in the correspondence memory 116.

Then, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and then the nth buffer, followed by the (n+1)th buffer, is set as the signal type recognition setting for the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is between "15" and "13", a type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "12", a type identification command indicating the special winning device 32 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "11", a type identification command indicating the first operating opening 33 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "10", a type identification command indicating the second operating opening 34 and the number of prize balls is read out; if the recognition output counter is "9", a type identification command indicating the outlet 24a is read out; if the recognition output counter is "8", a type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "7", a type identification command indicating the high frequency support mode is read out; if the recognition output counter is "6", a type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read out; and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", a type identification command indicating blank is read out.

Then, the CPU 112 executes output processing for the read type identification command (step S504). Like the identification start command, the type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity, and each bit of data is input as signals 1 to 8 to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h, respectively. During output processing of the identification type command, the output state of signal 9 is switched to HIGH level when output of the identification type command begins, so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. The output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of signal 9 is maintained at HIGH are set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of the identification type command and signal 9. Upon receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer currently being set among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after decrement is "0" (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S506: NO), processing is executed to output a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after decrement (steps S503 and S504).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), the system executes the output process of the recognition end command (step S507). The recognition end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first through eighth buffers 122a through 122h as the first through eighth signals, respectively. Furthermore, in the recognition end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HIGH level when the recognition end command output begins, so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. Furthermore, the output period of the recognition end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HIGH are set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the recognition of the recognition end command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the recognition end command, the management CPU 112 determines that the process of storing the information on the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o and signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed.

Next, the management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 18. The management processing is initiated when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is initiated. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is configured to be faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the combination of processing from step S606 onwards in the management processing is executed 16 or more times between the start of one timer interrupt processing (Figure 8) in the main CPU 63 and the start of the next timer interrupt processing (Figure 8).

When an identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of buffer 122a to 122o for which the signal type is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, followed by the nth buffer and then the (n+1)th buffer.

After that, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), a correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, information on the signal type set in the currently received type identification command is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Then, the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

If a negative judgment is made in step S603, or if the processing of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If an identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the processing returns to step S603, and the processing of steps S604 and S605 is executed again, provided that a new type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES).

If an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, details will be described later, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117. In step S608, details will be described later, an external output process is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102.

Figure 19 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a-122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a-122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Figure 19(a) shows the period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first through eighth signals (i.e., the first through eighth signal paths 118a-118h), Figure 19(b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, Figure 19(c) shows the execution period of the identification state during which processing is performed to identify the correspondence between the first through fifteenth buffers 122a-122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a-122o, and Figure 19(d) shows the timing when the correspondence setting process (step S604) is performed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 begins, output of an identification start command using signals 1 through 8 begins at time t1, as shown in Figure 19(a). Also at time t1, the output state of signal 9 changes from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 19(b). Then, at time t2, while the output of the identification start command continues, the output state of signal 9 changes from HI to LOW, as shown in Figure 19(b). The management CPU 112 determines that a command has been sent from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of signal 9 has changed from HI to LOW, and then determines the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 by checking the information in buffers 122a through 122h. In this case, because the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S601 of the management process (Figure 18). After that, at timing t3, output of the identification start command is stopped, as shown in Figure 19(a).

Then, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using signals 1 to 8 begins, as shown in Figure 19(a). Also at timing t4, the output state of signal 9 changes from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 19(b). Then, at timing t5, while the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of signal 9 changes from HI to LOW, as shown in Figure 19(b). The control CPU 112 determines that a command has been sent from the primary CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of signal 9 has changed from HI to LOW, and determines the content of the command received from the primary CPU 63 by checking the information in buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the control CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5, as shown in Figure 19(d). In this correspondence setting process, information indicating that the general winning slot 31 is selected and information on the number of winning balls is stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in Figure 19(a).

After that, from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the main CPU 63, just as it did from t4 to t6. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from t16 to t18.

Then, at timing t19, output of the identification end command using signals 1 to 8 begins, as shown in Figure 19(a). Also at timing t19, the output state of signal 9 changes from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 19(b). Then, at timing t20, while the output of the identification end command is continuing, the output state of signal 9 changes from HI to LOW, as shown in Figure 19(b). The control CPU 112 determines that a command has been sent from the primary CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of signal 9 has changed from HI to LOW, and determines the content of the command received from the primary CPU 63 by checking the information in buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, because the identification end command has been received, the control CPU 112 ends its identification state at timing t20, as shown in Figure 19(c). Then, at timing t21, output of the identification end command is stopped, as shown in Figure 19(a).

As described above, by configuring the management CPU 112 to recognize whether a command is being output using the 9th signal, it is possible to have the management CPU 112 clearly recognize that a command is being output, even in a configuration in which commands are output using the 1st to 8th signals (i.e., the 1st to 8th signal paths) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 when to store history information.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117. Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output processing is executed in step S219 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 8).

First, the managed object counter stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "10" (step S701). The managed object counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether there are any managed objects that have not yet been identified as whether the signal output status to the management CPU 112 should be changed in this management output process, and to identify which managed objects the signal output status to the management CPU 112 should be changed for. In one management output process, the managed objects for which the main CPU 63 identifies whether the signal output status to the management CPU 112 should be changed are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a, whether the open/close execution mode is being executed, whether the high-frequency support mode is being executed, and whether the front door frame 14 is open or closed, for a total of 10 objects. Therefore, the managed object counter is initially set to "10".

Then, it is determined whether the signal output state to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current value of the managed object counter is at HI level (step S702). If it is not at HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter is 4 or greater, thereby identifying which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the managed object corresponding to the value of the managed object counter (step S703).

If a positive judgment is made in step S703, it is determined whether the output flag in the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning slot detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning slot detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "8" and corresponds to the third winning slot detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, it determines whether the fifth output flag is set to "1." If the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, it determines whether the sixth output flag is set to "1." If the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, it determines whether the seventh output flag is set to "1." As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" during the ball entry detection process (Figure 10).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HIGH (step S705). Then, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative judgment is made in step S703, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to HI level (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether a transition to open/close execution mode has occurred; if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether a transition to high-frequency support mode has occurred; and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has entered the open state. If a positive judgment is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S708).

If a positive judgment is made in step S702, the system determines whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a low level (step S709). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is 4 or greater and the currently managed object is one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a, the system determines whether a high output duration (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first through seventh signals was switched from a low level to a high level. This high output duration is set by the management CPU 112 to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (Figure 18), and is a period that allows the management CPU 112 to reliably identify the output state of the signal that switched from a low level to a high level. Furthermore, if the value of the management target counter is "3" and the current management target is in open/close execution mode, it determines whether the open/close execution mode has ended; if the value of the management target counter is "2" and the current management target is in high-frequency support mode, it determines whether the high-frequency support mode has ended; and if the value of the management target counter is "1" and the current management target is the front door frame 14, it determines whether the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. If an opportunity has arisen to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to a LOW level (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to a LOW level (step S710).

If a negative judgment is made in step S704, if the processing of step S706 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S707, if the processing of step S708 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S709, or if the processing of step S710 is executed, the value of the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter after the decrement is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or greater (step S712: NO), the processing from step S702 onwards is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 21. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (Figure 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112, out of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, is set in a confirmation target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116, out of the first through fifteenth correspondence areas 123a through 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first through tenth correspondence areas 123a through 123j, and therefore in step S801 the confirmation target counter is set to "10."

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S802). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth buffers 122a through 122o are the target for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If a positive determination is made in step S802, RTC information, which includes date and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). During this write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referencing the pointer area 126 in the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S803 is written to the history information storage area 125 in the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Correspondence information is also read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current counter value being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, if the correspondence information is information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also start information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. If the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth correspondence area 123a-123o will be the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth correspondence area 123j will be the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth correspondence area 123e will be the target for reading the correspondence information.

By executing the write process as described above, if the value of the counter to be checked is either the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, or second operating opening 34, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written stores a combination of RTC information and correspondence information indicating either the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, or second operating opening 34 as history information. Also, if the value of the counter to be checked is either the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, or front door frame 14, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written stores a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating either the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, or front door frame 14, and start information as history information.

Then, the target pointer is updated (step S805). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and incremented by one. A determination is made as to whether the pointer information after incrementing by one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after incrementing by one is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S802, or if the processing of step S805 is executed, it is determined whether the correspondence information for which it is to be confirmed whether the signal output has been switched to a LOW level is stored in the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be confirmed (step S806). Specifically, if the current value of the counter to be confirmed is between "8" and "10," the corresponding correspondence area 123h-123j stores any of the following information: opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, or front door frame 14, and therefore a positive judgment is made in step S806.

If a positive determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current counter value among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o is checked to see if it has changed from "1" to "0," thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the master CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from HI to LOW (step S807). If a positive determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808), as in step S803, and a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In this write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a through 123o corresponding to the current counter value being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, not only the correspondence information but also the termination information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. By executing the writing process in this manner, if the value of the counter being checked is either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, and the termination information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

If a negative judgment is made in step S806, if a negative judgment is made in step S807, or if the processing of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S812). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S812: NO), the processing from step S802 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in history memory 117 will be described with reference to the timing chart in Figure 22. Figure 22(a) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, Figure 22(b) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h, Figure 22(c) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, Figure 22(d) shows the period when a HIGH level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and Figure 22(e) shows the timing for writing history information to history memory 117.

At time t1, as shown in Figure 22(a), the output state of the signal input to one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH. Therefore, at time t1, history information is written to history memory 117 as shown in Figure 22(e). Then, at time t2, the signal that was switched to HIGH at time t1 as shown in Figure 22(a) is switched to LOW. However, since this signal is input to one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching to LOW does not result in history information being stored, no history information is written at time t2 as shown in Figure 22(e).

After that, at times t3, t5, t6, t9, t10, t13, and t14, the output state of the signal input to one of the first through seventh buffers 122a through 122g is switched from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figure 22(a). Therefore, at each of these times, history information is written, as shown in Figure 22(e).

As shown in Figure 22(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HIGH from time t4 to time t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is active. Therefore, as shown in Figure 22(e), history information is written at time t4, when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HIGH, and at time t7, when the output state of that signal switches to LOW. In this case, the history information written at time t4 includes start information, and the history information written at time t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to determine the execution period of the open/close execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in chronological order. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, because the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish by comparing this RTC information whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in Figure 22(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HIGH from time t8 to time t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode is active. Therefore, as shown in Figure 22(e), history information is written at time t8, when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to HIGH, and at time t11, when the output state of that signal switches to LOW. In this case, the history information written at time t8 includes start information, and the history information written at time t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to determine the execution period of the high frequency support mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, history information is written to history memory 117 in chronological order. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, because the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is from high-frequency support mode by comparing this RTC information.

As shown in Figure 22 (d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HIGH from time t12 to time t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether the front door frame 14 is open or closed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 22 (e), history information is written at time t12, when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HIGH, and at time t15, when the output state of that signal switches to LOW. In this case, the history information written at time t12 contains start information, and the history information written at time t15 contains end information. This makes it possible to determine the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

In addition, history information is written to the history memory 117 in chronological order. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 occurred while the front door frame 14 was open. Furthermore, because the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish by comparing this RTC information whether history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 occurred while the front door frame 14 was open.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output processing is executed in step S111 of the main processing (Figure 7).

In the data output process, it is first determined whether a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and if the connection signal has been received through the reading terminal 102, a positive determination is made in step S901.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated. In this case, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be restarted in order for the data output process to be executed. Therefore, in order for the history information to be output externally, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be started with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. The power control unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is located on the back of the back pack unit 15. Therefore, in order to perform these stopping and starting operations, the gaming machine main body 12 must be opened relative to the outer frame 11 to expose the back of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, by configuring the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 to be started with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 in order for the history information to be output externally, it becomes difficult for anyone other than the gaming parlor manager to read the history information.

If a positive determination is made in step S901, a determination is made as to whether a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102, thereby determining whether the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 corresponds to confirmation of the control information (programs and data) of the main ROM 64 (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to confirm both the control information and the history information. If control information confirmation is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a control information confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device. If history information confirmation is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device. Note that this is not limited to this, and the reading device for control information confirmation and the reading device for history confirmation may be separate. In this case, if a reading device for control information confirmation is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a control information confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device. If a reading device for history confirmation is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If a positive determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In this output process, programs and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information using a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102, making it possible to confirm whether the control information is authentic and normal.

If a negative judgment is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is sent to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HIGH level. This HIGH level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is long enough for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HIGH level output instruction signal has been input to the 16th buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to HIGH level, processing is executed in the management CPU 112 to output history information. This processing will be explained in detail later.

When the processing of step S903 or step S904 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 continues (step S905). If it continues (step S905: YES), the processing waits in step S905. This makes it possible to prevent processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output processing is terminated.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 24. Note that the external output processing is executed in step S608 of the management processing (Figure 18).

If the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from LOW to HIGH (step S1001: YES), the process for outputting history information from step S1002 onward is executed. Specifically, the number of balls entering the outlet 24a is calculated by first counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the outlet 24a (step S1002). The number of balls entering the general winning slot 31 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the general winning slot 31 (step S1003). The number of balls entering the special winning slot 32 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the special winning slot 32 (step S1004). The number of balls that have entered the first actuation port 33 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is located (step S1005). The number of balls that have entered the second actuation port 34 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is located (step S1006).

Then, by referencing the history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that exist in the period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1007). The period between the history information storage area 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, if there are multiple sections within the entire consecutive pointer information that have a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 and a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and end information indicating the front door frame 14, the total number of balls scored for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14, but the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 does not store correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14, all history information in the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, the number of balls that entered the game while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1007, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the game calculated in steps S1002 to S1006. The following parameters are then calculated using the number of balls that entered the game after this subtraction: The difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port calculated in step S1002 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K1, the difference between the number of balls entering the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port calculated in step S1003 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K2, the difference between the number of balls entering the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port K3, the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port S1005 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K4, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the port S1006 is designated as the number of balls entering the port K5.
First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the special winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D1").
Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 (K2) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Third parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 (K3) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Fourth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 (K4) / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K5) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3")
Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + D3 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") The ratio of the number of prize balls for the prize) to the number of prize balls for the prize at the special electric prize winning device 32) and the eighth parameter: K3 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the special electric prize winning device 32 / the total number of game balls paid out (K2 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the general prize winning port 31 + K3 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the special electric prize winning device 32 + K4 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the first actuation port 33 + K5 × the number of prize balls for the prize at the second actuation port 34). Next, the oldest and newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is used to calculate the total time required for all the history information currently being calculated to be extracted (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Furthermore, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the first output process.

Then, by referencing the history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that exist in the period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 in the opening and closing execution mode is calculated (step S1011). The period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. Furthermore, if there are multiple sections within the entire set of consecutive pointer information between history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode and history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Furthermore, if there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, but the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode does not store correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, all history information in the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 storing correspondence information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode is treated as being in the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is active, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 while the front door frame 14 is in the open state is calculated (step S1012). The method for calculating these numbers of balls is the same as in step S1007, except that it is based on the period in which the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is active.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1012, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1012 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, K11; the difference between the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1012 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, K12; and the difference between the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1011 is set as the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of balls that enter K13, the difference in the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 from the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of balls that enter K14, and the difference in the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1011 from the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is designated as the number of balls that enter K15.
11th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") / ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) 13th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K13/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) 14th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K14/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D12")
・15th parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K15) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11 - (D12 x "number of winning balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + D13 x "number of winning balls for winning into the second actuation port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") Parameter K13 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K12 × "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 × "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 × "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 × "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio. Then, a second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the second output process.

Then, by referencing the history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that exist in the period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 during the high-frequency support mode situation is calculated (step S1015). The period between the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. Furthermore, if there are multiple sections within the entire set of consecutive pointer information between history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence relationship information and start information indicating high frequency support mode and history information storage areas 125 storing correspondence relationship information and end information indicating high frequency support mode, the total number of balls scored for each section is calculated. Also, if there is a history information storage area 125 storing correspondence relationship information and start information indicating high frequency support mode, but the history information storage area 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than that history information storage area 125 does not store correspondence relationship information and start information indicating high frequency support mode, any history information in history information storage areas 125 storing RTC information corresponding to a time later than that storing correspondence relationship information and start information indicating high frequency support mode is treated as being in high frequency support mode.

Then, during the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1015, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1016). The method for calculating these numbers of balls is the same as in step S1007, except that it is based on the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1015.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1016, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a calculated in step S1016 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, the difference between the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1016 is set as the number of balls that entered the outlet 24a, and the difference between the number of balls that entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1015 is set as the number of balls that entered the special winning device 32. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of balls that enter K23, the difference in the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of balls that enter K24, and the difference in the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 is designated as the number of balls that enter K25.
21st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special winning device 32" + K24 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K25 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") / ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K22 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 23rd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K23 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 24th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K24 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
25th parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K25) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + D23 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
Thereafter, a third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the third output process. Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer area 126 is also cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a gaming ball enters any of the general winning slot 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating slot 33, and second operating slot 34, the gaming ball is paid out. Therefore, players play in the hope of a gaming ball entering one of these slots. In this configuration, when a gaming ball enters any of the outlet slot 24a, general winning slot 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating slot 33, and second operating slot 34 (hereinafter referred to as the history-targeted ball entry slots), the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to store and retain information for managing the number and frequency of gaming balls entering each history-targeted ball entry slot. Using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the status of gaming balls entering each history-targeted ball entry slot. Furthermore, because the history information is stored and retained within the pachinko machine 10 itself, unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented.

All ball entry areas that eject game balls from the game area PA are subject to the execution of the history information storage process and are also subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of balls entering any history-target ball entry area using the history information. It also makes it possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls that enter each history-target ball entry area to the number of game balls ejected from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry area that triggered the storage of the history information. This makes it possible to use the history information to obtain a detailed understanding of the game ball entry history at the history target ball entry area.

The history memory 117 stores not only history information corresponding to game balls entering the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is active, history information indicating whether the high-frequency support mode is active, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which game balls enter the history target ball entry section.

The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device, which is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information using the reading device and use the read history information to analyze the manner in which game balls enter the history target ball entry area.

The MPU 62 is provided with a read terminal 102, and a reading device electrically connected to the read terminal 102 can read the program from the main ROM 64. This makes it possible to check whether the program is correct. In this configuration, the read terminal 102, which is used to output the program externally, is used to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 externally. This makes it possible to output the history information externally without complicating the configuration.

It is determined whether the information to be output from the read terminal 102 is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to this determination result is output externally via the read terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is output externally using the read terminal 102 for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be output externally is a program or history information, and outputs the determined information externally. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the read terminal 102 is used for both purposes, it is possible to read out only the necessary information.

Based on information received from a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is determined whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration for selecting information to be output externally.

The MPU 62, which has a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, has a management IC 66 and a read terminal 102. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal path to the read terminal 102 within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal path to the read terminal 102, while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

A management CPU 112 is provided in addition to the main CPU 63, which executes processing to ensure that game balls are paid out based on their entry into either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. The management CPU 112 executes processing to store history information in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the entry patterns of game balls into each history-targeted entry port without excessively increasing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a to each buffer 122a-122g of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal path corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This ensures that the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a-122g (i.e., each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 sends information corresponding to whether the system is in open/close execution mode, whether the system is in high-frequency support mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open to each of the buffers 122h-122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. This allows the type of information corresponding to each of these situations to correspond to each of the buffers 122h-122j (i.e., each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information to the management CPU 112, indicating which type of information each buffer 122a-122j (i.e., each signal path 118a-118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store this correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, the main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information to the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the management IC 66 to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in situations where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area.

The correspondence information is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a-118g, which are used to transmit information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target entry area. This simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration that requires a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the management IC 66 to identify the historical target goal location corresponding to the information to be sent each time the main CPU 63 sends information on the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information on the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a-48a sent from the main CPU 63.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 switches from LOW to HIGH, information is output from the management IC 66 to the read terminal 102. In this case, the management CPU 112 can determine that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for transmitting correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a-122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, a number greater than the number of types of information that need to be sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to accommodate changes in the number of types of information depending on the model of pachinko machine 10 without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a-122p. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is sent from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, the history information contains correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry area that corresponds to that history information. This makes it possible to use the read history information to identify the manner in which the game ball entered each history target ball entry area.

The management IC 66 uses the history information stored in the history memory 117 to calculate various parameters (parameters 1-8, 11-18, and 21-26) corresponding to the manner in which game balls enter the play area PA over a specified period of time. This makes it possible to externally output the various parameters calculated using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated with historical information corresponding to the situation when the front door frame 14 is open excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters for the normal situation when the front door frame 14 is closed. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation in the open/close execution mode and the situation in the high-frequency support mode are calculated. This allows the manager of the amusement hall to understand the ball entry patterns corresponding to each situation.

When various parameters have been calculated, a clearing process for the history memory 117 is executed, thereby initializing the history memory 117. This makes it less likely that so much history information will be stored in the history memory 117 that it exceeds its storage capacity, resulting in the history information that should have been stored being overwritten and erased.

When various parameters are output to the read terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the read terminal 102. This makes it possible to read out various parameters and analyze the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA, and to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that served as the basis for calculating the various parameters.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which various parameters are calculated.

When the main CPU 63 determines that a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 sends output instruction information, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters, and the various parameters resulting from the calculations are output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device external to the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 performs processing at the start of the supply of operating power to determine whether a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and if it determines that a reading device is electrically connected, the main CPU 63 sends output instruction information to the management IC 66. This completes the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the results of those calculations while the main CPU 63 is performing processing at the start of the supply of operating power, i.e., before the main CPU 63 begins normal processing to progress the game. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the results of those calculations from being performed in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, thereby reducing the processing load on the management IC 66.

In a configuration in which an external output corresponding to a game ball entering the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 is sent via the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to easily determine the number and frequency of game balls entering the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 by using the information output via the external terminal board 97, while accurately determining the number and frequency of game balls entering the history target ball entry areas by using the history information stored in the history memory 117.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the type of buffers for which the type of input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111 differs from that of the first embodiment. Also, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to cause the management CPU 112 to identify the type of input signal differs from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will generally be omitted.

Figure 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric current detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

Meanwhile, in the first embodiment described above, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode was input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode was input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 was input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j, but in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as an opening/closing execution mode signal to the thirteenth buffer 122m, the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input as a high-frequency support mode signal to the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as a door-open signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The input of an open/close execution mode signal to the 13th buffer 122m, an active high-frequency support mode signal to the 14th buffer 122n, an open door signal to the 15th buffer 122o, and an output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p were determined during the design phase of the management IC 66. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the corresponding signals are input to the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. Meanwhile, the types of signals input to the first to 12th buffers 122a to 122l were not determined during the design phase of the management IC 66. The types of signals are determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. As with the first embodiment, the process for determining the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 begins.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 of the main process (Figure 7), as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "12," which represents the number of buffers 122a-122l to be recognized for signal type recognition (step S1101). Then, the output process for the identification start signal is executed (step S1102). In this output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting the output of the identification start signal. The period for which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set long enough for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Then, the output count information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output count information is set in the output count counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1103). The output count counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the number of times the type identification signal has been output.

In this embodiment, when the management CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a through the twelfth buffer 122l, a type identification signal is output the same number of times as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that signal type. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a through the twelfth buffer 122l in the first through twelfth correspondence areas 123a through 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a through the twelfth buffer 122l is recognized as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry section corresponding to that signal type.

In step S1103, if the value of the recognition output counter is "12," "11," or "10," the output count counter is set to "10," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31. If the value of the recognition output counter is "9," the output count counter is set to "15," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32. If the value of the recognition output counter is "8," the output count counter is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33. If the value of the recognition output counter is "7," the output count counter is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. If the value of the recognition output counter is "6," the output count counter corresponds to the outlet 24a, but even if a game ball enters the outlet 24a, a payout of the game ball will not be executed, so the output count counter is set to "0." Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is between "5" and "1," there is no corresponding ball entry area and it is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0."

Then, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1104). In this output process, the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is set to a HIGH level, thereby starting the output of the start trigger signal. The period during which the first signal is maintained at a HIGH level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Then, on the condition that the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or greater was set in the output count counter in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In this output processing, the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the type identification signal. The period for which the second signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Then, the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1107), and it is determined whether the value of the output count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or greater (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1105 or if a positive judgment is made in step S1108, output processing of the termination trigger signal is executed (step S1109). In this output processing, the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is set to a HIGH level, thereby starting output of the termination trigger signal. The period for which the third signal is maintained at a HIGH level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Then, the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1110), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after decrement is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or greater (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103, and processing is performed to recognize the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after decrement.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1111: YES), an identification end signal output process is executed (step S1112). In this output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the identification end signal. The period for which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 27. As in the first embodiment, the management process begins when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 begins.

When reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). Then, on the condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If a type identification signal has been received (step S1204: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1205). The reception count counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to determine the number of times a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" if a positive determination is made in step S1203.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1204, or if the processing of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If a termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204. If a termination trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, the value set in the reception count counter is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set to "10," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31; the fourth correspondence area 123d is set to "15," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32; the fifth correspondence area 123e is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33; and the sixth correspondence area 123f is set to "1," which corresponds to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. Additionally, the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l are set to "0." Then, the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1208).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1203, or if the processing of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has finished (step S1209). If reception of the identification end signal has not finished (step S1209: NO), the processing returns to step S1203, and, on the condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), processing from step S1204 onwards is executed. If reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has finished (step S1209: YES), the history setting processing of step S1210 and the external output processing of step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

Figure 28 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 28(a) shows the period when the output state of the first signal is HIGH, FIG. 28(b) shows the period when the output state of the second signal is HIGH, FIG. 28(c) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is HIGH, FIG. 28(d) shows the period when the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is HIGH, FIG. 28(e) shows the period when the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is HIGH, FIG. 28(f) shows the execution period of the identification state during which processing is performed to identify the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a-122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a-122l, FIG. 28(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 28(h) shows the timing when the correspondence setting processing (step S1207) is performed by the management CPU 112.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the control CPU 112 begins, at timing t1, the output states of the first signal, the switching execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW to HIGH, as shown in Figures 28(a), 28(d), and 28(e). This causes output of an identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the control CPU 112 to begin. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the switching execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from HI to LOW. This causes output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the control CPU 112 to stop. At timing t2, the control CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S1201 of the control process (Figure 27), and enters the identification state as shown in Figure 28(f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at a HI level from time t3 to time t4, as shown in Figure 28(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at a HI level from time t5 to time t7, as shown in Figure 28(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in Figure 28(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from time t8 to time t10, as shown in Figure 28(c). This causes a termination trigger signal to be output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process, as shown in Figure 28(h). Because the value of the reception count counter is "1" when this correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information of "1" is stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116 that are currently being set.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at a HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in Figure 28(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at a HI level from timing t13 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t18, timing t19 to timing t21, and timing t22 to timing t24, as shown in Figure 28(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at timings t14, t17, t20, and t23, as shown in Figure 28(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from time t25 to time t27, as shown in Figure 28(c). This causes a termination trigger signal to be output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t26, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process, as shown in Figure 28(h). Because the value of the reception count counter is "10" when this correspondence setting process is executed, the value "10" is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l currently being set in the correspondence memory 116.

After that, at timing t28, as shown in Figures 28(c), 28(d), and 28(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW to HI. This causes the main CPU 63 to start outputting an identification end signal to the management CPU 112. After that, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from HI to LOW. This causes the main CPU 63 to stop outputting the identification end signal to the management CPU 112. At timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes a positive determination in step S1209 of the management process (Figure 27), and the identification state is released as shown in Figure 28(f).

In this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 also includes, as correspondence information, information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry point that triggered the storage of that history information. In this configuration, if there are multiple entry points with the same number of prize balls, these entry points cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 both have a single prize ball, the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 cannot be distinguished in the history information. In such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 in the history information, even in a configuration in which history information is stored as in the second embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, in step S801 of the history setting process, the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is set to "15." This causes all of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o to become confirmation targets.

According to the present embodiment described above, the control CPU 112 can identify the signal paths corresponding to not only the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether the machine is in the open/close execution mode, information corresponding to whether the machine is in the high-frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open, without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to have the control CPU 112 recognize the correspondence between each piece of information and each signal path 118a-118g. When the control CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, a number of pulse signals equal to the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a is output from the main CPU 63 to the control CPU 112 using the second signal. This simplifies the configuration for transmitting correspondence information.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the trigger for executing calculation of various parameters using history information is different from that in the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 29 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 131. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated parameters are then sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. The parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The trigger for calculating various parameters occurs before the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to differentiate the time when various parameters are calculated from the time when they are externally output to the reading device, thereby distributing the processing load.

In addition, by providing a calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters, it is possible to store not only the various parameters for a single calculation trigger, but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers all at once. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate the various parameters at each calculation trigger.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. In detail, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third buffer 122c receives a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the fourth buffer 122d receives a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. A signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the primary CPU 63 to provide the management CPU 112 with an opportunity to calculate various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o, like the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p, was determined during the design phase of the management IC 66. Therefore, without receiving instructions from the primary CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can determine that the corresponding signals described above will be input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p. Meanwhile, the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n were not determined during the design phase of the management IC 66; instead, the types of these signals are determined by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the primary CPU 63. As with the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 begins.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration that enables the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

In the power outage information storage process, if a power outage signal corresponding to a power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1302). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is long enough for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level. After that, in step S1303, power outage processing is executed, followed by an infinite loop in which the system waits until the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the power outage response processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power outage response processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (Figure 18). In the management processing, after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the history setting processing in step S607, the external output processing in step S608, and the power outage response processing are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power outage response processing, if the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1401: YES), steps S1402 to S1406 calculate the number of balls that have entered each of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. Also, in step S1407, similar to step S1007 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above, the number of balls that have entered each type when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Furthermore, in step S1408, various parameters are calculated, similar to step S1008 in the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment described above. In step S1409, a total time is calculated, similar to step S1009 in the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment described above. The calculation result information from step S1408 and the calculation result information from step S1409 are then written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Furthermore, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, in step S1411, the number of balls entering the various types during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, similar to step S1011 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. In step S1412, the number of balls entering the various types during the opening/closing execution mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated, similar to step S1012 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. Also, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated, similar to step S1013 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. Then, the information on the calculation results of step S1414 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, in step S1415, the number of balls entering the various types during high-frequency support mode is calculated, similar to step S1015 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. In step S1416, the number of balls entering the various types during high-frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is open is calculated, similar to step S1016 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. Also, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated, similar to step S1017 of the external output processing (Figure 24) in the first embodiment described above. Then, the information resulting from the calculation in step S1417 is written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Also, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information is attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time. After that, the process enters an infinite loop and waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output processing is executed in step S608 of the management processing (Figure 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S1501: YES), calculation result output processing is executed (step S1502). In this output processing, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, if the calculation result memory 131 only stores various calculation results corresponding to a single calculation trigger, only the various calculation results corresponding to that single calculation trigger are read by the reading device. However, if the calculation result memory 131 stores various calculation results corresponding to multiple calculation triggers, the various calculation results corresponding to those multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device.

Then, a process for outputting history information is executed (step S1503). In this output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is output sequentially to the reading terminal 102. This allows the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 to read the various pieces of history information stored in the history area 124. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, the worker using the reading device can perform a detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

Then, a clearing process is executed (step S1504). In the clearing process, all of the history information storage area 125 in the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is also cleared to "0". This causes the history area 124 to be initialized. In addition, in the clearing process, all of the areas in the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". This causes the calculation result memory 131 to be initialized.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power will be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, causing the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters. This makes it possible for the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

The various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are written sequentially to the calculation result memory 131. This allows the various parameters to be stored in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read using a reading device, it is possible to read out the various parameters for multiple business days all at once.

When various parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131, information that identifies the time when the various parameters were calculated is written to the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze the various parameter information while knowing when the various parameters were calculated.

In addition, when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for that trigger are written to the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0." This makes it less likely that new history information will be written to the history memory 117 when the maximum number of pieces of history information that can be stored in the history memory 117 has already been stored.

Furthermore, the information to be output to the reading device may be limited to the various parameter information stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output to the outside. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power outage response processing executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration that differs from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the power outage response processing executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). These calculation processes include steps S1402 to S1409, S1411 to S1413, and S1415 to S1417 of the power outage response process (Figure 32) in the third embodiment described above.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within a reference range (step S1603).
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") ratio Eighth parameter: Two parameters, namely, the ratio of K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34"), are set as parameters to be determined as to whether they are within a reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, a positive determination is made in step S1603, as it is determined that the predetermined parameters are within the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh and eighth parameters, and other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters instead of or in addition to the seventh and eighth parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 (K2) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as the predetermined parameter. In this case, for example, if the value of the second parameter is greater than or equal to 0.1 and less than or equal to 0.2, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be within the reference range. Also, only the predetermined parameter to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated in the various calculation processes of step S1602.

If the specified parameters are not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing to which the calculation result information written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the specified parameter is within the reference range (step S1603: YES), the processing of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters when the specified parameter is not within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, if an abnormal situation occurs, the history of that situation is left in the calculation result memory 131, while reducing the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131.

If a positive determination is made in step S1603, or if the processing of step S1604 is executed, a clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S1605). In this clearing process, all of the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is also cleared to "0". This resets the history area 124 to an initialized state. After the processing of step S1605 is executed, an infinite loop is entered, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described above, it is determined whether the contents of the various calculated parameters fall within a reference range, and only the various parameters determined not to fall within the reference range are written to the calculation result memory 131. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131, and therefore the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 131.

Fifth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters differs from that of the third embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the third embodiment. Note that the description of the configuration that is the same as the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 35 (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S712 during the management output process (Figure 20).

It is determined whether a game ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 (step S1701). If a positive determination is made in step S1701, an increment process is executed on the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1702). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is determined based on the number of times step S705 was executed in the management output process (Figure 20) for this processing round. The determined number of game balls is then added to the ball entry counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of 500 (step S1703). If it is equal to or greater than 500 (step S1703: YES), a subtraction process is executed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1704). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 500. Then, a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1705). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

Figure 35 (b) is a flowchart showing the calculation processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that this calculation processing is executed in place of the power outage response processing in the third embodiment. Therefore, the calculation processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (Figure 18), and in the management processing, after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the history setting processing in step S607, the external output processing in step S608, and the calculation processing are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). These calculation processes are identical to steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (Figure 32) in the third embodiment described above.

According to the embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 63, making it possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA within one business day.

Furthermore, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that a game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculations of the various parameters when a game is not being played continuously.

Sixth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters differs from that of the fifth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the fifth embodiment. Note that the description of the configuration that is the same as the fifth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S712 during the management output process (Figure 20).

It is determined whether a gaming ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). The continuation counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine the period of time during which no gaming ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34.

If the value of the continuation counter after incrementing by one is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag stored in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). The stop reference value is set so that a positive judgment is made in step S1903 if no game balls enter any of the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 for five consecutive seconds. The time measurement flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not to measure time to determine the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. If the value of the time measurement flag is "0," no time measurement is made; if the value of the time measurement flag is "1," time measurement is made. If a positive judgment is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1903, if the processing of step S1904 is executed, or if the processing of step S1905 is executed, and the time measurement flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S1906: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time required to determine the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to HI level.

It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after incrementing by 1 is equal to or greater than the indication reference value (step S1908). The indication reference value is set so that a positive determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If a positive determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and output processing of a calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1910). In this output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at a HI level for a specific period of time. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at a HI level.

According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period of time elapses, making it possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when no game is being played, and is resumed from the state before the stop when a game is started. This makes it possible to exclude situations where no game is being played from the calculation of various parameters, and to appropriately derive various parameters when game play is being played.

In addition, instead of using a measurement counter to measure whether a predetermined period has elapsed, it may be measured using the RTC 115.

Seventh Embodiment
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the control CPU 112 to calculate various parameters differs from that of the first embodiment, and the occurrence of a calculation trigger is not determined by the main CPU 63 but is performed independently by the control CPU 112. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that a description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that this calculation process is executed when a positive determination is made in step S812 during the history setting process (Figure 21).

During the history setting process for this processing round, it is determined whether history information corresponding to the occurrence of game balls entering any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 has been stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). If a positive determination is made in step S2001, an increment process is performed on the ball entry counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S2002). In this increment process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is determined based on the number of times history information corresponding to the occurrence of game ball entry has been stored during the history setting process for this processing round. The determined number of game balls is then added to the ball entry counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2003). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S2003: YES), a subtraction process is performed on the ball entry counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). In this subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". Then, various calculation processes are performed (step S2005). In these calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (Figure 32) in the third embodiment are performed.

According to the embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number. In this case, various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 63, making it possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA within one business day.

Furthermore, since the various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the various parameters are calculated on the condition that a game is being played. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless calculations of the various parameters when a game is not being played continuously.

In addition, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the calculation trigger for various parameters is determined independently by the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing to determine the calculation trigger for various parameters, thereby reducing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Eighth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 differs from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the configuration that is the same as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 (see Figure 29). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters resulting from the calculation to the calculation result memory 131. In addition, in this embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has ended, a signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are each sent individually from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, the number of correspondence relationship areas in the correspondence relationship memory 116 among the first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating which entry area corresponds to which, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information corresponding to the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode, the eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode, the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the start of opening the front door frame 14, and the thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores information corresponding to the end of opening the front door frame 14. Therefore, in step S2101, the confirmation target counter is set to "13".

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S2102). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth buffers 122a through 122o are the target for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth buffer 122j is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2102, RTC information, which is date and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In this write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 currently being written to is identified by referencing the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S2103 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. Note that if the value of the counter being checked is "n," the nth correspondence area 123a-123o is the area from which correspondence information is read. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10," the tenth correspondence area 123j will be the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth correspondence area 123e will be the target for reading the correspondence information.

Then, the value of the target pointer is incremented by 1 (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and this numerical information is incremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). These calculation processes are identical to steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment described above. The various parameters and total time information for the calculation results are then written to the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Furthermore, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, the status information handover process is executed (step S2109). In this handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current status is in open/close execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. This status information is then written to the management-side RAM 114.

Then, a clearing process is performed on the history memory 117 (step S2110). In this clearing process, all of the history information storage area 125 in the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This initializes the history area 124. After this clearing process is performed, the status information written to the management RAM 114 in step S2109 is read. If status information indicating that the device is in the open/close execution mode is stored, history information indicating that the device is in the open/close execution mode is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. If status information indicating that the device is in the high frequency support mode is stored, history information indicating that the device is in the high frequency support mode is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. Furthermore, if status information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2102, if a negative judgment is made in step S2106, or if the processing of step S2110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2112). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2112: NO), the processing from step S2102 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

According to the present embodiment described above, various parameters are calculated when the amount of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit of the number of items that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the number of items to be stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit of the number of items that can be stored, making it impossible to accurately calculate various parameters.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been used to calculate various parameters from being used again to calculate various parameters.

In addition, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information handover process is executed. This allows state information to be managed appropriately.

Ninth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from those of the first embodiment. Note that the description of the configurations that are the same as those of the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 39 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. The first counters 141a to 144a in each of areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has changed from a low level to a high level. The second counters 141b to 144b in each of areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has changed from a low level to a high level. The third counters 141c to 144c in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has changed from a low level to a high level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has changed from a low level to a high level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from a low level to a high level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has changed from a low level to a high level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from a low level to a high level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from a low level to a high level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from a low level to a high level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from a low level to a high level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from a low level to a high level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n in each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has changed from a low level to a high level. The 15th counters 141o to 144o in each of areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from LOW level to HIGH level.

However, the objects of measurement using the first through fifteenth counters 141a-141o, 142a-142o, 143a-143o, and 144a-144o are the first through seventh buffers 122a-122g, which receive signals corresponding to balls entering either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. Therefore, the eighth through tenth buffers 122h-122j, which receive signals corresponding to status information such as whether the machine is in open/close execution mode, high-frequency support mode, or whether the front door frame 14 is open, are excluded from the above measurement objects. Whether or not these buffers are subject to measurement is determined based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a-123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112, out of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, is set in the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116, out of the first through fifteenth correspondence areas 123a through 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first through tenth correspondence areas 123a through 123j, and therefore in step S2201 the confirmation target counter is set to "10."

Then, it is determined whether the buffer 122a-122o corresponding to the current counter to be checked is a buffer to which a status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the following correspondence information is stored in the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current counter value to be checked: information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In this setting process, if the output state of an eighth signal indicating whether the device is in the opening/closing execution mode switches from a low level to a high level, first state information indicating that the device is in the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the management RAM 114. If the output state of the eighth signal switches from a high level to a low level, the first state information is erased from the management RAM 114. Furthermore, if the output state of a ninth signal indicating whether the device is in the high frequency support mode switches from a low level to a high level, second state information indicating that the device is in the high frequency support mode is stored in the management RAM 114. If the output state of the ninth signal switches from a high level to a low level, the second state information is erased from the management RAM 114. Furthermore, when the output state of the tenth signal, which indicates whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, switches from a low level to a high level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal switches from a high level to a low level, the third state information is erased from the management RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the system checks whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current counter value among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, which receives a signal with information different from the status information, has changed from "0" to "1," thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S2204). If a positive determination is made in step S2204, an increment process is performed on the corresponding total counter (step S2205). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current counter value among the first through fifteenth total counters 141a through 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. For example, if the counter value is "5," the fifth total counter 141e is added; if the counter value is "1," the first total counter 141a is added.

Then, by referencing the status information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether the device is in the first state, i.e., whether it is in the open/close execution mode (step S2206). If the device is in the first state (step S2206: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the first state (step S2207). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the counter to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first counter 142a for the first state is the counter to be incremented.

Then, by referencing the status information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether the device is in the second state, i.e., whether it is in high-frequency support mode (step S2208). If the device is in the second state (step S2208: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the second state (step S2209). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the one to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first counter 143a for the second state is the one to be incremented.

Then, by referencing the status information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether the third state is being held, i.e., whether the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If the third state is being held (step S2210: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the third state (step S2211). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the one to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first counter 144a for the third state is the one to be incremented.

If the processing of step S2203 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2204, if a negative judgment is made in step S2210, or if the processing of step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2213: NO), the processing from step S2202 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of game balls entering the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment above, but is instead stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this manner, by storing information on the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a, the external output processing in this embodiment (Figure 24) does not require the steps of step S1002, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the outlet 24a; step S1004, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32; step S1005, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the first operating port 33; and step S1006, which calculates the number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load required to calculate various parameters.

Note that in the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31, such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c all correspond to the general winning opening 31, so it is necessary to perform a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Furthermore, the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 when the front door frame 14 is open during the opening/closing execution mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (Figure 24) in this embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 when the front door frame 14 is open during the high-frequency support mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 when the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (Figure 24) in this embodiment.

Tenth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing history information is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 41 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, main ROM 64, main RAM 65, management IC 66, I/F 101, and read terminal 102, similar to the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is also provided with a management I/F 111, management CPU 112, management ROM 113, and management RAM 114, similar to the first embodiment.

In contrast, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, or a history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 has a calculation result memory 131, as in the third embodiment. Because the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, or a history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the ball entry history for the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores information necessary when executing a program in the main CPU 63, also serves as a memory for storing ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I/F 111, and when an opportunity arises to calculate various parameters, it accesses the main RAM 65 to read the goal history and uses the read goal history to calculate various parameters. The calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the calculation result memory 131 provides various parameters to the reading device, but the goal history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device.

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the goal detection process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the goal detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

If it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a (step S2301: YES). In this case, the value of the general prize counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2302). The general prize counter is a counter that stores the number of balls that have entered the general prize opening 31 as a ball entry history. The value of the general prize counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 131. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general prize counter is retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2303).

If it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a (step S2304: YES). In this case, the value of the general prize counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2305). Then, the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2306).

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a (step S2307: YES). In this case, the value of the general prize counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2308). Then, the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2309).

If it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3210: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2311). The value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2312). The special electric winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 as a ball entry history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special electric winning counter is retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the 15-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2313).

If it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S2314: YES). In this case, the first actuation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2315). The value of the first actuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2316). The first actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the first actuation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first actuation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first actuation counter is retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2317).

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a (step S2318: YES). In this case, the second actuation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2319). The value of the second actuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S2320). The second actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls that have entered the second actuation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second actuation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second actuation counter is retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Then, the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2321).

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S2322: YES). In this case, the value of the Out Counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2323). The Out Counter is a counter that stores the number of balls that have entered the outlet 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the Out Counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, because backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the Out Counter is stored and retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from a value of "0" to a value of "1," it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S2324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history for the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65 as the number of balls that have entered each entry point. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to output a signal to the management CPU 112 every time a ball enters any of the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for outputting signals from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In this embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls that have entered the general winning slot 31 from the general winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that have entered the special winning device 32 from the special winning counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that have entered the first operating slot 33 from the first operation counter in the main RAM 65, reads the number of balls that have entered the second operating slot 34 from the second operation counter in the main RAM 65, and reads the number of balls that have entered the outlet 24a from the outlet counter in the main RAM 65. The read-out numbers of balls are then used to calculate the first through eighth parameters described in the first embodiment. However, since the number of balls that entered when the front door frame 14 was open is not measured separately from the number of balls that entered when the front door frame 14 was closed, the first through eighth parameters are calculated including the number of balls that entered when the front door frame 14 was open. Furthermore, because the number of balls that enter during the opening and closing execution mode and the number of balls that enter during the high-frequency support mode are not measured individually, the first through eighteenth parameters and the twenty-first through twenty-sixth parameters described in the first embodiment above are not calculated. The calculated first through eighth parameters are written to the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters currently written in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0."

In addition, instead of the management IC 66 independently accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of balls that have been scored, stored in the main RAM 65 as a scoring history, may be transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control from the main CPU 63. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 from accessing the main RAM 65 simultaneously.

Eleventh Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the history of balls entering each ball entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that differ from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 43 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62, as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, main ROM 64, main RAM 65, management IC 66, I/F 101, and read terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is also provided with a management I/F 111, management CPU 112, management ROM 113, management RAM 114, correspondence memory 116, and history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

In contrast, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 does not have an RTC 115. Furthermore, in addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is also provided with an alert light-emitting unit 151. The light emission of the alert light-emitting unit 151 is directly controlled by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 and calculates various parameters using the information on the history of balls entering each entry point read from the history memory 117. The light emission state of the alert light-emitting unit 151 is then controlled according to the content of the various calculated parameters. The alert light-emitting unit 151 is housed in the storage space of the board box 60a of the main control unit 60. However, the board box 60a is formed transparent, and the alert light-emitting unit 151 is provided so that the light emission state of the alert light-emitting unit 151 can be visually confirmed from outside the board box 60a. This allows the gaming machine main body 12 to be opened relative to the outer frame 11, enabling visual inspection of the main control device 60, and makes it possible to visually check the light-emitting state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 without having to open the circuit board box 60a.

Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment above. In detail, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric current detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment described above, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, a signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input as the tenth signal to the tenth buffer 122j. However, in this embodiment, the signals corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 are not input to the input port 121. In other words, no signals related to the ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals that will be input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o are not determined during the design stage of the management IC 66; these signal types are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. As with the first embodiment, the process for identifying this signal type is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and management CPU 112 begins. On the other hand, it was determined during the design stage of the management IC 66 that an output instruction signal will be input to the sixteenth buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 can identify that an output instruction signal will be input to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving instructions from the main CPU 63.

Figure 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has changed from a low level to a high level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has changed from a low level to a high level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has changed from a low level to a high level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has changed from a low level to a high level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from a low level to a high level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has changed from a low level to a high level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from a low level to a high level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from a low level to a high level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from a low level to a high level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from a low level to a high level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from a low level to a high level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has changed from a low level to a high level. The 15th buffer counter 152o stores information about the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has changed from LOW level to HIGH level.

However, the objects of measurement using the counters for the first to fifteenth buffers 152a to 152o are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, to which signals corresponding to the result of a ball entering either the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the above measurement objects. Whether or not these are objects of measurement is determined based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (Figure 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112, out of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, is set in the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, the number of correspondence relationship areas in the correspondence memory 116, out of the first through fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a through 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first through seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a through 123j, and therefore in step S2401 the confirmation target counter is set to "7."

Then, by checking whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to that buffer has switched from LOW to HIGH (step S2402). Note that if the value of the counter to be checked is "n," the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the target for checking the numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer 122e is the target for checking the numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first buffer 122a is the target for checking the numerical information.

If a positive determination is made in step S2402, an increment process is performed on the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o (step S2403). In this increment process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5," the fifth buffer counter 152e is the counter to be incremented, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1," the first buffer counter 152a is the counter to be incremented.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2402, or if the processing of step S2403 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2405). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2405: NO), the processing from step S2402 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the history of game balls entering the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment above, but is instead stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the external output processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output processing is executed in step S608 of the management processing (Figure 18).

If the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HIGH (step S2501: YES), the number of counters among the first through fifteenth buffer counters 152a through 152o to which the management CPU 112 is to output count information is set in the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S2502). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas among the first through fifteenth correspondence areas 123a through 123o in the correspondence memory 116 that store information other than blank information is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained in this embodiment, since information other than blank information is stored in the first through seventh correspondence areas 123a through 123g, the output target counter is set to "7" in step S2502.

Next, the correspondence information stored in the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 corresponding to the current value of the output target counter is read (step S2503), and the count information stored in the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117 corresponding to the current value of the output target counter is read (step S2504). In this case, if the value of the output target counter is "n," the nth correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target from which the correspondence information is read, and the nth buffer counters 152a to 152o are the target from which the count information is read. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5," the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target from which the correspondence information is read, and the fifth buffer counter 152e is the target from which the count information is read. If the value of the output target counter is "1," the first correspondence area 123a is the target from which the correspondence information is read, and the first buffer counter 152a is the target from which the count information is read.

Then, information output processing is executed (step S2505). In the information output processing, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the count information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the count information for the correspondence information to be output this time.

Then, the value of the output target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether the value of the output target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2507). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or greater (step S2507: NO), the processing from step S2503 onwards is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. Note that if a positive determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (Figure 8).

First, a determination is made as to whether a trigger for calculating various parameters has occurred (step S2601). This trigger occurs when the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, and, as in the fifth embodiment, whenever the total number of game balls entering the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special power winning device 32, first actuation port 33, and second actuation port 34 exceeds the trigger threshold number of 500. Because the first execution of the parameter management process after the supply of operating power begins is set as the trigger for calculation, the trigger for calculating various parameters can be easily generated by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF and then ON again. If a positive determination is made in step S2601, a notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters is executed, as described below. Therefore, the ball entry patterns in the play area PA up to that point can be ascertained simply by turning the power OFF and ON. Furthermore, by configuring the system so that a calculation trigger occurs each time the total number of game balls entering the game area reaches or exceeds the trigger reference number of 500, it becomes possible to precisely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the goal scoring history is read from the counter that stores the goal scoring history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 is able to recognize the buffer counter 152a to 152o from which the goal scoring history is to be read, based on the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various calculation processes are performed (step S2603). In these calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S2602 and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to that ball entry history. Using the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64, the main CPU 63 can determine which of the outlet 24a, general prize entry port 31, special electric prize entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 each ball entry history read in step S2602 corresponds to, and can also determine the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602.

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S2603 are as follows:
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") The ratio of "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" to "total number of game balls paid out" is calculated as follows: eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34").

Then, it is determined whether the calculated parameters are within the first range (step S2604). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the calculated parameters are within the first range and a positive determination is made in step S2604. If a positive determination is made in step S2604, a first alarm state setting process is executed (step S2605). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to enter the first alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether the calculated parameters are within the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is met, the calculated parameters are deemed to be within the second range and a positive determination is made in step S2606. If a positive determination is made in step S2606, a second alarm state setting process is executed (step S2607). In this setting process, the light emission of the alarm light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to enter the second alarm state. In this case, the alarm light-emitting unit 151 emits yellow light.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2606, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the setting process for the third notification state is executed (step S2608). In this setting process, the light emission of the notification light-emitting unit 151 is controlled to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting unit 151 emits red light.

The light emission state set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 will continue until a new notification state is set for the notification light-emitting unit 151 or until the supply of operating power to the notification light-emitting unit 151 is stopped. Furthermore, since the notification state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light-emitting unit 151 is temporarily turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission state of the notification light-emitting unit 151 will be controlled so that it will be in a light emission state corresponding to the type of notification state information stored in the main RAM 65.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The ball entry history for the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34 is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is instead stored as information on the number of times a ball has been detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

An indicator light 151 is provided to indicate the content corresponding to the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112. This allows the pachinko machine 10 itself to indicate the content corresponding to the various parameters, allowing the manager of the amusement hall or the like to understand the state of balls entering the game area PA without having to read the information stored in the history memory 117.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with an MPU 62 and a notification light-emitting unit 151. This makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light-emitting unit 151.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light-emitting unit 151 are performed by the main CPU 63, not the management CPU 112. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content from the notification light-emitting unit 151.

The first notification state is entered when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the second notification state is entered when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, and the third notification state is entered when the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to neither the first nor the second range. In other words, rather than the various parameters being reported as they are, content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters fall is reported. This makes it possible to prevent too many notification patterns from appearing on the notification light-emitting unit 151, and reduces the load on controlling the notification light-emitting unit 151.

In addition, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of power to the notification light-emitting unit 151 may continue, thereby maintaining the light-emitting state that was in effect immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to understand the state of the game ball entering the game area PA by checking the notification light-emitting unit 151.

Instead of this configuration, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be configured to be turned off when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light corresponding to the results of the various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power was stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light-emitting unit 151 before opening at an amusement hall, it may be possible to ascertain the ball entry patterns on the previous business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to a configuration in which the notification light-emitting unit 151 is used, but may also be a display device with a display surface, such as a symbol display device 41, or a speaker unit 54. Furthermore, a signal corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may also be output externally to the hall computer HC of the gaming hall via the external terminal board 97.

The special symbol display unit 37a of the special symbol unit 37 or the ordinary symbol display unit 38a of the ordinary symbol unit 38 may also function as the notification light-emitting unit 151. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 begins, and depending on whether the calculation result falls within the first range, the second range, or somewhere else as in the above embodiment, the special symbol display unit 37a or the ordinary symbol display unit 38a may issue a notification corresponding to the calculation result immediately after the supply of operating power begins. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition for the display of the changing pattern on the special symbol display unit 37a or the start condition for the display of the changing pattern on the ordinary symbol display unit 38a is met, or may be temporarily suspended when the start condition for the display of the changing pattern is met and resumed when the display of the changing pattern is finished. This configuration allows the special symbol display unit 37a or the ordinary symbol display unit 38a to also serve as a notification means for notifying the state of a game ball entering the game area PA.

The notification light-emitting unit 151 may be located in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be located behind the window panel 52 on the pachinko machine 10, in a position that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to check the notification content corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without having to open the gaming machine main body 12 or front door frame 14.

Twelfth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for providing the information on each goal score result to the management IC 66 differs from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a to the main CPU 63 and management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 via the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 via the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 via the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special current detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 via the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 via the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 via the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 via the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching off from the first signal path SL11 at a midpoint, and this first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A second branch path SL22 is formed by branching off from the second signal path SL12 at a midpoint, and this second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A third branch path SL23 is formed by branching off from the third signal path SL13 at a midpoint, and this third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching off from the fourth signal path SL14 at a midpoint, and this fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching off from the fifth signal path SL15 at a midpoint, and this fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the sixth signal path SL16, and this sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the seventh signal path SL17, and this seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a are input to the management IC 66 without processing by the main CPU 63. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing to have the management CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of each of the outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, thereby reducing the processing load on the main CPU 63.

In addition, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are located within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access these branch points and the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, preventing fraudulent activity such as inputting abnormal ball-scoring results only to the management IC 66.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 is provided with a management IC 66, but in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided. Instead, the main CPU 63 executes a process to manage the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. The following describes the differences from the first embodiment. Note that the same components as those in the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

Figure 50 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical configuration of the main control unit 60 and audio/light emitting control unit 81 in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment above, the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 is provided with an MPU 62. As in the first embodiment above, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, main ROM 64, main RAM 65, and I/F 101, but does not have a management IC 66. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a, as well as commands from the payout CPU 92, are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 based on the input detection results and command contents, as already explained. Furthermore, when various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 and a signal is output to devices such as the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101, and when various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 and a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the audio/light emitting control device 81, the command is output through the output port of the I/F 101.

The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97, as in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, signals were output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, but no signals were output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. In this embodiment, signals are output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, and signals are output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. The types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, i.e., the content of the information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, are the same as in the first embodiment. The hall computer HC outputs a check start instruction signal to the main CPU 63, as will be described in more detail below, to instruct the main CPU 63 to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 and to notify the results of the calculation.

When calculations using this ball entry history are being performed and when the results of those calculations are being announced, the display control of the pattern display device 41 will be executed in a corresponding manner. Instructions for executing such display control are executed by the audio and light emitting control device 81 based on commands sent from the main CPU 63. More specifically, the audio and light emitting control device 81 comprises an audio and light emitting control board 161 equipped with an MPU 162. The MPU 162 of the audio and light emitting control board 161 incorporates an audio and light side CPU 163, which is a processing device including a control unit and a calculation unit, as well as an audio and light side ROM 164, an audio and light side RAM 165, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The acousto-optical side ROM 164 is a memory (i.e., non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The acousto-optical side ROM 164 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the acousto-optical side CPU 163.

The sound/light side RAM 165 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound/light side RAM 165 is randomly accessible and has a faster read time than the sound/light side ROM 164 when compared for the same data capacity. The sound/light side RAM 165 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the sound/light side ROM 164.

The sound/light side CPU 163 receives commands from the main side CPU 63, but does not send commands to the main side CPU 63. As in the first embodiment above, the sound/light side CPU 163 receives variation commands, type commands, and opening commands from the main side CPU 63. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives these commands, it executes a process to determine the effect corresponding to the received command, and controls the light emission of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output of the speaker unit 54 in accordance with the determined content. It also sends a command corresponding to the determined content to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the content of the received command.

In addition to the above commands, the sound/light CPU 163 also receives a demo start command and a check start command from the main CPU 63. The demo start command is a command that instructs the start of a demo effect. A demo effect is a start wait effect that is initiated by the pattern display device 41, display light-emitting unit 53, and speaker unit 54 when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the end of the previous game round. In the start wait effect, the pattern display device 41, display light-emitting unit 53, and speaker unit 54 execute an effect that is different from the effect for the game round and the effect for the open/close execution mode. The check start command, which will be described in detail later, is a command that instructs the pattern display device 41 to change its display control execution mode to a corresponding mode during the execution of a calculation that uses the results of this ball entry history management and during the notification of the calculation results.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63.

Steps S2701 to S2705 are identical to steps S201 to S205 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 8) in the first embodiment. Then, a check process is performed (step S2706). Details of the check process will be described later, but it uses the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 to calculate various parameters and perform processing to notify the results of the calculations.

Then, it is determined whether game play is currently stopped or whether the check result display period is in progress (step S2707). As with the first embodiment, if the fraud detection process (step S2705) confirms that a specified event (e.g., detection of unauthorized radio waves or unauthorized vibrations) has occurred, the game stop flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1," and it is determined in step S2707 that game play is currently stopped. Note that if it is confirmed that the specified event has ceased to occur, the game stop flag is cleared to "0," and it is no longer determined in step S2707 that game play is currently stopped. The check result display period is the period during which the calculation results of various parameters performed using the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 are announced. This period is set as the check result display period when the announcement begins in step S2706, and is canceled when the announcement ends in step S2706.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2707, steps S2708 to S2719 are executed to progress the game. Specifically, in step S2708, port output processing is executed similarly to step S207 in the first embodiment, in step S2709, reading processing is executed similarly to step S208 in the first embodiment, in step S2710, ball entry detection processing is executed, in step S2711, timer update processing is executed similarly to step S210 in the first embodiment, in step S2712, launch control processing is executed similarly to step S211 in the first embodiment, and in step S2713, input status monitoring processing is executed similarly to step S212 in the first embodiment. In step S2714, special map special power control processing is executed, in step S2715, normal map normal power control processing is executed similarly to step S214 in the first embodiment above, in step S2716, display control processing is executed similarly to step S215 in the first embodiment above, in step S2717, payout status reception processing is executed similarly to step S216 in the first embodiment above, in step S2718, payout output processing is executed similarly to step S217 in the first embodiment above, and in step S2719, external information setting processing is executed similarly to step S218 in the first embodiment above.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S2707, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are not executed. As a result, if a setting indicating that gameplay is stopped is made in the fraud detection process of step S2705, or if a display period for the check results is set in the check process of step S2706, some of the processes necessary to progress gameplay will not be executed.

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the special image special power control process executed in step S2714.

First, it is determined whether it is time to start a demo display (step S2801). If a demo display is not being performed and a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the end of the previous game round, it is determined that it is time to start a demo display. If it is time to start a demo display (step S2801: YES), a demo start command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 163 (step S2802).

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process executed by the sound/light side CPU 163. Note that the effect control process is repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals (e.g., 4 msec). When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a demo start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S2902: YES), it executes a demo effect determination process (step S2903). In the demo effect determination process, the data table for the demo effect is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the demo effect is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Thereafter, the demo start command is sent to the display control device 82 (step S2904). Upon receiving the demo start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect for the demo effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart special power control process (FIG. 52), if a negative judgment is made in step S2801 or if the process of step S2802 is executed, a process to obtain reserved information is executed (step S2803). In the reserved information acquisition process, a determination is made as to whether a winning entry has occurred in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. If a winning entry has occurred, a determination is made as to whether the number of reserved entries in the reserved entry storage area 65a is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If the number of reserved entries is less than the upper limit, the number of reserved entries is incremented by 1, and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is stored in the first of the empty reserved entry areas RE1 to RE4 in the reserved entry area RE. Note that if a winning entry has occurred in both the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34 simultaneously, the process to obtain the reserved information is executed multiple times within the scope of one execution of the reserved entry acquisition process.

In addition, when new pending information is acquired, a corresponding acquisition command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 163. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives the acquisition command, it sends a command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the performance control processing (Figure 53). Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 changes the display mode in the pending display area Ga (Figure 66 (b)) on the pattern display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase in pending information. Details of the pending display area Ga will be explained later.

Then, the information of the special picture special power counter stored in the main RAM 65 is read (step S2804), and the special picture special power address table stored in the main ROM 64 is read (step S2805). The start address corresponding to the information of the special picture special power counter is obtained from the special picture special power address table (step S2806), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807). The special picture special power counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine which of the various processes of steps S2808 to S2814 should be executed, and the start address of the program for executing the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 is set in the special picture special power address table in correspondence with the numerical information of the special picture special power counter.

In step S2808, the special chart change start process is executed. Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the special chart change start process.

In the special chart change start process, if the number of reserved information items stored in the reserved area RE is one or more (step S3001: YES), a data setting process is executed (step S3002). In the data setting process, the number of reserved items is first decremented by one, and the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 of the reserved area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each of the reserved areas RE1-RE4 of the reserved area RE. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first reserved area RE1-RE4 to the lower-level areas in order, clearing the data in the first reserved area RE1 and shifting the data in each area from the second reserved area RE2 to the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 to the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 to the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command is sent to the audio/visual CPU 163 to acknowledge that the data in the reserved areas has been shifted. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a shift command, it sends a command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the performance control processing (FIG. 53). Upon receiving the command, the display control device 82 changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66(b)) on the pattern display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the reduction in hold information. Details of the hold display area Ga will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart variation start process (Figure 54), after the data setting process is executed, the win/loss determination process is executed (step S3003). In the win/loss determination process, it is first determined whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. If it is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 64 is referenced to determine whether the information for win/loss determination stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information for the high probability. Also, if it is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 64 is referenced to determine whether the numerical information related to the win random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the jackpot numerical information for the low probability.

If the result of the win/loss determination process is a jackpot win (step S3004: YES), the allocation determination process is executed (step S3005). In the allocation determination process, the allocation determination information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read. Then, by referencing the allocation table provided in the main ROM 64, it is determined which jackpot result the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 read out corresponds to. Specifically, it is determined which jackpot result it corresponds to: a low-probability jackpot result, a low-prize high-probability jackpot result, or a most favorable jackpot result.

Then, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3006). Specifically, information on the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is identified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 64, and the identified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

Then, a flag setting process corresponding to the allocation determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result are provided in the main RAM 65, and in step S3007, the flag corresponding to the result of the allocation determination process in step S3005 is set to "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not a jackpot, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, information on the pattern type to be ultimately displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is identified from a stop result table for losing results that is pre-stored in the main ROM 64, and the identified information is written to the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern type selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern type selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing either step S3007 or step S3008, a process for determining the duration of the game round is executed (step S3009). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. In addition, it is determined whether a reach display will occur on the pattern display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation results in a low-probability jackpot result or a most favorable jackpot result, it is determined that a reach display will occur. In addition, if neither of these jackpot results are obtained, and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach display will occur.

If it is determined that a reach display will occur, the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain the duration of play times corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach display will not occur, the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain the duration of play times corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. Incidentally, the duration of play times that can be obtained by reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table differs from the duration of play times that can be obtained by reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

The duration of play times when a reach does not occur is set so that the greater the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE, the shorter the duration of play times. Furthermore, the non-reach duration table is set so that a shorter duration of play times is selected when the support mode is high-frequency support mode than when it is low-frequency support mode, when the number of reserved information is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the duration of play times may not change depending on the number of reserved information or support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of play times when a reach occurs. Separate duration tables may also be set for various jackpot results, miss reach results, and miss results without a reach. In this case, the duration of play times will be allocated according to each play result.

Then, the information on the duration of the game round obtained in step S3009 is set in the special symbol special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3010). The numerical information set in the special symbol special power timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S2711). Incidentally, as a performance for a game round, the special symbol display unit 37a displays a changing pattern, and the pattern display device 41 displays a changing pattern. When each of these changing displays ends, the stop result of that game round is displayed (the pattern display device 41 is in a state where a specified pattern combination is waiting on the active line) and the final stop is displayed for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the duration of the game round obtained in step S3009 is the total time for one game round.

Then, the change command and type command are sent to the sound/light side CPU 163 (step S3011). The change command includes information on the duration of the game round. Here, as described above, the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table. Therefore, even if the change command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the sound/light side CPU 163 can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game round. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the change command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a variation command and a type command from the main CPU 63, it makes a positive judgment in step S2905 of the presentation control process (Figure 53) and executes the presentation determination process for the game round (step S2906). In the presentation determination process for the game round, it executes a presentation lottery process according to the content of the variation command and type command received this time. It also reads a data table corresponding to the combination of the content of the variation command and type command received this time and the result of the presentation lottery process from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. It then controls the light emission of the display light-emitting unit 53 and the sound output of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, the presentation for the game round is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 for the duration of the game round determined this time by the main CPU 63. It then sends a variation pattern command corresponding to the type of data table read in step S2906 to the display control device 82 (step S2907). Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 starts displaying variations in the patterns on the pattern display device 41, thereby starting the performance for the game round on the pattern display device 41, and controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the performance for the game round corresponding to the currently received variation pattern command is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart variation start processing (Figure 54), after executing the processing of step S3011, the display of the changing image on the special chart display unit 37a begins (step S3012). Then, the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S3013). In this case, since the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is "0" when the special chart variation start processing is executed, when the processing of step S3013 is executed, the numerical information of the special chart special power counter becomes "1".

Returning to the explanation of the special chart special power control process (Figure 52), in step S2809, special chart change processing is executed. In special chart change processing, it is determined whether the timing is within the duration of a game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, processing is executed to regularly change the display mode of the image on the special chart display unit 37a. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special chart change processing to that corresponding to the special chart confirmation processing. Note that in this embodiment, a final stop command is not sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163.

In step S2810, special chart determination processing is executed. In special chart determination processing, the display mode of the image on the special chart display unit 37a is changed to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in special chart determination processing, it is determined whether the final stop period has elapsed, and if that period has elapsed, it is determined whether a transition to opening and closing execution mode will occur. If a transition to opening and closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is cleared to "0". If a transition to opening and closing execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special chart special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special chart determination processing to that corresponding to the special power start processing.

In step S2811, the special call start process is executed. Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the special call start process.

If the process to start the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed during the special call start process (step S3101: NO), the opening period setting process is executed (step S3102). During this setting process, information about the opening period (e.g., 5 seconds) is set in the special call timer counter in the main RAM 65. An opening command is also sent to the audio/visual CPU 163 (step S3103).

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives an opening command from the main side CPU 63, it makes a positive judgment in step S2908 of the performance control process (Figure 53) and executes the performance determination process for the open/close execution mode (step S2909). In the performance determination process for the open/close execution mode, the data table for the open/close execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 in accordance with the data table. As a result, the performance for the open/close execution mode is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54. Then, it sends the opening command to the display control device 82 (step S2910). Upon receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance for the open/close execution mode is executed.

The effects for the opening and closing execution mode include an opening period effect that occurs when the opening and closing execution mode is initiated, an opening and closing period effect in which the special electric winning device 32 is repeatedly opened and closed thereafter, and an ending period effect that occurs when the opening and closing execution mode ends. For example, on the pattern display device 41, the opening period effect displays an image indicating that the opening and closing execution mode has started, the opening and closing period effect displays an image indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is opening and closing, and the ending period effect displays an image indicating that the opening and closing execution mode has ended. The opening command also includes information indicating the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of this opening and closing execution mode, and the sound/light side CPU 163 and display control device 82 refer to this information to execute an opening and closing execution mode effect that corresponds to the type of jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of the special power start process (Figure 55), if the opening period has elapsed (step S3104: YES), a start process is executed to start the first round of play (step S3105). In this start process, the special power winning device 32 is set to an open state and the end conditions for the round of play are set. When setting these end conditions, the upper limit duration for continuing the special power winning device 32 in an open state for this first round of play is set in the special power timer counter in the main RAM 65, and the upper limit number of game balls that can win in the special power winning device 32 for this first round of play is set in the win number counter provided in the main RAM 65. The upper limit duration set in the special power timer counter is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51), and the upper limit number set in the win number counter is decremented by one each time a win occurs in the special power winning device 32. Then, the numerical information of the special diagram special call counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special call start processing to that corresponding to the special call open processing (step S3106).

Returning to the explanation of the special symbol special power control processing (Figure 52), in step S2812, special power open processing is executed. In special power open processing, it is determined whether the conditions for ending the round of play have been met. If the conditions for ending the round of play have been met, the special power winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round of play that has just ended is not the last round of play executed, the numerical information of the special symbol special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special power open processing to that corresponding to the special power closed processing; and if the round of play that has just ended is the last round of play executed, the numerical information of the special symbol special power counter is incremented by 2, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special power open processing to that corresponding to the special power end processing.

In step S2813, special line closed processing is executed. In special line closed processing, it is determined whether the interval period between rounds of play has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special line timer counter in the main RAM 65 when the previous round of play ends, and the set value is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51). When the interval period has elapsed, the special line winning device 32 is set to an open state and the end conditions for the round of play are set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special line counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from that corresponding to the special line closed processing to that corresponding to the special line open processing.

In step S2814, special call termination processing is executed. In the special call termination processing, if the processing to start the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed, information about the ending period (e.g., 5 seconds) is set in the special call timer counter in the main RAM 65, and an ending command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 163. When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main CPU 63, it reads the data table for the ending period from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165 in other processing (step S2914) of the performance control processing (Figure 53). Then, it executes light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, the ending period performance is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54. The ending command is then sent to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance of the ending period is executed.

Next, we will explain the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51) in the main CPU 63.

First, referring to the explanatory diagram of Figure 56, we will explain the normal counter area 171, the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 provided in the main RAM 65. Each of these areas 171 to 173 is provided with a general winning counter 171a, 172a, 173a, a special call winning counter 171b, 172b, 173b, a first operation counter 171c, 172c, 173c, a second operation counter 171d, 172d, 173d, and an out counter 171e, 172e, 173e. The general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a are counters for counting the number of game balls that have entered the general winning port 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. Special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b are counters for counting the number of game balls that have entered the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. First operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c are counters for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. Second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d are counters for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. Out counters 171e, 172e, 173e are counters for counting the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

Each counter 171a-171e in the normal counter area 171 is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry areas 24a, 31-34 when the front door frame 14 is closed and the machine is not in either the open/close execution mode or the high-frequency support mode. Each counter 172a-172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172 is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry areas 24a, 31-34 when the front door frame 14 is closed and the machine is in the open/close execution mode. Each counter 173a-173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry areas 24a, 31-34 when the front door frame 14 is closed and the machine is in the high-frequency support mode. Note that the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is not included in the measurement because the number of balls that enter the ball entry areas 24a, 31-34 by hand when the front door frame 14 is open is excluded from the measurement.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51) by the main CPU 63.

During the ball entry detection process, if the front door frame 14 is open (step S3201: YES), the normal ball entry detection process (step S3204), the ball entry detection process during the open/close execution mode (step S3205), and the ball entry detection process during the high-frequency support mode (step S3206) are not executed. The game area PA is formed by the space partitioned front and back by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided in the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is open, the game area PA is opened forward, and even if a game ball is launched toward the game area PA, the game ball cannot flow properly down the game area PA. Furthermore, when the front door frame 14 is open, a game ball may enter the ball entry areas 24a, 31-34 if the game hall manager opens the front door frame 14 for maintenance or troubleshooting, causing a game ball to enter the game area during maintenance. Such ball entries are not those that occur during normal gameplay, and therefore do not need to be managed. Therefore, in the ball entry detection process, none of steps S3204 to S3206 are executed if the front door frame 14 is open, as described above.

If the front door frame 14 is closed and is not in the opening/closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode (steps S3201 to S3203: NO), the normal ball-entry detection process is executed (step S3204). Also, if the front door frame 14 is closed and in the opening/closing execution mode (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), the ball-entry detection process in the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S3205). Also, if the front door frame 14 is closed and in the high-frequency support mode (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), the ball-entry detection process in the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the normal ball-going detection process in step S3204.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first prize opening detection sensor 42a (step S3301: YES), if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a (step S3304: YES), or if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a (step S3307: YES), the value of the normal general prize winning counter 171a is incremented by 1 (steps S3302, S3305, S3308). In addition, the value of the 10-prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (steps S3303, S3306, S3309). If the ball detection process is in the open/close execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 172a for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to steps S3302, S3305, and S3308; if the ball detection process is in the high frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 173a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to steps S3302, S3305, and S3308.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3310: YES), the special electric winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3311), and then the value of the normal special electric winning counter 171b is incremented by 1 (step S3312). The value of the 15-ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3313). If the ball detection process is during the open/close execution mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 172b for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3312. If the ball detection process is during the high-frequency support mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 173b for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3312.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a (step S3314: YES), the first operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3315), and then the value of the normal first operation counter 171c is incremented by 1 (step S3316). The value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3317). If the ball detection process is during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 172c for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3316. If the ball detection process is during the high frequency support mode, the value of the first operation counter 173c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3316.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S3318: YES), the second operation winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3319), and then the value of the normal second operation counter 171d is incremented by 1 (step S3320). The value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3321). If the ball detection process is during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 172d for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3320. If the ball detection process is during the high frequency support mode, the value of the second operation counter 173d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3320.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S3322: YES), the value of the normal out counter 171e is incremented by 1 (step S3323). If the ball detection process is during the open/close execution mode, the value of the out counter 172e for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3323. If the ball detection process is during the high frequency support mode, the value of the out counter 173e for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S3323.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3324: YES), the gate winning flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3325).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 is counted using the general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is counted using the special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is counted using the first operating counters 171c, 172c, 173c, the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is counted using the second operating counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and the number of game balls entering the outlet 24a is counted using the outlet counters 171e, 172e, 173e. This enables the main CPU 63 to grasp the ball entry history for each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. Furthermore, by separately setting up the normal counter area 171, the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173, the main CPU 63 can grasp the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, distinguishing between situations where the mode is neither open/close execution mode nor high-frequency support mode, situations where the mode is open/close execution mode, and situations where the mode is high-frequency support mode.

Next, the check processing executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 51) by the main CPU 63 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 59.

If it is not the check result display period or the check waiting period (steps S3401 and S3402: NO), it is determined whether a check start instruction signal has been received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97 (step S3403). As already explained, the check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC to instruct the system to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 and to notify the results of the calculation. Note that the hall computer HC can output the check start instruction signal at any time. For example, the hall manager may perform a predetermined operation on the hall computer HC, which causes the check start instruction signal to be output to all pachinko machines 10 in the hall. The hall computer HC may also be configured to output the check start instruction signal to all pachinko machines 10 at a predetermined time. Alternatively, the hall computer HC may be configured to output the check start instruction signal to all pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has passed since the last check start instruction signal was sent while the hall is open.

If a signal to start checking has been received (step S3403: YES), the process of prohibiting the launch of game balls is executed (step S3404). As a result, even if an operation to launch game balls is performed on the launch operation device 28 when game balls are normally stored in the upper tray 55a, game balls will not be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27. This state in which the launch of game balls is prohibited is lifted when the results of calculations of various parameters using the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 have been announced.

Then, the game round interruption process is executed (step S3405). During the game round interruption process, if a game round is not being executed, the start of a new game round and the start of a new demo display are prohibited. As a result, even if new pending information is acquired when a game round is not being executed, the start of a new game round triggered by that pending information is put on hold, and the start of a new demo display is also put on hold. Note that the start of a new demo display is prohibited by preventing the execution of step S2802 of the special chart special power control process (Figure 52).

Furthermore, during the game round interruption process, if a game round is being executed, the main CPU 63 stops measuring the duration of the game round. Specifically, while a game round is being executed, the duration of the game round is set in the special symbol special power timer counter in the main RAM 65, and the value of this special symbol special power timer counter is periodically updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51). However, the updating of the special symbol special power timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. Note that when the game round interruption process is executed, the process for starting the game round and the process for progressing the game round are not executed in the special symbol special power control process (Figure 52). However, even if the game round interruption process is executed, the process for obtaining pending information (step S2803) in the special symbol special power control process (Figure 52) is executed.

Then, the opening and closing execution mode is interrupted (step S3406). If the opening and closing execution mode is not currently being executed during the opening and closing execution mode interruption process, the start of a new opening and closing execution mode is prohibited. Furthermore, if the opening and closing execution mode is currently being executed during the opening and closing execution mode interruption process, the main CPU 63 stops measuring the opening period, upper limit duration of the round of play, interval period, or ending period. Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set in the special symbol special power timer counter in the main RAM 65; during the round of play, the upper limit duration of the special power winning device 32 is set in the special symbol special power timer counter in the main RAM 65; between multiple rounds of play, the interval period is set in the special symbol special power timer counter in the main RAM 65; during the ending period, the ending period is set in the special symbol special power timer counter in the main RAM 65, and the value of this special symbol special power timer counter is periodically updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). However, the update of the special symbol special power timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. Also, during the interruption process of the opening/closing execution mode, if the special power winning device 32 is in the open state, the special power winning device 32 is set to the closed state. Note that when the interruption process of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the process for starting the opening/closing execution mode and the process for progressing the opening/closing execution mode are not executed in the special symbol special power control process (FIG. 52). However, even if the opening/closing execution mode interruption process is executed, the process of acquiring pending information (step S2803) in the special chart special power control process (Figure 52) is executed.

Then, the interruption process for the normal map/normal power control is executed (step S3407). During the interruption process for the normal map/normal power control, if the normal map display unit 38a is not currently displaying a change and the normal power role 34a is not in the normal power open state, the start of a new change display cycle for the normal map display unit 38a is prohibited. As a result, even if a new value for the normal power role open counter C4 is acquired when normal map/normal power control is not being executed, the start of a new change display cycle for the normal map display unit 38a triggered by that value is put on hold. Furthermore, during the interruption process for the normal map/normal power control, if the normal map display unit 38a is currently displaying a change, the timer in the main RAM 65 that measures the change display period is stopped from updating. Furthermore, during the interruption process for the normal map/normal power control, if the normal power role 34a is in the open state, the normal power role 34a is closed and the update of the open time of the normal power role 34a is stopped. Furthermore, even if the normal power control interruption process is executed, the process of storing the value of the normal power feature opening counter C4 in the normal power holding area 65c in response to the game ball entering the second operating port 34 is executed.

Then, a storage process is executed for the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a (step S3408). During this storage process, data indicating the current display contents of the special map display unit 37a is stored in the main RAM 65, and data indicating the current display contents of the regular map display unit 38a is also stored in the main RAM 65. Then, a process is executed to start the check waiting display of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a (step S3409). During this check waiting display start process, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a are changed to display content to notify users that the current check waiting period is in effect. The check waiting period refers to the waiting period from when a command signal to start a check is received from the hall computer HC until the start of notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the goal history for each goal entry unit 24a, 31-34 in response to the reception of this command signal.

Here, we will explain the display contents of the special map display section 37a and the general map display section 38a.

First, the special symbol display unit 37a will be described in detail with reference to Figure 60(a). Figure 60(a) is a front view of the special symbol display unit 37a. The special symbol display unit 37a has seven display segments 181-187. Each display segment 181-187 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one of the display segments 181-187, or to light up any combination of the display segments 181-187. Because all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on each of the display segments 181-187. However, this is not limited to this, and each display segment 181-187 may be configured to display a different color, or each display segment 181-187 may be configured to display multiple types of colors. The first through seventh display segments 181-187 are all linear display segments, and are arranged to form a so-called seven-segment display. This makes it possible for the special display section 37a to display multiple types of characters, such as the numbers "1" through "9" and the letters "H" and "L."

Figure 60 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display contents of the special symbol display unit 37a. When the special symbol display unit 37a displays a changing image during a game, the special symbol display unit 37a repeats a series of lighting states: only the second display segment 182 and the fifth display segment 185 are lit → only the first display segment 181 is lit → only the third display segment 183 and the sixth display segment 186 are lit → only the seventh display segment 187 is lit. Furthermore, in the special symbol display unit 37a, only the fourth display segment 184 is lit as the stop result in a game with a losing result; a "2" or "4" is displayed as the stop result in a game with a low-probability jackpot result; a "6" or "9" is displayed as the stop result in a game with a low-win, high-probability jackpot result; and an "L" or "H" is displayed as the stop result in a game with the most favorable jackpot result.

In contrast, during the check waiting period, all of the first through seventh display segments 181-187 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display content when the special symbol display unit 37a displays changing patterns during a game round, nor does it match any of the display content that could be displayed as a result of a game round being stopped. This allows the gaming parlor manager to clearly determine whether or not the current situation is a check waiting period by visually checking the special symbol display unit 37a.

After the check waiting period ends, the special symbol display unit 37a will notify the results of calculations of various parameters using the ball entry history for each ball entry unit 24a, 31-34. When this notification occurs, the special symbol display unit 37a will light up and show "3," "5," or "7." The display contents corresponding to these check result display periods do not match any of the display contents for situations in which the special symbol display unit 37a displays changing patterns during a game round, nor do they match all of the display contents that could be displayed as a result of a game round being stopped. Furthermore, the display contents corresponding to the check result display period do not match the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period. This not only allows the amusement hall manager to clearly determine whether the current situation is a check waiting period by visually checking the special symbol display unit 37a, but also whether the current situation is a check result display period.

Next, the general map display unit 38a will be described in detail with reference to Figure 60(b). Figure 60(b) is a front view of the general map display unit 38a. The general map display unit 38a has seven display segments 191-197. Each display segment 191-197 has an individual light source made of an LED. By controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one of the display segments 191-197, or to light up any combination of the display segments 191-197. Since all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on each of the display segments 191-197. However, this is not limited to this; each display segment 191-197 may be configured to display a different color, or each display segment 191-197 may be configured to display multiple colors. The first through seventh display segments 191-197 are all linear display segments, and are arranged to form a so-called seven-segment display. This makes it possible for the general display unit 38a to display multiple types of characters, such as the numbers "1" through "9" and the letters "H" and "L."

Figure 60 (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display contents of the normal map display unit 38a. When a changing image display is performed on the normal map display unit 38a, the normal map display unit 38a repeats a series of lighting states: only the second display segment 192 and the fifth display segment 195 are lit → only the first display segment 191 is lit → only the third display segment 193 and the sixth display segment 196 are lit → only the seventh display segment 197 is lit. Also, on the normal map display unit 38a, only the fourth display segment 194 is lit as a result of the stopping of a changing display that resulted in a losing result in the normal power opening lottery, and an "H" is displayed as a lighting state as a result of the stopping of a changing display that resulted in a winning result in the normal power opening lottery.

In contrast, during the check waiting period, all of the first through seventh display segments 191-197 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display content when the image changes are displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, and furthermore, it does not match any of the display content that could be displayed as a result of the change display stopping. This allows the amusement hall manager to clearly determine whether or not the current situation is a check waiting period by visually checking the normal map display unit 38a.

In addition, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period on the regular map display unit 38a is the same as the display content corresponding to the check waiting period on the special map display unit 37a. In other words, during the check waiting period, the same corresponding display content is displayed on both the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a. This makes it easier for the gaming hall manager to understand whether the current situation is a check waiting period.

After the check waiting period ends, the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history for each entry section 24a, 31-34 are not only displayed by the special map display section 37a but also by the regular map display section 38a. In this case, when this notification is made, the regular map display section 38a will light up and show "2," "3," or "4." The display contents corresponding to these check result display periods do not match any of the display contents for situations in which the regular map display section 38a displays a changing pattern, nor do they match all of the display contents that may be displayed as a stop result after the changing pattern display. Furthermore, the display contents corresponding to the check result display period do not match the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period. This allows the amusement hall manager to clearly determine whether the current situation is a check waiting period by visually checking the regular map display section 38a, as well as whether the current situation is a check result display period.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (Figure 59), after executing step S3409, a setting process is executed for the check waiting counter (step S3410). In this setting process, information corresponding to the check waiting period is set in the check waiting counter provided in the main RAM 65. Specifically, the check waiting period is set to 5 seconds. This time is set to be sufficiently longer than the longest time required from the time a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28 until the time when the launched game ball enters one of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 in the game area PA and is detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a corresponding to the ball entry section 24a, 31-34. Then, as already explained, if a command signal to start a check is received from the hall computer HC, the launch of the game ball is prohibited in step S3404. As a result, all game balls flowing down the game area PA will disappear by the time the check waiting period has elapsed, and all ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 will have been acquired by the time the check waiting period has elapsed.

Then, the check wait flag stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3411). The check wait flag is a flag that the main CPU 63 uses to identify that it is in a check wait period. Also, in step S3412, a check start command is sent to the audio/visual CPU 163.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives a check start command, it makes a positive determination in step S2911 of the performance control process (Figure 53) and sets the end wait flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S2912). The end wait flag is a flag that the sound/light side CPU 163 uses to identify that it is in an end wait state, and if the end wait flag is set to "1", it makes a positive determination in step S2901. The control content in the end wait state will be explained in detail later. Also, in step S2913, it sends a check display command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, it causes an image corresponding to the end wait state to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. The display content will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the check processing (Figure 59), the check waiting period begins when the check waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" in step S3411. Therefore, a positive determination is made in step S3402 and the check waiting processing is executed (step S3413). Figure 61 is a flowchart showing the check waiting processing.

First, the value of the check waiting counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3501). Then, if the value of the check waiting counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3502: YES), the check waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This ends the check waiting period.

Thereafter, a counting process is executed (step S3504). In the counting process, the seventh and eighth parameters are calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, the seventh and eighth parameters are calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the seventh and eighth parameters are calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173. Regarding these seventh and eighth parameters, in detail, when the values of the out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are K1, the values of the general winning counters 171a, 172a, and 173a are K2, the values of the special winning counters 171b, 172b, and 173b are K3, the values of the first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are K4, and the values of the second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are K5,
Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") the ratio of "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" to "total number of game balls paid out"; and eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34").

The seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 171a-171e in the normal counter area 171 are the seventh and eighth parameters when the front door frame 14 is closed and the mode is neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as various normal parameters). The seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 172a-172e in the opening/closing execution mode counter area 172 are the seventh and eighth parameters when the front door frame 14 is closed and the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode). The seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 173a-173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are the seventh and eighth parameters when the front door frame 14 is closed and the mode is the high-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the high-frequency support mode).

In addition, the aggregation process performs the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment described above for the various parameters in normal operation, the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. That is, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the first range; if only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is met, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range; and if the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. This determination process is then performed for the various parameters in normal operation, the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. Information on the determination results is then written to the main RAM 65.

After the tallying process of step S3504 is performed, a process to start displaying the check results is performed (step S3505). In the process to start displaying the check results, after the display of the contents displayed during the check waiting period on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a is terminated, a display corresponding to the results of the tallying process of step S3504 is started on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a. In this case, the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a do not continue to display the same content during the check result display period, but rather sequentially display a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for the various parameters in normal mode, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode, and a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode in this order, and the display of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a is controlled so that the sequential display in this order is repeated.

Specifically, the general map display unit 38a displays a display indicating which of the following is the display target: a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in normal operation, a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in opening/closing execution mode, or a display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in high-frequency support mode. As already explained, lighting states in which "2," "3," and "4" are displayed are set as display contents corresponding to the display period of the check results in the general map display unit 38a. Of these, if the display target is the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in normal operation, "2" is displayed on the general map display unit 38a; if the display target is the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in opening/closing execution mode, "3" is displayed on the general map display unit 38a; and if the display target is the display corresponding to the above-mentioned judgment results for various parameters in high-frequency support mode, "4" is displayed on the general map display unit 38a.

In addition, the special chart display unit 37a displays the above-mentioned judgment results for each of the various parameters in normal operation, the various parameters in opening/closing execution mode, and the various parameters in high-frequency support mode. As already explained, lighting states in which "3," "5," and "7" are displayed are set as display contents corresponding to the display period of the check results in the special chart display unit 37a. Of these, if the above-mentioned judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a; if the above-mentioned judgment result corresponds to the second range, "5" is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a; and if the above-mentioned judgment result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a.

When the check result display period begins, the display corresponding to the above judgment results for the various parameters under normal conditions is the display target, so "2" is initially displayed in the normal map display unit 38a. During this normal target period, the special map display unit 37a displays a display corresponding to the above judgment results for the various parameters under normal conditions. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed in the special map display unit 37a; if the judgment result corresponds to the second range, "5" is displayed in the special map display unit 37a; and if the judgment result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed in the special map display unit 37a. For example, if the judgment result is in the first range, "2" will continue to be displayed in the normal map display unit 38a during the normal target period, and "3" will continue to be displayed in the special map display unit 37a. The normal target period lasts for 5 seconds.

When the normal target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode will be displayed, and therefore "3" will be displayed in the normal map display unit 38a. During this opening/closing execution mode target period, the special map display unit 37a will display a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, if the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" will be displayed in the special map display unit 37a; if the determination result corresponds to the second range, "5" will be displayed in the special map display unit 37a; and if the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" will be displayed in the special map display unit 37a. For example, if the determination result is in the second range, "3" will continue to be displayed in the normal map display unit 38a during the opening/closing execution mode target period, and "5" will continue to be displayed in the special map display unit 37a. The opening/closing execution mode target period continues for 5 seconds, just like the normal target period.

When the open/close execution mode target period has elapsed, the display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for the various parameters during high-frequency support mode will be displayed, and therefore "4" will be displayed in the normal map display unit 38a. During this high-frequency support mode target period, the special map display unit 37a will display a display corresponding to the above-mentioned determination results for the various parameters during high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" will be displayed in the special map display unit 37a; if the determination result corresponds to the second range, "5" will be displayed in the special map display unit 37a; and if the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" will be displayed in the special map display unit 37a. For example, if the determination result is in the third range, "4" will continue to be displayed in the normal map display unit 38a and "7" will continue to be displayed in the special map display unit 37a during the high-frequency support mode target period. The high-frequency support mode target period continues for 5 seconds, just like the normal target period and the open/close execution mode target period.

The display period for check results is set to a period in which each of the normal target period, open/close execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the display period for check results is set to 30 seconds so that each of the normal target period, open/close execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period occurs twice. The display period for check results repeatedly changes from normal target period → open/close execution mode target period → high-frequency support mode target period.

After executing step S3505 in the check waiting process (Figure 61), information corresponding to the display period for the check results (specifically, 30 seconds) is set in the display counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3506). Then, the display flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3507). The display flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to identify that the check results are currently being displayed.

When the display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1," a positive judgment is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 51) of the main CPU 63. In this case, steps S2708 to S2719 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 51) are not executed. For example, if the ball entry detection processing (step S2710) is not executed, even if a game ball enters the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, it is invalidated. However, as already explained, since a game ball that was properly launched is not present in the game area PA before the check result display period begins, a game ball that was properly launched will not enter any of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 during the check result display period. Furthermore, since the special chart special power control processing (step S2714) is not executed, all control of the special chart special power, including the pending information acquisition processing (step S2803), is stopped. Furthermore, since the normal map normal power control process (step S2715) is no longer executed, all control of the normal map normal power is stopped. Furthermore, since the payout output process (step S2718) is no longer executed, all game ball payout instructions to the payout side CPU 92 are stopped. However, the payout of game balls based on prize ball commands that have already been output to the payout side CPU 92 continues under the drive control of the payout side CPU 92.

When the display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the check process (Figure 59) makes a positive determination in step S3401 and executes the display process for the check result (step S3414). Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the display process for the check result.

First, the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether the value of the display counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3602).

If the value of the display counter is not "0" (step S3602: NO), it is determined whether one of the target periods among the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period has ended during the display period of the check results, and it is time to switch to the next target period (step S3603). The determination of whether it is time to switch target periods is made based on the value of the display counter. If a positive determination is made in step S3603, an update process for the display content is executed (step S3604). In this update process, the display of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a is controlled so that the display content corresponds to the next target period for the current target period among the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period. In this case, the display control is performed on the regular map display unit 38a so that the display content corresponds to the target period of the destination, and the display control is performed on the special map display unit 37a so that the display content corresponds to the target period of the destination of the current switch, among the judgment result information written to the main RAM 65 in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (Figure 61).

If it is determined in step S3602 that the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is "0", a display restoration process is executed for the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a (step S3605). In this display restoration process, the display of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a is controlled so that the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a become the display contents stored in the main RAM 65 in step S3408 of the check process (Figure 59). As a result, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a are restored to the display contents immediately before the check waiting period began.

Then, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). This results in a negative judgment at step S2707 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 51), and the processing returns to a state in which steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Furthermore, when the processing of step S3606 is executed, the values of each counter 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, each counter 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and each counter 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173 are cleared to "0". This initializes the goal history of the goal sections 24a, 31 to 34, making it possible to start managing the goal history anew. However, this is not limited to this, and even if the processing of step S3606 is executed, the values of the counters 171a-171e in the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a-172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the counters 173a-173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 will be accumulated across multiple executions of the notification of the calculation results using the ball entry history. In this configuration, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 may also be erased based on the receipt of a history erase signal from the hall computer HC or the occurrence of an erase operation using an operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 10.

Then, the game round restart process is executed (step S3607). This allows the start of a new game round, and if a check waiting period begins during the execution of a game round, the progress of the temporarily stopped game round is resumed. Specifically, display control of the special symbol display unit 37a corresponding to the game round that was temporarily stopped is resumed. In addition, measurement of the duration of the game round is resumed by resuming updating of the special symbol special power timer counter. The game round restart process also cancels the state in which the start of a new demo display was prohibited. In other words, the state in which the execution of step S2802 in the special symbol special power control process (Figure 52) was prohibited is canceled.

Then, the resumption process for the open/close execution mode is executed (step S3608). This allows a new start of the open/close execution mode, and if a check waiting period begins during the execution of the open/close execution mode, the temporarily stopped open/close execution mode is resumed. Specifically, the updating of the special chart special electric timer counter is resumed. Also, if a check waiting period begins during the execution of a round game, the special electric winning device 32 enters an open state. In this case, the resumed round game does not restart the measurement of the upper limit duration of the open state of the special electric winning device 32 from the beginning, but rather resumes measurement from the remaining upper limit duration when the round game was temporarily stopped.

Then, the restart process for the normal map/normal power control is executed (step S3609). This allows the normal map display unit 38a to start a new variable display cycle, and if a check wait period begins while the normal map/normal power control is being executed, the temporarily stopped normal map/normal power control is resumed. Specifically, if a check wait period begins while the normal map display unit 38a is displaying a variable, the display control for the normal map display unit 38a is resumed, and measurement of the duration of that variable display cycle is resumed. Furthermore, if a check wait period begins when the normal power device 34a is in an open state, the normal power device 34a enters an open state. In this case, the resumed open state does not restart the upper limit duration of the open state of the normal power device 34a from the beginning, but rather resumes measurement from the remaining upper limit duration when the open state was temporarily stopped.

Then, the process of lifting the ban on game ball launch is executed (step S3610). As a result, when game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a, the launch operation device 28 is operated to launch game balls, and the state in which game balls can be launched is restored.

Next, we will explain how the check waiting period and check result display period progress, with reference to the time chart in Figure 63. Figure 63(a) shows the timing when the hall computer HC outputs a signal to start a check, Figure 63(b) shows the execution period of a game round, Figure 63(c) shows the execution period of the open/close execution mode, Figure 63(d) shows the execution period of normal ball control, Figure 63(e) shows the period during which the release of game balls is prohibited, Figure 63(f) shows the check waiting period, and Figure 63(g) shows the display period of the check results.

First, we will explain what happens when a signal to start a check is output during game play and normal power control.

As shown in Figure 63(b), a game turn is being played, and as shown in Figure 63(d), normal map and normal power control is being executed. At timing t1, as shown in Figure 63(a), the hall computer HC outputs a signal to start a check, as shown in Figure 63(a). This causes the game turn to be interrupted as shown in Figure 63(b) and normal map and normal power control to be interrupted as shown in Figure 63(d). Also, at timing t1, the release of game balls is prohibited as shown in Figure 63(e), and a check wait period begins as shown in Figure 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a will be displayed to notify users that a check wait period is in effect.

Then, at time t2, the fixed time T1 has elapsed since time t1, and the check wait period ends. At time t2, a calculation is performed using the results of the management of the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In this case, time T1 is set to be sufficiently longer than the longest time required from the time a ball is launched from the ball launch mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28 until the time the main CPU 63 determines that the launched ball has entered one of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 in the play area PA and been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a corresponding to the ball entry section 24a, 31-34. As already explained, the launch of balls is prohibited at time t1. Therefore, by the time the check wait period has elapsed, all balls flowing down the play area PA will have disappeared, and all ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 will have been acquired by the time the check wait period has elapsed.

As shown in Figure 63 (g), the display period for the check results begins at timing t2. During this display period for the check results, as already explained, there are successively three periods: a normal period in which displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters in normal operation are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a; an opening/closing execution mode period in which displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a; and a high-frequency support mode period in which displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a.

After that, at timing t3, a fixed time T2 has passed since timing t2, and the display period for the check result ends, as shown in Figure 63(g). As a result, at timing t3, the state in which the release of game balls was prohibited is lifted, as shown in Figure 63(e). Also, at timing t3, the game play resumes, as shown in Figure 63(b), and normal ball and normal power control resumes, as shown in Figure 63(d).

Next, we will explain what happens when a signal to start a check is output during open/close execution mode and normal power control.

When the opening/closing execution mode is being executed as shown in Figure 63(c) and normal map/normal power control is being executed as shown in Figure 63(d), a signal to start a check is output from the hall computer HC as shown in Figure 63(a) at timing t4, causing the opening/closing execution mode to be interrupted as shown in Figure 63(c) and normal map/normal power control to be interrupted as shown in Figure 63(d). Also, at timing t4, the release of game balls is prohibited as shown in Figure 63(e) and a check wait period begins as shown in Figure 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a will be displayed to notify that a check wait period is in effect.

Then, at time t5, the check waiting period ends when a fixed time T1 has passed since time t4. At this time t5, a calculation is performed using the results of the management of the goal entry history for each goal entry section 24a, 31-34. This time T1 is the same as the time from time t1 to time t2.

As shown in Figure 63(g), the display period for the check results begins at timing t5. Then, at timing t6, a fixed time T2 has passed from timing t5, and the display period for the check results ends as shown in Figure 63(g). This time T2 is the same as the time from timing t2 to timing t3. Also, at timing t6, the state in which the release of game balls is prohibited is lifted as shown in Figure 63(e). Also, at timing t6, the opening/closing execution mode is resumed as shown in Figure 63(c), and normal map/normal power control is resumed as shown in Figure 63(d).

Next, the main processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 64.

In the main processing, steps S3701 to S3703 and steps S3705 to S3714 execute the same processing as steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 of the main processing (Figure 7) in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the main processing in this embodiment, if it is determined in step S3704 that the check waiting flag or display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1," the processing in step S3706 is executed without executing the processing in step S3705 to determine whether the RAM clear switch of the power supply/launch control device 78 has been operated. In other words, operation of the RAM clear switch is disabled during the check waiting period or the period when the check result is displayed. This prevents the clearing process of the main RAM 65 from being executed even if the pachinko hall manager mistakenly believes that when a check waiting period begins and game progress is halted, the situation is due to an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF and ON while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clearing process (step S3709) to initialize the main RAM 65. As with the first embodiment described above, the main RAM 65 receives power for memory retention from the power supply unit for power outages in the power supply/launch control device 78, even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is OFF.

On the other hand, even if the check waiting flag or display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1," steps S3706 to S3708 are executed. In other words, even if the power outage flag is not set to "1" (step S3706: NO), even during the check waiting period or check result display period, the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S3709). Also, if the checksum calculation result is abnormal (step S3708: NO), the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S3709). This makes it possible to execute the clearing process of the main RAM 65 and initialize the main RAM 65 if power outage processing is not executed normally or if some abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, even during the check waiting period or check result display period.

Next, we will explain the details of the execution control of the effects during the check waiting period or the check result display period, and the display contents of the pattern display device 41.

First, we will explain the display content of the pattern display device 41 when a game-round effect is executed. Figure 65 is a diagram showing each of the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41, and Figure 66 is a diagram showing the display surface of the pattern display device 41.

As shown in Figures 65(a) to 65(j), the design, which is a type of picture, is made up of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are made up of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in Figure 66 (a), the pattern display device 41 has three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 set as multiple display areas: upper, middle, and lower. Each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is configured with main and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper pattern column Z1 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. The lower pattern column Z3 has nine main patterns from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern column Z1 and the lower pattern column Z3 are configured with 18 patterns. In contrast, in middle symbol column Z2, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a "4" main symbol additionally arranged between the "9" main symbol and the "1" main symbol, with one sub-symbol arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, middle symbol column Z2 alone has 10 main symbols arranged, for a total of 20 symbols. Then, on symbol display device 41, the symbols of each of these symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variably scrolling manner in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

As shown in Figure 66(b), the symbol display device 41 is configured with waiting areas SA1-SA9 so that three symbols are displayed for each symbol column Z1-Z3, resulting in a total of nine symbols simultaneously displayed (3 x 3). Each waiting area SA1-SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbols are finally displayed, the symbols waiting in each waiting area SA1-SA9 are displayed at the corresponding stop position. The symbol display device 41 also has five active lines connecting the three waiting areas SA1-SA9: the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5. The display stops in the order of top symbol column Z1, bottom symbol column Z3, and middle symbol column Z2. If the display of all symbol columns Z1-Z3 ends with a combination of symbols with the same number on any active line, a jackpot animation is displayed, indicating the occurrence of a low-probability jackpot result or a most favorable jackpot result. In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols," and if the most favorable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol combination is displayed. Furthermore, main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols," and if a low-probability jackpot result occurs, the same non-specific symbol combination is displayed.

In addition, if a low-prize, high-probability jackpot result is achieved, a predetermined combination of symbols that is not the same symbol combination will be displayed statically. Furthermore, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and can be arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the symbols described above; for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed in a variable manner as symbols may also be used.

In more detail, regarding the content of the variable display of the symbols in each symbol column Z1-Z3, when the performance for a game round begins, the variable display of the symbols in all symbol columns Z1-Z3 begins in a high-speed variable display, which is a low discrimination mode, and then each symbol column Z1-Z3 switches to a low-speed variable display, which is a high discrimination mode, in a predetermined order, and the symbols are displayed in standby mode in waiting areas SA1-SA9 on each symbol column Z1-Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, while the symbols are displayed in standby mode in each waiting area of all symbol columns Z1-Z3, the symbols are displayed in a oscillating mode for an oscillating display period, and then the symbols are displayed in a static state as a final stop display, and this static display state continues for the final stop period. In this case, a swaying display means that the symbols waiting in waiting areas SA1-SA9 sway within the same waiting area SA1-SA9, and each symbol sway within a range that includes the stop position within the corresponding waiting area SA1-SA9, and each symbol sway within a range that sandwiches the corresponding stop position. By performing a swaying display followed by a static display in this way, when the symbols are finally displayed as static symbols, it is possible to perform a gradual process such as variable display of symbols in symbol rows Z1-Z3 → swaying display in waiting areas SA1-SA9 → static display, making it easier for players to recognize that the symbols will finally be displayed as static symbols.

When the display control device 82 receives a variation pattern command from the sound/light side CPU 163, it reads a data table corresponding to the variation pattern command from a ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 82 and executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table. In this case, this data table corresponds to the duration of the current game round, and by executing display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, each symbol column Z1 to Z3 undergoes the following sequence: high-speed variation display → low-speed variation display → standby display → static display. In other words, commands for recognizing the timing of switching from high-speed variation display to low-speed variation display, the timing of switching from low-speed variation display to standby display, the timing of switching from standby display to static display, and the timing of the end of static display are not sent to the display control device 82. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the sound/light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82. Furthermore, when a still display is initiated on the symbol display device 41, the special symbol display unit 37a also begins displaying the final stop of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result for the current round of play, but when this final stop display begins, the main CPU 63 does not send a corresponding command to the sound/light CPU 163. This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163.

In addition, when a standby display is being displayed in the upper and lower symbol columns Z1 and Z3 and a slow-changing display is being displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, a reach effect may be executed using a character image that is different from the symbols displayed in the changing patterns of each symbol column Z1 to Z3. The start and end timings of this reach effect are also determined in the data table, so there is no need to send commands from the sound/light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 when the reach effect starts or ends.

As shown in Figure 66 (b), the pattern display device 41 has a hold display area Ga set in the bottom center. The hold display area Ga is partitioned so that unit hold display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3, and Ga4, the same number as the maximum number of hold information stored in the hold area RE, are arranged horizontally. Specifically, the maximum number of hold information is four, and corresponding to this, the hold display area Ga has set up a first unit hold display area Ga1, a second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4. When the number of hold information pieces stored in the hold area RE is one, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, when the number of hold information pieces stored in the hold area RE is two, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2, when the number of hold information pieces stored in the hold area RE is three, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third unit hold display area Ga3, and when the number of hold information pieces stored in the hold area RE is four, a predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4. When hold information is acquired, a command corresponding to the acquisition command is sent from the audio/visual side CPU 163 to the display control device 82, thereby increasing the number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which the predetermined hold image is displayed. Additionally, when a new game round begins, the sound/light CPU 163 sends a command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82, thereby reducing the number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which specified hold images are displayed.

Next, we will explain how the effects are controlled during the check waiting period or the check result display period.

As already explained, when the check waiting period starts, the main CPU 63 sends a check start command to the sound/light CPU 163 in step S3412 of the check processing (Figure 59). Then, when the sound/light CPU 163 receives the check start command, it sets the end waiting state by setting the end waiting flag in the sound/light RAM 165 to "1" in step S2912 of the performance control processing (Figure 53). It also sends a check display command to the display control device 82 in step S2913.

When the display control device 82 receives a check display command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display a notification image Gr indicating that the device is currently waiting for a check or displaying the check result. Figures 67(a) and 67(b) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the display content of the pattern display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in Figures 67(a) and 67(b), notification images Gr reading "Checking" are displayed in the lower left and lower right corners of the pattern display device 41. This allows a player who is paying attention to the pattern display device 41 to understand that the current status is the check waiting period or the check result display period by checking the notification image Gr. Figures 67(a) and 67(b) show the display content of the pattern display device 41 when a game-time effect is being executed. However, even during the open/close execution mode or demo effect, the notification image Gr is displayed on the pattern display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. This makes it possible for the symbol display device 41 to notify players that they are in a check waiting period or a check result display period not only when a game effect is being executed, but also when the open/close execution mode or demo effect is being executed. The content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary, and the notification may be configured to be performed by, for example, dimming the entire symbol display device 41.

When the display control device 82 receives a check display command, it not only performs processing to display the notification image Gr on the pattern display device 41, but also performs processing to continue the execution of the display effect. Specifically, when a check display command is received while a demo effect is being executed, it controls the display of the pattern display device 41 to repeat a series of video displays for the demo effect.

If a check display command is received while a game presentation is being executed and before the start of the final stop period for that game presentation, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the variable pattern command received from the sound/light side CPU 163 at the start of the current game presentation until the timing to start the oscillating display for the current game presentation arrives. However, after the oscillating display has begun, the oscillating display will continue even if the timing to start the static display arrives in the data table.

With reference to Figures 67(a) and 67(b), we will explain how the game presentation is executed on the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in Figure 67(a), when the symbols are changing in each symbol column Z1 to Z3, a notification image Gr indicating that the check waiting period or the check result display period is in progress is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area where the symbols are changing and the pending display area Ga. Then, as shown in Figure 67(b), the symbols are displayed oscillatingly in each symbol column Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed oscillating vertically, which is different from the horizontal direction in which the symbols change, within the same waiting areas SA1 to SA9. This oscillating display continues even when the timing for the original static display to begin arrives.

If a check display command is received during the final stop period of the performance for a game round, the pattern display device 41 is controlled to display the static pattern continuously. If a check display command is received during the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is controlled to display the series of moving images displayed during the opening and closing period repeatedly. If a check display command is received during the opening and closing period in the opening and closing execution mode when the special power winning device 32 is repeatedly opened and closed, the pattern display device 41 is controlled to display the series of moving images displayed during the opening and closing period repeatedly. If a check display command is received during the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode, the pattern display device 41 is controlled to display the series of actions displayed during the ending period repeatedly.

When the sound/light side CPU 163 enters the end standby state, it makes a positive determination in step S2901 of the performance control process (Figure 53). In this case, it determines in step S2915 whether any performance commands have been received from the main side CPU 63. Performance commands are commands sent from the main side CPU 63 to the sound/light side CPU 163 to indicate the start of a performance, and specifically include a demo start command, a variation command, an opening command, and an ending command.

If any of the effect commands has been received (step S2915: YES), the end standby flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S2916). This cancels the end standby state. After that, various effect determination processes are executed when the end standby state is cancelled (step S2917). In the various effect determination processes when the end standby state is cancelled, if the currently received command is a demo start command, the demo effect determination process of step S2903 is executed; if the currently received command is a variation command, the effect determination process for the game round of step S2906 is executed; if the currently received command is an opening command, the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode of step S2909 is executed; and if the currently received command is an ending command, the corresponding effect determination process is executed.

After that, if the currently ended end waiting state occurred during the execution of the game-round effect and a waiting display is being displayed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the pattern display device 41 (step S2918: YES), final stop processing is executed (step S2919). When controlling the execution of the game-round effect, the sound/light side CPU 163 reads out a data table from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165, as already explained. This data table contains data indicating the timing at which the waiting display will start during the execution period of the game-round effect if the end waiting state did not occur.

In the final stop processing, before the effect determined in step S2917, the effect content is adjusted so that the pattern is displayed statically on the pattern display device 41 for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 seconds). Specifically, a data table for the final stop period is read as a data table for controlling the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54, and after control based on the data table for the final stop period is executed, control based on the data table corresponding to the effect content determined in step S2917 is executed.

Then, a command transmission process is executed when the end standby is released (step S2920). In this command transmission process, if the current situation is such that a demo performance should be started, a demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 82; if the current situation is such that a performance for a game round should be started, a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined performance content is transmitted to the display control device 82; if the current situation is such that the opening and closing execution mode should be started, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82; and if the current situation is such that the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode should be started, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82.

When the display control device 82 is not in a situation where the oscillating display of symbols is being continued as a game-round effect, it controls the execution of the display effects on the symbol display device 41 in response to the reception of each of the above commands, as already explained. On the other hand, when the display control device 82 receives each of the above commands while the oscillating display of symbols is being continued as a game-round effect (specifically, when a demo start command, a variation command, or an opening command is received), it displays the oscillatingly displayed symbols statically for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and then starts the display effect corresponding to the received command. In this case, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is a display effect with a set execution period, such as a game-round effect or an opening period effect, the execution period of the subsequent display effect is shortened by the final stop period, in response to the fact that the final stop period has occurred earlier.

Specifically, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an effect for a game round, the period during which high-speed fluctuating display is performed for all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is shortened by the final stop period. This makes it possible to generate the final stop period before the start of an effect for a new game round, while minimizing the impact on the appearance of the effect for the game round.

In addition, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an opening period effect, the timing at which the opening period effect starts is delayed by the duration of the final stop period. In the opening and closing execution mode effect, the opening and closing period effect starts immediately after the opening period effect ends, but in the opening and closing period effect, a series of video displays are repeated. Therefore, even if the opening period effect ends after the opening and closing period has started, the impact on the appearance of the opening and closing execution mode effect is small.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

When a ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 as a predetermined event, the value of the corresponding counter 171a-171e, 172a-172e, or 173a-173e is incremented by one, and ball entry history information is stored in the counter 171a-171e, 172a-172e, or 173a-173e. Then, calculations are performed using the information stored in the counters 171a-171e, 172a-172e, or 173a-173e to derive predetermined parameters as calculation results, and information on the derived calculation results is reported. This enables appropriate management of the game ball entry history in the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. Furthermore, since the ball entry history information is stored and maintained within the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the ball entry history information. In this case, when various parameters are derived using ball entry history information, game progress is restricted. This allows various parameters to be derived in situations different from those in which normal gameplay occurs. This eliminates the need to parallelize normal gameplay progress and the derivation of various parameters, making it possible to reduce processing load.

When various parameters are being derived, the progress of the game is restricted by restricting the execution of at least some of the processes required to progress the game. This makes it possible to prevent the number of processes per unit time from increasing excessively when various parameters are being derived.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the calculation is performed after the release of game balls is prohibited. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where game balls are restricted from entering the ball entry areas 24a, 31-34, which are the trigger for changing various parameters.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the various parameters are calculated after a period of time longer than the longest expected time required for a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 to enter the ball entry section 24a, 31-34 has elapsed since the launch of the game ball was restricted. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where a game ball will not reliably enter the ball entry section 24a, 31-34, which would trigger a change in the various parameters.

When information is set indicating that various parameters are being calculated using the ball entry history and the results of the calculation are being reported (i.e., when the check waiting flag or display flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1"), the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (step S3709) is prevented even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or off while the RAM clear switch is turned on. This makes it possible to prevent the clearing process of the main RAM 65 from being executed in response to a restriction on game progress when various parameters are being calculated, even if the above-mentioned clearing operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to release the restriction.

Even if the execution of the clear process of the main RAM 65 in response to the clear operation is prevented as described above, the clear process of the main RAM 65 will be executed if the main process (Figure 64) is executed when the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if a checksum abnormality occurs. This makes it possible to leave room for the clear process of the main RAM 65 to be executed even if the progress of the game is restricted when calculating various parameters.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the state in which game progress is restricted is lifted once a predetermined display period for the check results has elapsed. This prevents situations in which game progress is left in a restricted state.

Even if the progress of a game is restricted when various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the effect on the symbol display device 41 will continue to be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the effect from ending immediately even if an opportunity arises to calculate various parameters while the player is playing and the progress of the game is restricted, preventing the player from becoming confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

If an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs while a game effect is being executed on the symbol display device 41 and the progress of play is restricted, control to terminate the game effect for that game effect will not be executed even if the duration of the game effect that would normally be the trigger to terminate the game effect has elapsed. This makes it possible for the game effect to continue even when game progress is restricted, and makes it possible for the player to believe that the execution of the effect is continuing even when game progress is restricted when various parameters are being derived.

The state in which the effects for a game round are continued when the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters is canceled when a command to start a new effect, such as a variation command, opening command, or demo start command, is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163. This makes it possible to cancel the state in which the effects for a game round are continued without sending a special command from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163 to cancel the state in which the effects for a game round are continued.

When continuing the effects for a game round when game progress is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the standby display, which is the stage before the symbols are displayed as still when the effects for that game round are ended, continues. This makes it possible to continue the effects for a game round when game progress is restricted, while still allowing the player to recognize the results of the symbols being stopped. Furthermore, when the restrictions on game progress are lifted and the effects for a game round are ended, it is sufficient to simply switch from the standby display to the still display at the time the restrictions on game progress are lifted. This makes it possible to smoothly and quickly end the effects for a game round when the restrictions on game progress are lifted.

If the game's progress is restricted in order to calculate various parameters and the game effect continues, a corresponding notification will also be issued. This will prevent players from becoming confused by the game effect continuing for longer than expected.

Notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the goal scoring history are made by the special map display unit 37a, which displays changes in the special map, and the regular map display unit 38a, which displays changes in the regular map. This makes it possible to use both the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a as display units for making such notifications, making it possible to simplify the configuration compared to a configuration in which dedicated display units are provided.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the display of the special map in the special map display unit 37a and the general map in the general map display unit 38a are interrupted. This makes it possible to clarify the content of the notifications in these special map display units 37a and general map display units 38a.

Furthermore, when the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters using the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a has ended, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a will return to the display contents immediately before the notification began. This makes it possible to resume the display of special maps on the special map display unit 37a and the display of regular maps on the regular map display unit 38a after the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters has ended.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are executed using the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a, the display mode used to display the special map for the special map display unit 37a is not used as the display mode for notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters, and the display mode used to display the regular map for the regular map display unit 38a is not used as the display mode for notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters. This makes it possible for the amusement hall manager to clearly understand that notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are being executed using the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a.

When notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters are issued using the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the contents of different types of notification targets are displayed in sequence. This makes it possible to display the contents of different types of notification targets using the same display units 37a and 38a.

<Alternative to the thirteenth embodiment>
Although the configuration is such that the launch of game balls is prohibited when various parameters are calculated using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the launch of game balls is not prohibited. In this case, when a command signal to start checking is received, the configuration is such that various parameters are calculated using the information on the ball entry history at that time, so that various parameters can be calculated without being affected even if the launch of game balls continues thereafter.

- The device that issues notifications corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 is not limited to the configuration of the special map display section 37a and the regular map display section 38a, but may also be configured to use the display light-emitting section 53 provided on the front door frame 14 for both, or may be configured to have a dedicated display section. By using the display light-emitting section 53 provided on the front door frame 14 to issue the above notification, it becomes easier to check the content of the notification. Furthermore, by using a dedicated display section to issue the above notification, it becomes clear to the amusement hall manager which device is issuing the above notification.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the above notification is executed using a dedicated display unit, when an event such as the reception of a signal instructing the start of a check occurs, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history for the ball entry units 24a, 31-34, and the notification content of the calculation results is updated, with the notification based on the updated notification content continuing until the next update. This makes it possible to understand the notification content corresponding to the most recent calculation result by checking the dedicated display unit at any time. Furthermore, the dedicated display unit may be configured so that its display surface is located in a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52, or may be configured to be installed inside the circuit board box of the main control unit 60.

- The trigger for executing a calculation using the ball entry history into the ball entry units 24a, 31-34 is not limited to receiving a signal instructing the start of a check from the hall computer HC of the gaming hall. For example, the trigger may be configured to occur each time a predetermined amount of time has elapsed, or each time the total period during which gaming balls are being released reaches a predetermined period, or when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, or when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, or when a demo effect continues for a predetermined period or longer, or when a predetermined operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated, or when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the predetermined operation unit is operated.

- In the above embodiment, when calculations are performed using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, the payout of game balls is not stopped. However, instead, the payout of game balls may also be stopped.

- Even when calculations are performed using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, effects such as game play effects, open/close execution mode effects, and demo effects are configured to continue as is by the display light-emitting section 53, speaker section 54, and pattern display device 41. However, this is not limited to this, and the effects may also be temporarily interrupted. In this case, once the notification of the calculation results has finished, the effects will resume from the state where they were temporarily interrupted.

- In a configuration in which calculations using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 and the notification of the calculation results are performed in a control unit separate from the main CPU 63, such as in the first embodiment, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 may be stopped when the calculations and notification of the calculation results are being performed. Even in this case, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game when the calculations and notification of the calculation results are being performed.

- The main CPU 63 may be equipped with an RTC, and if the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the opening hours of the amusement hall, even if a game ball enters the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, this may not be reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, it may be impossible to intentionally change the ball entry history for the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, for example, outside the opening hours of the amusement hall.

- Even if a game ball enters the ball entry areas 24a, 31-34 when no game balls are being launched, the system may be configured so that this is not reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, if a game ball is placed in the ball entry areas 24a, 31-34, this will not be reflected in the ball entry history.

- While the game progress is restricted before calculations using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 are started, these may occur simultaneously, or the game progress may not be restricted when the calculations are performed, but may be restricted when the calculation results are subsequently announced.

- The state in which the progress of the game is restricted as a result of the execution of calculations using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 may be released for reasons other than the lapse of the display period for the check results. For example, the state may be released when a signal instructing the end of the check is received from the hall computer HC of the gaming hall, or when an operating section provided on the pachinko machine 10 is operated.

- When a trigger occurs to execute a calculation using the ball entry history in the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 while a game presentation is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the game presentation currently being executed is not limited to being held in a standby display state; for example, it may be held in a standby state until the still display is completed, at which point the start of the next game presentation is put on hold.

- If an opportunity arises to execute a calculation using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 while an effect for the open/close execution mode is being executed on the pattern display device 41, the effect for the open/close execution mode that is currently being executed does not necessarily have to be continued, but may be temporarily interrupted at that point.

- In a configuration in which game progress is restricted when fraudulent activity is detected, a configuration in which the execution of effects continues even when the game progress is restricted may be applied. Also, in a configuration in which game progress is restricted when the state of the pachinko machine 10 reaches a predetermined state, a configuration in which the execution of effects continues even when the game progress is restricted may be applied.

- In a configuration in which a final stop command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163 at the end of a game presentation, the state in which the standby display is continued on the pattern display device 41 may be canceled based on the final stop command being sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163. Even in this case, there is no need to send a dedicated command from the main CPU 63 to the sound/light CPU 163 to cancel the state in which the standby display is continued on the pattern display device 41.

- The values of various parameters calculated using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 may be reported directly. This allows the manager of the amusement hall to grasp the various parameters in detail.

- The results calculated using the history of balls entering the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, or information corresponding thereto, may be displayed on the pattern display device 41 in addition to or instead of the special pattern display section 37a and the regular pattern display section 38a. This makes it easier for the gaming hall manager to understand the calculation results.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the process from when the instruction signal to start a check is received until the check waiting period starts is different from that in the thirteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the check process in this embodiment.

If it is not the check result display period or the check waiting period (steps S3801 and S3802: NO), it is determined whether the end trigger waiting flag stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3803). The end trigger waiting flag is a flag that the main CPU 63 uses to identify that it is waiting for the start of the check waiting period after receiving a signal instructing it to start a check.

If the termination trigger wait flag is not set to "1" (step S3803: NO), and a signal instructing the start of a check has been received from the hall computer HC (step S3804: YES), it is determined whether a game turn is currently being played, the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, or normal power control is currently being executed (step S3805). If the current state is one of the following: a game turn is currently being played, the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, or normal power control is currently being executed (step S3805: YES), the termination trigger wait flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3806). This initiates a termination trigger wait period, during which the system waits for the start of the check wait period. On the other hand, if the current state is not one of the following: a game turn is currently being played, the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, or normal power control is currently being executed (step S3805: NO), steps S3809 to S3814 are executed. Furthermore, if the termination trigger waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and the termination trigger waiting period is in progress (step S3803: YES), and the current time is not during execution of a game turn, open/close execution mode, or normal map/normal power control (step S3807: NO), the termination trigger waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" to end the termination trigger waiting period (step S3808), and then steps S3809 to S3814 are executed.

Regarding the processing of steps S3809 to S3814 in detail, first, the process of prohibiting the release of game balls is executed (step S3809) in the same manner as step S3404 of the check processing (Figure 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Then, the process of storing the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a is executed (step S3810) in the same manner as step S3408 of the check processing (Figure 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, and then the process of starting the check waiting display of the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a is executed (step S3811) in the same manner as step S3409 of the check processing (Figure 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Also, similar to step S3410 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the 13th embodiment, a setting process is executed on the check waiting counter (step S3812), and similar to step S3411 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the 13th embodiment, the check waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3813), and further similar to step S3412 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the 13th embodiment, a check start command is sent to the audio/optical side CPU 163 (step S3814). This starts the check waiting period.

In this embodiment, if a signal instructing the start of a check is received during the execution of a game round, during the open/close execution mode, or during normal map/normal power control, the system waits for the start of a check wait period, and starts the check wait period when the game round, the open/close execution mode, or the normal map/normal power control is no longer being executed. This eliminates the need to interrupt these situations and then execute processing to resume them, thereby reducing memory capacity and processing load. Furthermore, because there is no need to interrupt each situation in this way, this embodiment does not execute the game round interruption processing (step S3405), open/close execution mode interruption processing (step S3406), or normal map/normal power control interruption processing (step S3407) as in the thirteenth embodiment when the check wait period begins.

When the check wait flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and the check wait period begins, a positive determination is made in step S3802 of the check process, causing the check wait process to be executed in step S3815. The processing content of the check wait process is the same as the check wait process in the thirteenth embodiment (Figure 61). Furthermore, when the check wait process is executed and the check wait period is switched to the check result display period, a positive determination is made in step S3801 of the check process, causing the check result display processing to be executed in step S3816.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the processing performed while the check results are displayed.

The display processing of the check result first subtracts 1 from the display counter value in the main RAM 65 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether the display counter value after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3902).

If the value of the display counter is not "0" (step S3902: NO), it is determined whether one of the target periods among the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period has ended during the check result display period, and it is time to switch to the next target period (step S3903). If a positive determination is made in step S3903, a display content update process is executed (step S3904). In this update process, the display is controlled so that the display content corresponds to the next target period from the current target period among the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period. The processing content of steps S3903 and S3904 is the same as the processing content of steps S3603 and S3604 of the check result display processing (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment described above.

If it is determined in step S3902 that the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is "0," display restoration processing is executed for the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a (step S3905), similar to step S3605 in the display processing of the check result in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 62). Then, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3906). This results in a negative determination in step S2707 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51), and the processing returns to the state in which steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Then, game ball launch prohibition release processing is executed (step S3907), similar to step S3610 in the display processing of the check result in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 62).

Next, we will explain how the termination trigger waiting period, check waiting period, and check result display period progress, with reference to the time chart in Figure 70. Figure 70(a) shows the timing when the hall computer HC outputs a signal to start a check, Figure 70(b) shows the execution period of a game round, Figure 70(c) shows the execution period of normal ball control, Figure 70(d) shows the period during which the release of game balls is prohibited, Figure 70(e) shows the termination trigger waiting period, Figure 70(f) shows the check waiting period, and Figure 70(g) shows the period during which the check results are displayed.

As shown in Figure 70(b), at time t1 during a game round, the hall computer HC outputs a signal to start a check, as shown in Figure 70(a). In this case, the game round continues without interruption at time t1. Also, at time t1, a waiting period for an end trigger occurs, as shown in Figure 70(e).

After that, normal power control is initiated at time t2 while the game is being played, as shown in Figure 70(c). Then, at time t3 while the normal power control is being played, the game ends, as shown in Figure 70(b). However, because the normal power control is still being played, the waiting period for the end trigger continues.

After that, at timing t4, the normal map normal power control ends as shown in Figure 70 (c). This results in a situation where the game is not being played, the open/close execution mode is not in effect, and the normal map normal power control is not being executed. Therefore, at timing t4, the system transitions from the end trigger waiting period to the check waiting period as shown in Figures 70 (e) and 70 (f). In this case, the display content of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a changes to a display content to notify the user that the check waiting period is in effect. Also, at timing t4, the launch of game balls is prohibited as shown in Figure 70 (d).

Then, at time t5, the check waiting period ends when the fixed time T1 has elapsed since time t4. At time t5, calculations of various parameters are performed using the ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In this case, time T1 is set to be sufficiently longer than the longest time required from the time a ball is launched from the ball launch mechanism 27 in response to operation of the launch operation device 28 until the time when the main CPU 63 determines that the launched ball has entered one of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 in the play area PA and been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a corresponding to the ball entry section 24a, 31-34. Then, as already explained, the launch of balls is prohibited at time t4. Therefore, by the time the check waiting period has elapsed, all game balls flowing down the game area PA will have disappeared, and all ball entry history for each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 will have been acquired by the time the check waiting period has elapsed.

As shown in Figure 70 (g), the display period for the check results begins at timing t5. During this display period for the check results, as already explained, there are successively three periods: a normal period in which displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters in normal operation are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a; an opening/closing execution mode period in which displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a; and a high-frequency support mode period in which displays corresponding to the determination results for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode are executed on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a.

After that, at time t6, a fixed time T2 has passed since time t5, and the display period for the check result ends, as shown in Figure 70(g). As a result, at time t6, the state in which the release of game balls was prohibited is lifted, as shown in Figure 70(d).

According to the embodiment described above, when specific operations such as game play, open/close execution mode, and normal map/normal power control are being performed on the pachinko machine 10, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters using the ball entry history occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an opportunity to calculate various parameters from interfering with the execution of the game machine, open/close execution mode, and normal map/normal power control.

When a trigger for calculating various parameters occurs while the pachinko machine 10 is in game play, open/close execution mode, or normal map/normal power control, the progress of the game is restricted after the specific action to be executed is completed. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the trigger for calculating various parameters, without impeding the execution of the specific action.

While a game is in progress, the progress of the game will not be restricted even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters even when the progress of the game is restricted, without interrupting the game.

When the open/close execution mode is active, game progress is not restricted even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters even when game progress is restricted, without interrupting the open/close execution mode.

In addition, if the special electric winning device 32 is open during the open/close execution mode, the execution of calculations using the ball entry history into the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 and restrictions on the progress of the game are put on hold, and if the special electric winning device 32 is closed even during the open/close execution mode, the execution of calculations using the ball entry history into the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 and restrictions on the progress of the game are not put on hold.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in that the management of the history of balls entering each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34, the calculations using the results of this management, and the notification of the calculation results are performed by the sound and light side CPU 163 rather than the main side CPU 63. Below, we will explain the configurations that differ from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that explanations of the same configurations as the thirteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 71 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the input port 201 provided in the MPU 162 of the audio and light emission control device 81. In addition to the input port 201, the MPU 162 is also provided with an input port for receiving commands from the main CPU 63.

The input port 201 is provided with multiple buffers 202a-202g. Specifically, first through seventh buffers 202a-202g are provided. Each of the first through seventh buffers 202a-202g can input one type of signal via signal paths 203a-203g, and each of the first through seventh buffers 202a-202g stores "0" as first data when the input signal is at a LOW level, and stores "1" as second data when the input signal is at a HIGH level. Note that the relationship between LOW and HIGH and the first and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and outputs a HI level first signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. This specific period is long enough for the audio/visual CPU 163 to determine that a HI level first signal has been input to the first buffer 202a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new game balls are detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and outputs a HI level second signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. This specific period is long enough for the audio/visual CPU 163 to determine that a HI level second signal has been input to the second buffer 202b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when no new game balls are detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and outputs a HI level third signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. This specific period is sufficient for the sound/light CPU 163 to determine that a HI level third signal has been input to the third buffer 202c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and outputs a HI level fourth signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. This specific period is sufficient for the audio/visual CPU 163 to determine that a HI level fourth signal has been input to the fourth buffer 202d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game balls are detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, and outputs a HI level fifth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. This specific period is sufficient for the audio/visual CPU 163 to determine that a HI level fifth signal has been input to the fifth buffer 202e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when no new game balls are detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, and outputs a HI level sixth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. This specific period is sufficient for the audio/visual CPU 163 to determine that a HI level sixth signal has been input to the sixth buffer 202f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 202g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal when no new gaming balls are detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and outputs a HI level seventh signal for a specific period of time when one gaming ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. This specific period is long enough for the audio/visual CPU 163 to determine that a HI level seventh signal has been input to the seventh buffer 202g.

Figure 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the correspondence area 204 provided in the audio/light-side ROM 164. The correspondence area 204 includes first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g, which correspond one-to-one to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g provided in the input port 201 of the MPU 162 of the audio/light-emitting control device 81.

In the first correspondence area 204a, information indicating that the first buffer 202a is a general winning opening 31 is pre-stored at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound-light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the first buffer 202a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 204a, information indicating that the first buffer 202a is a general winning opening 31, as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, is pre-stored at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10. In the second correspondence area 204b, information indicating that the second buffer 202b is a general winning opening 31 is pre-stored at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound-light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the second buffer 202b. In addition, the second correspondence area 204b is pre-stored with information indicating that the opening is a general winning opening 31, as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10. The third correspondence area 204c is pre-stored with information indicating that the opening is a general winning opening 31, as information for the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the third buffer 202c, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the third correspondence area 204c is pre-stored with information indicating that the opening is a general winning opening 31, as well as information on the number of game balls (10) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10.

In the fourth correspondence area 204d, information indicating that the signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is the special electric winning device 32 is pre-stored at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound-and-light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 202d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 204d, information indicating that the signal is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls (15) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, is pre-stored at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10. In the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 is pre-stored at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, as information for the sound-and-light side CPU 163 to identify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 202e. Furthermore, in the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that the port is the first actuation port 33, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first actuation port 33, is pre-stored at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10. In the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating that the port is the second actuation port 34 is pre-stored at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 202f by the sound/light side CPU 163. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating that the port is the second actuation port 34, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second actuation port 34, is pre-stored at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10. The seventh correspondence area 204g is pre-stored with information indicating that it is the outlet 24a, which is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 202g, at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the timer interrupt process (Figure 51) was configured to execute a check process (step S2706), but this check process is not executed in this embodiment. Additionally, step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51) not only determines whether game play is stopped, but also whether the check result display period is in progress. However, while this embodiment determines whether game play is stopped, it does not determine whether the check result display period is in progress. Furthermore, the ball entry detection process in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51) executes the same process as the ball entry detection process (Figure 10) in the first embodiment. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the management output process is executed as the process following the external information setting process in step S2719 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 51).

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63.

First, the managed object counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "7" (step S4001). The managed object counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to identify any managed objects for which it has not yet determined whether the signal output status to the sound/light side CPU 163 should be changed in this management output process, and to identify for which managed objects the signal output status to the sound/light side CPU 163 should be changed. In one management output process, the managed objects for which the main CPU 63 determines whether the signal output status to the sound/light side CPU 163 should be changed are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Therefore, the managed object counter is initially set to "7".

Then, it is determined whether the signal output state to the sound/light side CPU 163 for the managed object corresponding to the current value of the managed object counter is at HI level (step S4002). If it is not at HI level (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether the output flag in the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed object counter is set to "1" (step S4003). Specifically, if the value of the managed object counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed object counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed object counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed object counter is "4" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1". If the value of the managed counter is "3" and corresponds to the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, it determines whether the fourth output flag is set to "1." If the value of the managed counter is "2" and corresponds to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, it determines whether the sixth output flag is set to "1." If the value of the managed counter is "1" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, it determines whether the seventh output flag is set to "1." As with the first embodiment, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" during the ball entry detection process (Figure 10).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level (step S4004). Then, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S4005).

If a positive judgment is made in step S4002, it is determined whether an opportunity has arisen to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a LOW level (step S4006). Specifically, it is determined whether a HIGH output duration (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of one of the first to seventh signals corresponding to the value of the managed counter was switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. This HIGH output duration is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process described below for monitoring the input port 201 in the sound/light side CPU 163, and is a period that allows the sound/light side CPU 163 to reliably identify the output state of the signal that has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. If an opportunity has arisen to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a LOW level (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to a LOW level (step S4007).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4003, if the processing of step S4005 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S4006, or if the processing of step S4007 is executed, the value of the managed object counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed object counter after the decrement is "0" (step S4009). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or greater (step S4009: NO), the processing from step S4002 onwards is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the performance control process of this embodiment, which is executed by the sound/light side CPU 163, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 74. Note that the performance control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short interval (e.g., every 4 msec).

If the sound/light side CPU 163 has received an opening command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4101: YES), it sets the open/close execution mode flag stored in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4102). The open/close execution mode flag is a flag that allows the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify the open/close execution mode. Then, it executes a performance setting process for the open/close execution mode (step S4103). In the performance setting process for the open/close execution mode, it reads a data table for the open/close execution mode from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. This executes the performance for the open/close execution mode in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It also sends an opening command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display performance for the open/close execution mode is executed.

If the sound/light side CPU 163 has received an ending command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4104: YES), it clears the open/close execution mode flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4105). It then executes the ending effect setting process (step S4106). In the ending effect setting process, the data table for the ending is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. This executes the ending period effects in the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54. It also sends the ending command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effects for the ending period are executed.

If the sound/light side CPU 163 has received a high-frequency start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4107: YES), it sets the high-frequency support flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4108). The high-frequency start command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 when the high-frequency support mode is initiated. The high-frequency support flag is a flag that the sound/light side CPU 163 uses to identify that the high-frequency support mode is active. Then, a performance setting process for high-frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the performance setting process for high-frequency support, a data table for high-frequency support mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, performance for high-frequency support mode is executed in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. The high-frequency start command is also transmitted to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the high-frequency start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effects for the high-frequency support mode are executed.

If the sound/light side CPU 163 has received a high-frequency end command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4110: YES), it clears the high-frequency support flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4111). The high-frequency end command is sent from the main side CPU 63 when the high-frequency support mode ends. Then, it executes a low-frequency support effect setting process (step S4112). In the low-frequency support effect setting process, it reads the data table for the low-frequency support mode from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165. Then, it executes light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table. As a result, the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute effects for the low-frequency support mode. It also sends a high-frequency end command to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the high-frequency end command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect for the low-frequency support mode is executed.

If the audio/visual side CPU 163 has received a door open command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4113: YES), it sets the door open flag stored in the audio/visual side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4114). The door open command is sent from the main side CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from a closed state to an open state. The door open flag is a flag used by the audio/visual side CPU 163 to identify that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. An alarm start process is then executed (step S4115). In the alarm start process, a data table for door open alarms is read from the audio/visual side ROM 164 to the audio/visual side RAM 165. Then, light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. This causes the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 to issue an alarm indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. A door open command is also sent to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the door open command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that a notification is issued indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

If the sound/light side CPU 163 has received a door close command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4116: YES), it clears the door open flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4117). The door close command is sent from the main side CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from an open state to a closed state. An alarm termination process is then executed (step S4118). The alarm termination process terminates the notification from the display light-emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. The door close command is also sent to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the door close command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in an open state is terminated.

Then, in step S4119, history setting processing is executed, and in step S4120, checking processing is executed, and then in step S4121, other processing is executed. These other processing include processing executed when a fluctuation command and a type command are received from the main CPU 63.

Next, we will explain the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the performance control process (Figure 74).

First, referring to the explanatory diagram of Figure 75, we will explain the normal counter area 211, the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 213 provided in the audio/visual side RAM 165. Each of these areas 211 to 213 is provided with a first counter 211a, 212a, 213a; a second counter 211b, 212b, 213b; a third counter 211c, 212c, 213c; a fourth counter 211d, 212d, 213d; a fifth counter 211e, 212e, 213e; a sixth counter 211f, 212f, 213f; and a seventh counter 211g, 212g, 213g. The first counters 211a, 212a, 213a store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a has changed from a LOW level to a HIGH level. The second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has changed from a low level to a high level. The third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has changed from a low level to a high level. The fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has changed from a low level to a high level. The fifth counters 211e, 212e, and 213e store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has changed from a low level to a high level. The sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has changed from LOW level to HIGH level. The seventh counters 211g, 212g, and 213g store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has changed from LOW level to HIGH level.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the sound/light side CPU 163 in step S4119 of the performance control process (Figure 74).

In the history setting process, if the door open flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1," i.e., if the front door frame 14 is open (step S4201: YES), none of the normal history setting process (step S4204), the history setting process during the open/close execution mode (step S4205), or the history setting process during the high-frequency support mode (step S4206) is executed. The game area PA is formed by the space partitioned front and back by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided in the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is open, the game area PA is opened forward, and even if a game ball is launched toward the game area PA in this situation, the game ball will not be able to flow down the game area PA normally. Furthermore, when game balls enter the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 while the front door frame 14 is open, this occurs when the front door frame 14 is left open by the amusement hall manager for maintenance or to resolve a malfunction, resulting in game balls entering the hall as a result of care and other such actions. Since such game balls do not enter the hall during normal game play, they do not need to be managed. Therefore, in the history setting process, none of the processes in steps S4204 to S4206 are executed when the front door frame 14 is open, as described above.

If none of the door open flag, open/close execution mode flag, and high frequency support flag in the audio/visual RAM 165 are set to "1," i.e., if the front door frame 14 is closed and not in open/close execution mode or high frequency support mode (steps S4201 to S4203: NO), the normal history setting process is executed (step S4204). In the normal history setting process, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to a high level, the value of the normal first counter 211a is incremented by one. When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to a high level, the value of the normal second counter 211b is incremented by one. When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to a high level, the value of the normal third counter 211c is incremented by one. When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202d has switched to a high level, the value of the normal third counter 211c is incremented by one. When it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 211e for normal use is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to the HI level, the value of the sixth counter 211f for normal use is incremented by 1; and when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is incremented by 1.

If the front door frame 14 is closed and in the open/close execution mode (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), a history setting process for the open/close execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process for the open/close execution mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to a HI level, the value of the first counter 212a for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to a HI level, the value of the second counter 212b for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to a HI level, the value of the third counter 212c for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1; and when it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to a HI level, the value of the third counter 212c for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1. When it is confirmed that the signal has switched to a HI level, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to a HI level, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to a HI level, the value of the sixth counter 212f for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1; and when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to a HI level, the value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1.

If the front door frame 14 is closed and in high-frequency support mode (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), history setting processing for high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In the history setting processing for high-frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to HI level, the value of the first counter 213a for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to HI level, the value of the second counter 213b for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the third signal input to the third buffer 202c has switched to HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; and when it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1. When it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 213d for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 213e for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to the HI level, the value of the sixth counter 213f for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; and when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level, the value of the seventh counter 213g for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1.

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the check process executed by the sound/light side CPU 163 in step S4120 of the performance control process (Figure 74).

If it is not the display period for the check results (step S4301: NO), steps S4303 to S4308 are executed, provided that a check start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S4302: YES). The check start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the audio/visual CPU 163 when a check start instruction signal is sent from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that a check start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the demo display began, or the configuration may be such that a check start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 when a predetermined operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, or the configuration may be such that a check start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 when a predetermined time has elapsed, or the configuration may be such that a check start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light side CPU 163 every time a predetermined period of time (e.g., 120 minutes) has elapsed since the previous check start command was sent. Furthermore, the trigger for executing the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which a command is received from the main CPU 63. The configuration may also be such that the sound-and-light side CPU 163 determines whether an event that triggered the transmission of the check start command described above has occurred, and executes the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 when the sound-and-light side CPU 163 determines that the event has occurred.

In steps S4303 to S4308, the normal calculation process is first performed (step S4303). In the normal calculation process, the contents of the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g in the sound/light side ROM 164 are referenced to sum the values of the counters corresponding to the same ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 among the first to seventh normal counters 211a to 211g. Specifically, as already explained, the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c store information indicating the general winning slot 31, and therefore the total value K2 is calculated by summing the values of the first to third normal counters 211a to 211c corresponding to these first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c. Meanwhile, the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 204d to 204g store information corresponding to different ball entry sections 24a, 32 to 34. In this case, the values of the fourth to seventh counters 211d-211g for normal use are grasped as the values of the different ball entry sections 24a, 32-34. Specifically, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is set to K1 corresponding to the exit 24a, the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special winning device 32, the value of the fifth counter 211e for normal use is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 211f for normal use is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, a process similar to the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is performed on the various parameters during normal use. In other words, the calculated parameters are determined to be in the first range if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less; the calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range if either the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6; and the calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range if the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. This determination process is then performed on the various parameters under normal conditions. Information on the determination results is then written to the main RAM 65.

Then, calculation processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the calculation processing for the opening/closing execution mode, as in the normal calculation processing (step S4303), the values of the first to third counters 212a to 212c for the opening/closing execution mode are summed to calculate the total value K2. The value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special power prize winning device 32, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 212f for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Parameters 7 and 8 are then calculated in the same manner as in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (Figure 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Then, processing similar to the parameter management process (Figure 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode are determined to be in the first range if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less; if either the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range; and if the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceed 0.6, the various calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. This determination result information is then written to the main RAM 65.

Then, calculation processing for the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the calculation processing for the high-frequency support mode, the values of the first to third counters 213a to 213c for the high-frequency support mode are summed to calculate the total value K2, as in the normal calculation processing (step S4303). The value of the seventh counter 213g for the high-frequency support mode is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high-frequency support mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special power prize winning device 32, the value of the fifth counter 213e for the high-frequency support mode is set to K4 corresponding to the first actuation port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high-frequency support mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second actuation port 34. Parameters 7 and 8 are then calculated in the same manner as in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (Figure 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Then, processing similar to the parameter management process (Figure 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. In other words, the various parameters in high frequency support mode are determined to be in the first range if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less; if either the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various calculated parameters are determined to be in the second range; and if the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. This determination result information is then written to the main RAM 65.

Then, a process to start displaying the calculation results is executed (step S4306). In this display start process, a determination result command corresponding to the information on each determination result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 is sent to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the determination result command, it causes all of the information on each determination result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. As a result, an image indicating whether various parameters in normal mode correspond to the first, second, or third range, an image indicating whether various parameters in the opening and closing execution mode correspond to the first, second, or third range, and an image indicating whether various parameters in the high frequency support mode correspond to the first, second, or third range are displayed on the pattern display device 41. In this case, the images corresponding to the information on these judgment results are displayed in the corners of the pattern display device 41 in a manner that allows the amusement hall manager to recognize which images correspond to the various parameters in normal mode, the various parameters in open/close execution mode, and the various parameters in high-frequency support mode.

Then, information corresponding to the display period of the check results (specifically, 30 seconds) is set in a display counter provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 (step S4307). The value set in the display counter is periodically decremented (for example, every 4 msec). In addition, a display flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1" (step S4308). The display flag is a flag that allows the sound/light side CPU 163 to identify that the check results are currently being displayed.

If the display flag in the sound/light side RAM 165 is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S4301. In this case, the value of the display counter in the sound/light side RAM 165 is decremented by 1 (step S4309). Then, it is determined whether the value of the display counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S4310). If the value of the display counter is "0" (step S4310: YES), a display termination process for the calculation results is executed (step S4311). In this display termination process, a display termination command is sent to the display control device 82 so that the display of images corresponding to the information on each of the above determination results on the pattern display device 41 is terminated. Upon receiving the display termination command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display of images corresponding to the information on each of the above determination results is terminated.

Then, the display flag in the audio/visual side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4312). Furthermore, when step S4312 is executed, the values of the counters 211a-211g in the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a-212g in the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and the counters 213a-213g in the high-frequency support mode counter area 213 are cleared to "0." This initializes the goal history in the goal sections 24a, 31-34, and new goal history management begins. However, this is not limited to this, and even when step S4312 is executed, the values of the counters 211a-211g in the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a-212g in the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and the counters 213a-213g in the high-frequency support mode counter area 213 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball scoring history of the ball scoring sections 24a, 31-34 will be accumulated across multiple executions of the notification of the calculation results using the ball scoring history. In addition, in this configuration, the ball scoring history of the ball scoring sections 24a, 31-34 may be erased based on the receipt of a history erasure signal from the hall computer HC or the occurrence of an erasure operation using an operation unit provided on the pachinko machine 10.

According to the present embodiment described above, the accumulation of the goal history of the goal sections 24a, 31-34, calculations using that goal history, and notification of the calculation results are performed by the sound/light CPU 163 rather than the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to accumulate the goal history of the goal sections 24a, 31-34, calculations using that goal history, and notification of the calculation results, while preventing an increase in the processing load on the main CPU 63, which oversees the progress of the game.

The results of the ball scoring sections 24a, 31-34 are sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path that is separate from the signal path used to send commands from the main CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163. This makes it possible to send the results of the ball scoring sections 24a, 31-34 from the main CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 without increasing the number of commands.

Information indicating which of the scoring sections 24a, 31-34 the signal path transmitting the scoring results for each scoring section 24a, 31-34 corresponds to, as well as information on the number of winning game balls corresponding to each signal path, is pre-stored in the sound/light side ROM 164. This eliminates the need to process which scoring section 24a, 31-34 the scoring results for each signal path correspond to, and to transmit information on the number of winning game balls corresponding to each signal path from the main side CPU 63 to the sound/light side CPU 163.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the case where the ball entry results for the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 are sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path separate from the signal path for commands; for example, the results may be sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light CPU 163 using a signal path for commands. In this case, commands corresponding to the type of each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 may be sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound-and-light CPU 163. In this configuration, each command may include information about the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry section 24a, 31-34, and the information about the number of prize balls corresponding to each command may be pre-stored in the sound-and-light ROM 164.

<16th embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the results of calculation of various parameters using the history of the balls scored in each of the scoring sections 24a, 31 to 34 are displayed using the special map display section 37a and the general map display section 38a, but in this embodiment, the display section for displaying this information is different. Below, we will explain the configuration that differs from the thirteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, notification display devices 215-217 are provided on the main control board 61 of the main control device 60. First, the main control device 60 will be described. Figure 78 is a front view of the main control device 60, and Figure 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 78.

As shown in Figures 78 and 79, the main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. As shown in Figure 79, an MPU 62 is mounted on one of the surfaces of the main control board 61, the element mounting surface 61a. The board box 60a is transparent so that the MPU 62 housed within the board box 60a can be seen from outside the board box 60a. While the board box 60a is colorless and transparent, it may be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 housed within the board box 60a can be seen from outside the board box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a that faces the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 60b of the base box 60a, and also to visually observe the MPU 62 through said opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining multiple case bodies 60c, 60d in a front-to-back configuration. As shown in Figure 78, these multiple case bodies 60c, 60d are provided with connecting portions 60e that prevent the case bodies 60c, 60d from separating and leave a mark when the case bodies 60c, 60d are separated. Multiple connecting portions 60e are arranged side by side along one side of the roughly rectangular board box 60a. As a result, even if some connecting portions 60e are used to prevent the case bodies 60c, 60d from separating and then the case bodies 60c, 60d are separated by destroying those connecting portions 60e, it is possible to prevent the case bodies 60c, 60d from separating again by subsequently connecting another connecting portion 60e. Furthermore, when case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, joint 60e is destroyed, leaving a trace, making it possible to visually check joint 60e and determine whether case bodies 60c and 60d have been separated fraudulently. Furthermore, a seal 60f is affixed to the side of board box 60a opposite the side on which joint 60e is arranged, spanning the boundary between case bodies 60c and 60d. When seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on case bodies 60c and 60d. This makes it possible to leave a trace if seal 60f is peeled off when case bodies 60c and 60d are separated.

In the main control device 60 configured as described above, the main control board 61 is provided with multiple alarm display devices 215-217, as shown in FIG. 78. Specifically, a first alarm display device 215, a second alarm display device 216, and a third alarm display device 217 are provided. Each of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 is a segment display with an arrangement of seven LED display segments, but is not limited to this and may be a single light-emitting element of a multi-color type, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 is installed so that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces. This makes it possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 housed within the board box 60a from outside the board box 60a. Furthermore, as already explained, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b, which faces the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a, faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third alarm display devices 215 to 217 can be seen through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The first alert display device 215 displays the determination results of the various normal parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) identified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. In this case, if the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the first alert display device 215 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the first range; if the determination result of the various parameters is in the second range, the first alert display device 215 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the second range; and if the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, the first alert display device 215 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the third range.

The second alert display device 216 displays the determination results of the various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the opening/closing execution mode identified in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. In this case, if the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the second alert display device 216 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the first range; if the determination result of the various parameters is in the second range, the second alert display device 216 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the second range; and if the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, the second alert display device 216 displays a character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the third range.

The third alert display device 217 displays the judgment results of the various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in high frequency support mode identified in the aggregation process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment described above. In this case, if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the first range, the third alert display device 217 displays letters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range; if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the second range, the third alert display device 217 displays letters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range; and if the judgment result of the various parameters is in the third range, the third alert display device 217 displays letters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

Incidentally, the display of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 215-217 begins when the check result display period begins and ends when the check result display period ends, similar to the display of each judgment result on the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a in the thirteenth embodiment described above. However, this is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 215-217 may be configured to always display the most recent judgment result. Furthermore, the first to third notification display devices 215-217 may be configured to start displaying the most recent judgment result when a sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 detects that the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened relative to the outer frame 11, and the display of each judgment result on the first to third notification display devices 215-217 may be configured to end when a sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 detects that the gaming machine main body 12 has been closed relative to the outer frame 11. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 display information.

A blocking sheet 60g is provided in the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a, which faces the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61, in an area facing the first to third alarm display devices 215-217. The blocking sheet 60g is provided to prevent the interior of the board box 60a, and more specifically the first to third alarm display devices 215-217, from being visible through the area of the board box 60a where the blocking sheet 60g is provided. Specifically, a hologram sheet is provided as the blocking sheet 60g, but this is not limited to this, and a reflective sheet or diffused reflection sheet may also be provided. By providing the blocking sheet 60g, the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 cannot be seen even when the area of the board box 60a where the blocking sheet 60g is provided is viewed from the front due to the presence of the blocking sheet 60g. This reduces the possibility that a player will be able to see the first to third notification display devices 215-217 when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 for maintenance or other purposes while a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

However, because the blocking sheet 60g is provided on a partial area of the opposing wall 60b, the display surfaces of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 can be viewed from outside the board box 60a by viewing the opposing wall 60b diagonally toward the first to third alarm display devices 215-217. Therefore, the amusement hall manager can visually view the notification content of each judgment result on the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 from outside the board box 60a.

Incidentally, the blocking sheet 60g is not provided in the area of the opposing wall portion 60b that faces the MPU 62. This makes it possible to ensure that the visibility of the MPU 62 is not reduced even if the blocking sheet 60g is provided.

In addition, instead of the blocking sheet 60g, a member that reduces the visibility of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 may be provided. For example, a colored, transparent sheet with low transparency may be provided in place of the blocking sheet 60g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, the display surfaces of the first to third alarm display devices 215-217 can be seen, but the display content on those surfaces will be difficult to see.

Seventeenth Embodiment
While each of the above embodiments has shown an example in which a configuration for managing game history is employed in a pachinko machine 10, this embodiment will show an example in which a configuration for managing game history is employed in a slot machine 310. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described. Figure 80 is a front view of the slot machine 310, Figure 81 is a perspective view of the slot machine 310 with the front door 312 open, and Figure 82 is a front view of the cabinet 311.

As shown in Figures 81 and 82, the slot machine 310 has a housing 311 that forms its outer shell. The housing 311 is formed by fixing multiple wooden panels together, giving it an overall box-like shape that is open to the front.

As shown in Figures 80 and 81, a front door 312 is attached to the front side of the housing 311. The front door 312 is supported by the housing 311 using a pivot 312a on the left side as a rotation axis, allowing the interior space of the housing 311 to be opened and closed. The front door 312 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 312b on the back side, and this locked state can be released by unlocking the key cylinder 313 with a specified key.

As shown in Figure 80, a game panel 314 is provided near the upper center of the front door 312. The game panel 314 has three vertically long display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R arranged side by side. The display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the interior of the slot machine 310 can be seen through each of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

As shown in Figures 81 and 82, the interior of the housing 311 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 311a, and a reel unit 316 is attached to the top of the partition plate 311a. The reel unit 316 is equipped with a left reel 316L, a center reel 316M, and a right reel 316R, each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel 316L, 316M, and 316R. The axes of rotation of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 315L, 315M, and 315R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is visible through the corresponding display window 315L, 315M, 315R. Furthermore, when the reels 316L, 316M, 316R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are displayed as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window 315L, 315M, 315R.

As shown in Figure 80, a start lever 321 is provided on the lower left side of the gaming panel 314, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. When this start lever 321 is operated while gaming media such as medals have been bet, each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R begins to spin simultaneously.

Stop buttons 322, 323, and 324 are provided to the right of the start lever 321 and can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. Each stop button 322, 323, and 324 is located directly below the display window 315L, 315M, and 315R corresponding to the reel 316L, 316M, and 316R to be stopped. Each stop button 322, 323, and 324 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 316L once a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel began spinning.

One game (play) corresponds to the period from when the start lever 321 is operated to when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start to rotate, when the stop buttons 322, 323, and 324 are operated to when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R stop to when various processes such as the awarding of gaming media and management of the game status are completed.

A medal insertion slot 325 for inserting medals as investment value is provided below and to the right of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. As shown in FIG. 81, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 325 are guided by a selector 317 located on the back of the front door 312 to a hopper device 318 if acceptance is permitted, or to a medal receiving tray 312d via a medal ejection slot 312c located at the bottom front of the front door 312 if acceptance is prohibited (see FIG. 80). The hopper device 318 has the function of paying out medals stored in a storage tank through the medal ejection slot 312c to the medal receiving tray 312d if a winning combination corresponding to the award of gaming media is achieved on an active line.

As shown in Figure 80, below the medal insertion slot 325 is a return button 326 that is pressed when medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 325 become stuck in the selector 317. Also, on the left below the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R are a first credit insertion button 327 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, a second credit insertion button 328 for inserting two virtual medals at a time, and a third credit insertion button 329 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 331 is provided to the left of the start lever 321. In other words, this slot machine 310 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won; if the settlement button 331 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 312c.

A power supply unit 319 is provided inside the housing 311, as shown in Figures 81 and 82. The power supply unit 319 is provided with a power switch 319a that is operated when powering on or off, a reset button 319b for resetting various states of the slot machine 310, and a setting key insertion hole 319c that is operated to change the setting state of the slot machine 310 within the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6."

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

Figure 83 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 316L, center reel 316M, and right reel 316R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. Additionally, numbers ranging from "0" to "19" are assigned to correspond to each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R; however, these numbers are used by the main control device 340 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are eight types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Watermelon" (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Cherry" (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Replay" (e.g., the 16th symbol on the left reel 316L), "BAR" (e.g., the 15th symbol on the left reel 316L), "LUCKY" (e.g., the 13th symbol on the left reel 316L), "Red 7" (e.g., the 12th symbol on the left reel 316L), and "White 7" (e.g., the 10th symbol on the left reel 316L). As shown in FIG. 83, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

Figure 84 is a front view of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. Each display window 315L, 315M, and 315R is formed so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel 316L, 316M, and 316R are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 315L, 315M, and 315R.

In this slot machine 310, a single main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols on the left reel 316L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 316M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 316R. When the specified number of medals have been bet, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R begin to spin, and if a winning combination is achieved on the main line ML, the player is awarded one of the following benefits: a medal payout, a replay, or a change in game state.

In other words, in this slot machine 310, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a win can be achieved. Furthermore, this main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a winning combination of symbols is formed on a line extending in a straight line, such as subline SUL1 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 316L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 316M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 316R; subline SUL2 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 316L, the top symbol on the middle reel 316M, and the top symbol on the right reel 316R; subline SUL3 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 316L, the bottom symbol on the middle reel 316M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 316R; and subline SUL4 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 316L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 316M, and the top symbol on the right reel 316R, no winning combination will be formed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won, with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85 is an explanatory diagram that explains the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won.

The minor winning combinations that result in medal payouts include the first supplementary winning combination, the second supplementary winning combination, the third supplementary winning combination, the bell winning combination, the first watermelon winning combination, the second watermelon winning combination, and the cherry winning combination. Specifically, a first supplementary winning combination occurs when the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is either a "BAR" or a "White 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "Bell" symbol. A second supplementary winning combination occurs when the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is either a "Watermelon" or a "LUCKY" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "Bell" symbol. Additionally, if the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "bell" symbol, a third supplementary win will occur. If any of the first to third supplementary wins occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "1".

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L along the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "bell" symbol, a bell win will occur. When a bell win occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "9".

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L along the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon win will occur. When the first watermelon win occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "7".

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L along the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "BAR" symbol, a second watermelon win will occur. If a second watermelon win occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "7".

If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, a cherry win will occur regardless of the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M or the right reel 316R. If a cherry win occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "2".

Winnings that grant a replay bonus, which allows you to play the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals), include the regular replay win, the 1st RT replay win, the 2nd RT replay win, the 1st fall replay win, and the 2nd fall replay win. In more detail, a regular replay win occurs when the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol. A 1st RT replay win occurs when the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol, a second RT replay win will be awarded. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "replay" symbol, a first fall replay win will be awarded. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "watermelon" symbol, a second fall replay win will be awarded.

If any of the above replay wins occur, you will be able to play the next game without having to bet on either medals or virtual medals. Specifically, if any of the replay wins occur in a game in which you have bet three medals, you will be able to start the next game with three medals bet, without having to bet on either medals or virtual medals.

Furthermore, of the various replay wins mentioned above, the first RT replay win, second RT replay win, first fall replay win, and second fall replay win not only trigger the awarding of replay win benefits, but also trigger a transition in the game state. In this slot machine 310, multiple game states are set so that the types of roles to be drawn in the role lottery process and the winning probability of each role differ, and transitions between these game states occur when a replay win, which triggers a transition in the game state, is achieved.

State transition wins that only result in a transition in the game state include the 1st BB win and the 2nd BB win. In more detail, if the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "red 7" symbol, a 1st BB win is achieved. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the center reel 316M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "white 7" symbol, a 2nd BB win is achieved. When the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to BB state.

The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of gaming media awarded per unit game is higher than in the normal mode, non-AT state (also referred to as the normal gaming state), described below. Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of gaming media awarded per unit game is higher than in any other gaming state. Specifically, a winning combination that enables a bell win occurs with a higher probability (e.g., approximately 1/1.1) than in other gaming states. If such a winning combination is achieved, the bell win occurs regardless of the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R or the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 322-324 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. The BB state continues over multiple games and ends when an ending condition is met based on the occurrence of an event corresponding to the game's execution. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 310, the termination condition is set to be that the total number of gaming media awarded since the BB state began is equal to or greater than the termination reference number (for example, "350").

Next, we will explain the devices used to perform various notifications and effects.

As shown in FIG. 80, an upper lamp 332 and a speaker 333 are provided at the top of the front door 312, as well as an image display device 334. If an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. The upper lamp 332 is also controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is produced. The speakers 333 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality if an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. The speakers 333 are also controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is produced.

Image display device 334 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device with a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display. If an abnormality occurs in slot machine 310, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. In addition, image display device 334 is controlled so that images corresponding to the winning combination results in the internal lottery and the winning results of each game are displayed on the display surface.

The game panel 314 on the front door 312 is provided below the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R with a credit display unit 335 that displays the number of stored virtual medals, and an award number display unit 336 that displays the number of game media awarded when a small win is achieved. These displays 335 and 336 are made up of seven-segment displays, and each segment uses a single-color LED that emits light in a color such as green.

The slot machine 310 is equipped with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a main control device 340 is provided above the reel unit 316. The main control device 340 is attached to the back plate 311b that forms the back portion of the housing 311. The main control device 340 is configured by housing a main control board 341 in a board box 345.

An MPU 342 is mounted on one of the surfaces of the main control board 341, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 345 is formed to be transparent so that the MPU 342 housed within the board box 345 can be seen from outside the board box 345. Although the board box 345 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 342 housed within the board box 345 can be seen from outside the board box 345. The main control unit 340 is mounted on the back surface of the back panel 311b of the housing 311, with the opposing wall portion 345a of the board box 345 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 facing the front of the slot machine 310. Therefore, by opening the front door 312 toward the front of the slot machine 310 relative to the cabinet 311 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 311, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 345a of the board box 345, and also to visually observe the MPU 342 through the opposing wall portion 345a.

The board box 345 is formed by combining multiple case bodies, one behind the other. These multiple case bodies are provided with connecting portions 345b that prevent the case bodies from separating and leave a mark when the case bodies are separated. Multiple connecting portions 345b are arranged side by side along one side of the roughly rectangular board box 345. This allows for the case bodies to be separated again by subsequently connecting another connecting portion 345b, even if some connecting portions 345b are used to prevent separation of the case bodies and the case bodies are separated by destroying those connecting portions 345b. Furthermore, because the connecting portions 345b are destroyed when the case bodies are separated, leaving a mark, it is possible to visually check the connecting portions 345b to determine whether the case bodies have been separated fraudulently. Furthermore, a seal 345c is affixed to another side of the board box 345, other than the side along which the connecting portions 345b are arranged, spanning the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing sticker 345c is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace if the sealing sticker 345c is peeled off when the case body is separated.

In the main control device 340 configured as described above, the main control board 341 is provided with multiple alarm display devices 346-348. Specifically, a first alarm display device 346, a second alarm display device 347, and a third alarm display device 348 are provided. The first to third alarm display devices 346-348 are all segment displays with an arrangement of seven LED display segments, but are not limited to this and may be a single light-emitting element of a multi-color type, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third alarm display devices 346-348 are all installed so that their display surfaces face in the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 341. This makes it possible to visually observe the display surfaces of the first to third alarm display devices 346-348 housed within the board box 345 from outside the board box 345. Furthermore, as already explained, the main control device 340 is mounted on the back panel 311b of the cabinet 311 so that the opposing wall 345a, which faces the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 in the board box 345, faces the front of the slot machine 310. Therefore, when the front door 312 is opened toward the front of the cabinet 311 and the internal space of the cabinet 311 is exposed to the front of the slot machine 310, the first to third notification display devices 346-348 can be seen through the opposing wall 345a. These first to third notification display devices 346-348 are used to notify the results of game history management. This will be explained in more detail later.

Visual confirmation of the main control unit 340 is performed by opening the front door 312 toward the front of the slot machine 310 relative to the cabinet 311. To improve the visibility of the main control unit 340 when the front door 312 is opened, lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided on the cabinet 311. The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided in pairs on the left and right sides of the cabinet 311, one on the back of the left panel 311c and one on the back of the right panel 311d. The lighting devices 349a and 349b are equipped with high-brightness LEDs as light emitters and are installed so that the light is directed toward the main control unit 340. The light illumination range IR of the lighting devices 349a and 349b includes the area facing the MPU 342 on the opposing wall 345a of the main control unit 340. This improves the visibility of the MPU 342. The illumination range IR also includes the area of the opposing wall 345a of the main control device 340 that faces the first to third alarm display devices 346-348. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third alarm display devices 346-348. The illumination range IR also includes the area of the base box 345 of the main control device 340 where the connecting portion 345b is provided and the area where the sealing sticker 345c is provided. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the connecting portion 345b and the sealing sticker 345c.

Light is emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b in accordance with the opening angle of the front door 312 relative to the housing 311, as will be described in detail below. To detect the opening angle of the front door 312, an opening angle sensor 312e is provided on the back surface of the front door 312, adjacent to the pivot 312a, as shown in FIG. 81 . The opening angle sensor 312e can detect whether the front door 312 is closed relative to the housing 311, and can also detect whether the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle when the front door 312 is open. The opening angle sensor 312e can detect the opening angle of the front door 312 in any manner. For example, a configuration with separate detectors is conceivable, including one that is pressed when the front door 312 is closed and releases the pressed state when the front door 312 is open, and one that is pressed when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle and remains pressed until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the predetermined opening angle.

In addition to the main control device 340, the slot machine 310 is also provided with a performance control device 350, as shown in Figure 81. The performance control device 350 is placed on the front door 312, stacked behind the image display device 334. The performance control device 350 controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 based on commands received from the main control device 340. Like the main control device 340, the performance control device 350 is configured by housing a control board in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of this slot machine 310 will be explained based on the block diagram in Figure 86.

The main control device 340 is equipped with a main control board 341 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 341 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 contains a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, etc. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 343 and RAM 344 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 342; they may each be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 342 is equipped with the reel unit 316, a start detection sensor 321a that detects the operation of the start lever 321, stop detection sensors 322a, 323a, 324a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 322, 323, 324, an inserted medal detection sensor 325a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 325, and credit insertion detection sensors 327a, 328a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 327, 328, 329. , 329a, a settlement detection sensor 331a that detects the operation of the settlement button 331, a dispensing detection sensor for the hopper device 318, a sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 319b provided on the power supply device 319, a sensor that detects the insertion of a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 319c provided on the power supply device 319, and an opening angle sensor 312e that detects the opening angle of the front door 312 are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 342.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 342 are the reel unit 316, the selector drive unit 317a provided on the selector 317, the payout motor of the hopper device 318, the first to third notification display devices 346-348, the lighting devices 349a and 349b, and the performance control device 350. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R of the reel unit 316 is performed by the MPU 342. As already explained, the selector 317 has the function of guiding medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 325 to the hopper device 318 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 325a if acceptance is permitted, or discharging them into the medal tray 312d without detection by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a if acceptance is prohibited. The selector driver 317a has the function of switching the state of the selector 317 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state; specifically, it operates a path switching piece provided on the selector 317 between an acceptance permission position and an acceptance prohibition position. The MPU 342 switches the state of the selector 317 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and stop state of the drive signal to the selector driver 317a.

The MPU 342 also controls the operation of the hopper device 318 when a small win is achieved and medals are paid out. When the supply of operating power to the MPU 342 begins, the MPU 342 starts displaying information on the first to third notification display devices 346-348 to notify the results of game history management, and updates the display content each time the game history management results are updated. The MPU 342 also controls the light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. The MPU 342 also sends commands to the presentation control device 350 at each timing of each game, and sends commands to the presentation control device 350 to notify the image display device 334 of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

A power outage monitoring circuit (not shown) provided in the power supply 319 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. The power supply 319 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power outage monitoring circuit that supply drive power to the main control unit 340 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 310. The power outage monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 342 if the voltage drops below a reference voltage. The MPU 342 executes power outage processing upon receiving the power outage signal and enables the system to return to the processing state before the power outage after power is restored. The power supply 319 also has a power outage power supply unit that supplies backup power to the RAM 344 as power during power outage when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted, data is stored and maintained in the RAM 344 as long as the power outage power supply unit can supply backup power (e.g., for one or two days). However, by turning on the power to the slot machine 310 while pressing the reset button 319b on the power supply device 319, the data stored in the RAM 344 will be initialized.

The performance control device 350 is equipped with a performance control board 351 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 351 is equipped with an MPU 352. The MPU 352 contains a ROM 353 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 352, and a RAM 354 that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 353 are executed. It also contains a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, and other circuits. It is not essential that the ROM 353 and RAM 354 be integrated into a single chip for the MPU 352; they may each be integrated into a separate chip. Although backup power is not supplied to the RAM 354 from the power supply unit of the power supply device when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, backup power may be supplied to the RAM 354.

The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 342 of the main control device 340 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352, and various commands are received from the MPU 342. The upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 are connected to the output side of the MPU 352. Based on commands received from the MPU 342 of the main control device 340, the MPU 352 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 332, the sound output of the speaker 333, and the display of the image display device 334, thereby enabling various notifications and performances to be performed.

For the sake of convenience, in the following explanation, the MPU 342, ROM 343, and RAM 344 of the main control device 340 will be referred to as the main MPU 342, main ROM 343, and main RAM 344, respectively, and the MPU 352, ROM 353, and RAM 354 of the performance control device 350 will be referred to as the performance MPU 352, performance ROM 353, and performance RAM 354, respectively.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the main MPU 342. Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 342.

The main processing begins with an initialization process (step S4401). This process allows timer interrupts and performs various initial settings for registers and I/O devices within the main MPU 342. After the initialization process is complete, a display start process is performed (step S4402). This process starts display on the first to third notification display devices 346-348. In this case, if the main RAM 344 stores information on the results of game history management immediately prior to the previous power outage, the first to third notification display devices 346-348 are controlled to display information corresponding to that information. On the other hand, if the main RAM 344 does not store information on the results of game history management immediately prior to the previous power outage, or if the information does not contain valid information, the first to third notification display devices 346-348 are controlled to display a predetermined initial display (e.g., all lights on).

Then, it is determined whether the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and the power has been turned on (step S4403). If the power has been turned on with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), and the reset button 319b has not been pressed ON when the power was turned on (step S4404: NO), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 319b has been pressed ON when the power was turned on (step S4404: YES), the clear process (step S4405) is executed, and then the winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406).

The clearing process initializes all areas in the main RAM 344. In this case, each area of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0," including the area storing the setting values of the slot machine 310, the area storing data indicating whether the slot machine is in the BB state, the area storing data indicating the total number of gaming media awarded in the BB state, the area storing data indicating whether the slot machine is in the AT state, the area storing data for specifying the conditions for terminating the AT state, data indicating the type of lottery mode described below, the area storing information on the results of game history management, the total number of games played counter 344a, and the advantageous number of games played counter 344b. As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the normal game state is restored regardless of the state before the power was cut off, and if the state before the power was cut off was one in which game progress was restricted due to the occurrence of an abnormality, that abnormal state is released.

During the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read, provided that the setting key is inserted and turned ON, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 335 provided on the gaming panel 314. If the clearing process (step S4405) of the main RAM 344 has been executed, the credit display unit 335 displays "Setting 1" when the winning probability setting process begins. If the clearing process (step S4405) has not been executed, the credit display unit 335 displays the setting value in the state before the power was shut off. During the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 319b is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 335. If the reset button 319b is operated when the setting value is "Setting 6," the setting value is updated to "Setting 1." The winning probability setting process ends when the setting key is released after the start lever 321 has been operated. In this case, the display of the setting value on the credit display unit 335 ends. After the winning probability setting process is executed, the process moves to normal processing (step S4407). The normal processing will be explained in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned ON during the main processing (step S4403: NO), the power restoration process from step S4408 onward is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 310 to the state before the power was shut off. In the power restoration process, the main RAM 344 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 310 is normal (step S4408). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "Setting 1" through "Setting 6," it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or greater, it is determined to be abnormal. If the setting value is normal, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S4409). The power outage flag is stored in the main RAM 344, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is stopped and the predetermined power outage processing is executed normally, the power outage flag is set to "1." If the power outage flag is set to "1," it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 344 is checked to see if it is normal.

If all steps S4408 to S4410 return a positive judgment, this means that the power outage processing was executed normally during the previous power outage. In this case, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 344 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 342, and the data saved in the main RAM 344 is restored to the register of the main MPU 342, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 342 to the state before the power was interrupted (step S4411). In addition, the power outage flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4412). After that, a power recovery command is sent to the production MPU 352 to acknowledge the execution of the power recovery processing (step S4413), and the address before the power was interrupted is returned to (step S4414).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (Figure 88) is prohibited (step S4415), all output ports of the main MPU 342 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to those output ports (step S4416), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or other person that an error has occurred (step S4417). This then becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing the clear process (step S4405).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 88. Note that the timer interrupt processing is initiated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register save process (step S4501), the values of all registers in the main MPU 342 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the main RAM 344. In step S4502, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S4503, where power outage processing is executed.

The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal is input to the main MPU 342 from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply unit 319. The power outage processing first determines whether command transmission has finished. If transmission has not finished, this processing ends and the process returns to timer interrupt processing, terminating command transmission. If command transmission has finished, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 342 is saved in the main RAM 344. The output status of the output port of the main MPU 342 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power outage is resolved, a judgment value is calculated to determine whether the data in the main RAM 344 is normal and saved in the main RAM 344, and further RAM access is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S4502, various processes from step S4504 onwards are carried out. In step S4504, a watchdog timer clear process is carried out to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which is used to monitor for malfunctions. In step S4505, an interrupt end declaration process is carried out, which enables the main MPU 342 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S4506, a stepping motor control process is carried out to drive the stepping motors provided on each of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R in order to spin these reels. In step S4507, a sensor monitoring process is carried out to read the status of various sensors connected to the input ports and monitor whether the read results are normal.

In step S4508, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract values from each counter and timer. In step S4509, counter processing is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S4510, command output processing is performed to send various commands to the presentation side MPU 352. In step S4511, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S4512, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 344 in the previous step S4501 are restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 342. In step S4513, management processing is performed to manage the game history and to display displays corresponding to the management results on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. In step S4514, lighting processing is performed to control the light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b depending on the opening angle of the front door 312. Then, in step S4515, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated. Details of the management process in step S4513 and the lighting process in step S4514 will be explained later.

Figure 89 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU 342.

Normal processing begins with a wait-to-start process (step S4601). During the wait-to-start process, if any replay wins occurred in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is performed to ensure that the same number of gaming media as the number of bets in the previous game has been bet. Furthermore, during the wait-to-start process, if a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a, and the current number of bets is less than or equal to the maximum specified number of "3," the number of bets is incremented by 1; if the number of bets is greater than or equal to the maximum specified number of "3," the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1. The credit counter is a counter used by the main MPU 342 to determine the number of virtual medals stored and stored.

During the start waiting process, if the automatic insertion process is not being executed and any of the credit insertion buttons 327-329 is operated, a credit insertion process is executed to set the bet number corresponding to that operation. In the credit insertion process, if the first credit insertion button 327 is operated, the maximum number of gaming media that can be bet at that time is bet, and if the second credit insertion button 328 or third credit insertion button 329 is operated, the corresponding bet state is set. In this case, if virtual medals are used for the bet, a value equivalent to the number of virtual medals bet is subtracted from the credit counter. Furthermore, if the number of virtual medals required to set the bet number corresponding to the operated credit insertion button 327-329 is not stored and stored, the maximum number of gaming media that can be bet in relation to the stored and stored virtual medals is bet.

During the start waiting process, if the number of bets is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the accumulated number (specifically, "50"), an acceptance prohibition process is executed. During the acceptance prohibition process, the output of a drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a is stopped, setting the selector 317 to an acceptance prohibition state. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal will be ejected into the medal tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. On the other hand, if the number of bets is less than the maximum specified number or the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit of the accumulated number, an acceptance permission process is executed. During the acceptance permission process, the output of a drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a is started, setting the selector 317 to an acceptance permission state. As a result, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 325 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a and then collected by the hopper device 318. During the start waiting process, if the settlement button 331 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not being executed, the hopper device 318 is controlled and driven so that medals corresponding to the total number of bets and the credit counter value are discharged through the medal discharge port 312c to the medal tray 312d. As a result, the gaming media stored internally are paid out to the player as actual medals.

After executing the start waiting process, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached the specified number ("3" in this embodiment) (step S4602), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 321 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 321 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). On the other hand, if the start lever 321 has been operated, the main line ML is activated and then the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S4604). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal will be ejected into the medal tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. Thereafter, a lottery process is executed to determine the winning combination for this game (step S4605), and a reel control process is executed (step S4606) to drive and control each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R in a manner corresponding to the results of this lottery process (step S4605).

Then, the medal payout process is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, the process is executed to award the player with the number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small win. Specifically, if virtual medals are to be awarded, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit of the number of medals that can be stored, the hopper device is controlled and driven so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of medals that can be stored is paid out to the medal tray 312d.

After that, a response process is executed at the end of the game to enable the setting of the game state corresponding to the result of this game (step S4608). Then, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S4609). As a result, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 325 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a and then collected by the hopper device.

The lottery processing executed in step S4605 of the normal processing (Figure 83) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 90.

First, a random number to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved is obtained (step S4701). In this slot machine 310, when the start lever 321 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the main MPU 342 confirms the operation of the start lever 321, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the main RAM 344. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 321 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 310 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 321 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the winning combination has been achieved is read from the main ROM 343 (step S4702). The slot machine 310 has six pre-prepared winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 319c, turning it ON, and performing a specified operation, the player can select which winning probability the lottery process will be based on. Note that "Setting n+1" offers a more favorable winning probability than "Setting n." Even with the same setting value, the main MPU 342 has three lottery modes with different lottery tables: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In addition to these lottery modes, a BB state also exists as a game state. In step S4702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value and the current game state is selected.

Using "Setting 3" as an example, we will explain the lottery tables corresponding to normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. First, we will explain the normal mode lottery table selected in normal mode. Figure 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. Note that the following explanation will refer to the explanatory diagram in Figure 92 as appropriate.

As shown in Figure 91, the normal mode lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is associated with a winning role and a point value PV. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery role in relation to the maximum value of the free run counter (65535).

Specifically, index value IV=1 is set with bell winning data and first supplementary winning data. When a win occurs with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 92, if the first stop (the reel on which the stop command was first issued) is the left reel 316L, a bell winning will occur regardless of the type of reel that is the second and third stop target or the operation timing of each stop button 322-324; otherwise, a first supplementary winning will occur.

In this slot machine 310, reel control is performed on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R, allowing it to slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 322-324 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed on each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R, causing it to stop within the specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 322-324 are operated. This type of reel control makes it easier to achieve a winning combination corresponding to a winning role, while also preventing winning combinations corresponding to non-winning roles from being achieved. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R that can be slid is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the constituent symbols that make up the combination of symbols to form a winning combination on one reel 316L, 316M, 316R, it is possible that the constituent symbols will not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 322 to 324 (this phenomenon is also known as a ``missed win''). The first to third supplementary wins, bell wins, and various replay wins are win modes that will not result in a missed win if reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first watermelon win, second watermelon win, cherry win, first BB win, and second BB win are win modes that may result in a missed win depending on the timing of the stop operation of stop buttons 322-324 relative to the rotational position of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

As shown in Figure 91, index value IV = 2 is set with bell winning data and second supplementary winning data. When a win occurs with index value IV = 2, as shown in Figure 92, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, a bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the type of reel that is the second and third stop target or the operation timing of each stop button 322-324; in all other cases, a second supplementary winning is guaranteed to occur.

As shown in Figure 91, index value IV = 3 is set with bell winning data and third supplementary winning data. When a win occurs with index value IV = 3, as shown in Figure 92, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, a bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the type of reel that is the second and third stop target or the operation timing of each stop button 322-324; in all other cases, a third supplementary winning is guaranteed to occur.

As shown in Figure 91, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV = 4. If a win occurs with index value IV = 4, as shown in Figure 92, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, the first watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in Figure 91, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV = 5. If a win occurs with index value IV = 5, as shown in Figure 92, the second watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, the second watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in Figure 91, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV = 6. If a win occurs with index value IV = 6, a cherry winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R, as shown in Figure 92. However, depending on the timing of operation of the left stop button 322 relative to the rotation position of left reel 316L, a cherry winning may not occur.

As shown in FIG. 91, first BB winning data is set for index value IV=7. If a win occurs with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 92, a first BB win can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, there is a possibility that a first BB win will not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 91, second BB winning data is set for index value IV=8. If a win occurs with index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 92, a second BB win can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, there is a possibility that a second BB win will not be achieved.

Here, winning data other than the first BB winning data and second BB winning data is erased in the game in which a win occurs, regardless of whether a win is achieved, and is not carried over to games following the winning game. In contrast, the first BB winning data and second BB winning data are stored and held until the corresponding BB win is achieved, even in games following the winning game, except when the main RAM 344 is cleared. In this case, in games in which the first BB winning data or second BB winning data is carried over, the index values IV corresponding to the first BB winning data and second BB winning data are excluded from the lottery. This makes it possible to prevent new BB winning data from being stored even when the first BB winning data or second BB winning data is already stored and held, and to prevent multiple BB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

Regular replay winning data and 1st RT replay winning data are set for index values IV = 9 to 12, as shown in Figure 91. In this case, if a win occurs with index value IV = 9, as shown in Figure 92, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command was issued) is the left reel 316L, and the third stop (the reel on which the last stop command was issued) is the right reel 316R, a 1st RT replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322 to 324; in all other cases, a regular replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 10, and the first stop is on the center reel 316M, the second stop is on the right reel 316R, and the third stop is on the left reel 316L, then the first RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 11, and the first stop is on the right reel 316R, the second stop is on the left reel 316L, and the third stop is on the center reel 316M, then the first RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in all other cases, the regular replay win is surely achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Additionally, if a win occurs with index value IV = 12, and the first stop is on the right reel 316R, the second stop is on the center reel 316M, and the third stop is on the left reel 316L, then the first RT replay win will be achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324; in all other cases, a regular replay win will be achieved regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324.

When the normal mode lottery table in FIG. 91 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when index value IV = 2, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 3 are each approximately 1/5.0; the probability of winning when index value IV = 4 is approximately 1/131; the probability of winning when index value IV = 5 is approximately 1/187; the probability of winning when index value IV = 6 is approximately 1/423; the probability of winning when index value IV = 7 and the probability of winning when index value IV = 8 are each approximately 1/218; and the probability of winning when index value IV = 9, the probability of winning when index value IV = 10, the probability of winning when index value IV = 11, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 12 are each approximately 1/28.0.

As already explained, in the normal mode lottery table, in addition to normal replay winning data, first RT replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 9 to 12 (see Figure 91). The probability of winning for any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1/7.0. If a win occurs for any of index values IV = 9 to 12, and the stop order of the first, second, and third stops on reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponds to the winning combination, a first RT replay win is achieved, and the lottery mode transitions from normal mode to first RT mode. When the lottery mode transitions to first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (Figure 90) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the first RT mode that is selected when "Setting 3" is selected and the first RT mode is selected. Figures 93 and 94 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 93, the winning role data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probabilities for each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 91). In this case, roles that enable the award of game media are set for index values IV = 1 to 6, and because the winning role data and winning probabilities set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are the same, the types of roles that enable the award of game media and the winning probabilities for those roles are the same in both normal mode and first RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set for index values IV = 7 to 8, just like in the lottery table for normal mode, and the winning probabilities are the same as those in the lottery table for normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning any of the BB roles is the same in both normal mode and first RT mode.

The winning combination data set for index values IV = 9 and above differs from that in normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 93, in addition to normal replay winning data, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 9 to 12. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1/10.1. When a winning combination occurs with index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 94, if the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, a second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In all other cases, a normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 10, and the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, then the second RT replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in all other cases, a regular replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 11, and the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the center reel 316M, then the second RT replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in all other cases, a regular replay win is sure to occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 12, and the first stop occurs on the right reel 316R, the second stop occurs on the center reel 316M, and the third stop occurs on the left reel 316L, a second RT replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322-324. In all other cases, a regular replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322-324. In the first RT mode, if a win occurs with index value IV = 9-12 and the first, second, and third stops on reels 316L, 316M, and 316R occur in the order corresponding to the winning combination, a second RT replay win is achieved and the lottery mode transitions from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When the lottery mode transitions to the second RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in Figure 93, the lottery table for the first RT mode includes, in addition to regular replay winning data, first fall replay winning data as winning data for index values IV = 13 to 18. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13 to 18 is approximately 1 in 10.9.

When a win is made with index value IV = 13 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 94, if the first stop is on the left reel 316L, the second stop is on the center reel 316M, and the third stop is on the right reel 316R, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324. In all other cases, a first fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324. Also, when a win is made with index value IV = 14, if the first stop is on the left reel 316L, the second stop is on the right reel 316R, and the third stop is on the center reel 316M, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324. In all other cases, a first fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 15, and the first stop is on the center reel 316M, the second stop is on the left reel 316L, and the third stop is on the right reel 316R, a normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322 to 324, and in all other cases, a first fall replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 16, and the first stop is on the center reel 316M, the second stop is on the right reel 316R, and the third stop is on the left reel 316L, a normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322 to 324, and in all other cases, a first fall replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a winning combination occurs with an index value IV = 17, and the first stop is on the right reel 316R, the second stop is on the left reel 316L, and the third stop is on the center reel 316M, a normal replay winning combination will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324; otherwise, a first fall replay winning combination will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a winning combination occurs with an index value IV = 18, and the first stop is on the right reel 316R, the second stop is on the center reel 316M, and the third stop is on the left reel 316L, a normal replay winning combination will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324; otherwise, a first fall replay winning combination will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. If a first fall replay winning combination occurs, the lottery mode transitions to the normal mode. When switching to normal mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (Figure 90) will be the normal mode lottery table.

Only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=19 in the lottery table for the first RT mode. The probability of winning at index value IV=19 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically, approximately 1 in 6.7. If a win occurs at index value IV=19, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R or the timing of the stopping operation of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, combinations that make it possible to achieve a replay win are set for index values IV = 9 to 19. Because the winning probabilities for these combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of combinations that make it possible to achieve a replay win in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/2.9. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/7.0. In other words, the first RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than normal mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when "Setting 3" is selected and the second RT mode is selected. Figures 95 and 96 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 95, the winning combination data set for each index value IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probabilities for each index value IV are the same as those in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 91) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93). In this case, combinations that enable the award of gaming media are set for index values IV = 1 to 6, and because the winning combination data and winning probabilities set for each index value IV = 1 to 6 are the same, the types of combinations that enable the award of gaming media and the winning probabilities for those combinations are the same in normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set for index values IV = 7 to 8, just like in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, and the winning probabilities are the same as those in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning any of the BB combinations is the same in normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV = 9 and above differs from that in normal mode and first RT mode. In particular, in the lottery table for second RT mode, as shown in Figure 95, in addition to normal replay winning data, second fall replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 9 to 14. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is approximately 1 in 5.5.

When a win is made with index value IV = 9 in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 96, if the first stop is on the left reel 316L, the second stop is on the center reel 316M, and the third stop is on the right reel 316R, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324; in all other cases, a second fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324. Furthermore, when a win is made with index value IV = 10, if the first stop is on the left reel 316L, the second stop is on the right reel 316R, and the third stop is on the center reel 316M, a normal replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324; in all other cases, a second fall replay win is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 322-324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 11, and the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, then a normal replay win will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in all other cases, a second fall replay win will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Furthermore, if a win occurs with index value IV = 12, and the first stop is the center reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, then a normal replay win will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in all other cases, a second fall replay win will occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Furthermore, when a winning combination occurs with an index value IV = 13, if the first stop is on the right reel 316R, the second stop is on the left reel 316L, and the third stop is on the center reel 316M, a normal replay winning combination is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In all other cases, a second fall replay winning combination is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Furthermore, when a winning combination occurs with an index value IV = 14, if the first stop is on the right reel 316R, the second stop is on the center reel 316M, and the third stop is on the left reel 316L, a normal replay winning combination is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In all other cases, a second fall replay winning combination is guaranteed to occur regardless of the timing of operation of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When a second fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode. When transitioning to the first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (Figure 90) will be the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=15 in the lottery table for the second RT mode. The probability of winning at index value IV=15 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically, approximately 1 in 6.3. If a win occurs at index value IV=15, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R or the timing of the stopping operation of each reel 316L, 316M, and 316R.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, roles that allow for the realization of a replay win are set for index values IV = 9 to 15. Because the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of a role that allows for the realization of a replay win in the second RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/2.9. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/7.0. In other words, the second RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is approximately 1/2.9. In other words, the replay probability in the second RT mode is the same as that in the first RT mode. However, this is not limited to a configuration in which the replay probability in the first RT mode is the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode; for example, the replay probability may be slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode but may be roughly the same, or the replay probability may be higher in the second RT mode than in the first RT mode, or the replay probability may be higher in the first RT mode than in the second RT mode.

The lottery table for normal mode, the lottery table for first RT mode, and the lottery table for second RT mode are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of "Setting 1" through "Setting 6." The higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the BB role. However, the replay probability set for each lottery mode is the same or approximately the same regardless of the setting value. Furthermore, if a player has already won any of the BB roles, the first BB role and the second BB role are excluded from the lottery, regardless of whether the mode is normal mode, first RT mode, or second RT mode, to prevent a player from winning the BB role twice. In addition to the lottery table for normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, the main ROM 343 also stores a BB lottery table that is referenced in the lottery process (Figure 90) when the player is in the BB state. In the BB lottery table, only three types of roles are set as the roles to be selected: Bell, First Watermelon, and Second Watermelon. The probability of winning a Bell role is set to approximately 1/1.1, the probability of winning a First Watermelon role is set to approximately 1/100, and the probability of winning a Second Watermelon role is set to approximately 1/100. As a result, the expected number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games in BB state is higher than in other gaming states.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (Figure 90), after selecting a lottery table (step S4702), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S4703), and a judgment value DV used when determining whether a role has been won or lost is set (step S4704). In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the first judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S4701 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV of "1" is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, a win/loss determination is made for the role corresponding to the index value IV (step S4705). In determining whether the role is a win/loss determination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535", a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning role data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 344 (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all of the winning data set for the current index value IV in the referenced lottery table is set in the main RAM 344. If the winning data is winning data other than BB winning data, the set state of the winning data is cleared to "0" after the end of the current game regardless of whether a win corresponding to the winning data is achieved or not. If the winning data is BB winning data, it is cleared to "0" if a win is achieved.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S4705: NO), this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been achieved. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S4707), and a determination is made as to whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether or not there is a target for which a win/loss determination must be made (step S4708). Specifically, a determination is made as to whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss determination must be made, the process returns to step S4704, and the determination of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S4704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to determine the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S4705, the win/loss of the hand is determined based on this judgment value DV.

When the processing of step S4706 is executed, or when a negative judgment is made in step S4708, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing combination has been completed. In this case, after the stop information setting process is executed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S4709), a game start command is set as a target for transmission to the production side MPU 352 (step S4710). The game start command is a command that causes the production side MPU 352 to recognize that a new game has started, and this game start command contains information indicating whether the current game state is the normal game state, BB state, or AT state, and information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (Figure 90) for this game.

When the production side MPU 352 receives a game start command, it determines the general content of the production for this game based on the content of the game start command, and determines the details of the production by lottery in a manner that corresponds to the general content of the production that it has determined. It then reads a data table corresponding to the determined content of the production from the production side ROM 353 to the production side RAM 354, and controls the light emission of the upper lamp 332, the sound output of the speaker 333, and the display of the image display device 334 in accordance with the read data table.

Next, we will explain the reel control processing executed in step S4606 of the normal processing (Figure 89).

The reel control process starts the rotation of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R if they have not yet started spinning. In this case, the drive of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is controlled so that they rotate at a constant speed after a predetermined acceleration period. Note that operation of stop buttons 322-324 is disabled until the rotation reaches a constant speed.

In the reel control process, after each reel 316L, 316M, or 316R begins rotating at a constant speed, the stop button 322-324 corresponding to the rotating reel 316L, 316M, or 316R is operated, stopping the reel 316L, 316M, or 316R corresponding to the operated stop button 322-324. In this case, the number of slides required to actually stop the symbols is determined based on the stop control information corresponding to the results of the lottery process for the current game's winning combination (step S4605) and the symbols present in a predetermined position (e.g., the bottom row) on the reel 316L, 316M, or 316R targeted for the stop operation at the time the stop operation was performed. The reel 316L, 316M, or 316R targeted for the stop operation is then moved in the rotational direction by the determined number of slides, and the reel 316L, 316M, or 316R is then stopped. The number of slides is either "0," "1," "2," "3," or "4." The number of slides is set to maximize the possibility of stopping a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination on the main line ML while reliably preventing symbol combinations corresponding to non-winning combinations from stopping on the main line ML. Furthermore, for index values IV of 1 to 3 and IV of 9 and above, the winning combination changes depending on the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. Therefore, when such an index value IV is won, the stop control information is changed depending on the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. Furthermore, the reel control process determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on the main line ML when all reels 316L, 316M, and 316R have stopped. Settings are then made so that if any of the replay wins are achieved, a replay bonus is awarded, and if any of the wins corresponding to the awarding of gaming media are achieved, the number of gaming media corresponding to that win is awarded.

Next, the response process at the end of game play, which is executed in step S4608 of the normal processing (Figure 89), will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 97.

In the response process at the end of game play, the value of the total game counter 344a (see FIG. 86) stored in the main RAM 344 is incremented by one (step S4801). The total game counter 344a is a counter for counting the number of games played, regardless of whether the game state is normal game state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. The AT state refers to a situation in which, when the stop buttons 322-324 stop in a predetermined correct order, a corresponding symbol combination is formed on the main line ML, resulting in a lottery winning combination that is more advantageous to the player than if the correct order had not been achieved. The correct stop order is announced when the winning combination is achieved. Such a lottery winning combination corresponding to the stop order can be achieved in both non-AT and AT states. However, because the correct stop order is not announced in non-AT states, whereas the correct stop order is announced in AT states, the AT state is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, when the index value IV of a winning combination that results in a winning combination according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is won for index values IV=1 to 3 and index value IV=9 or later, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for achieving a winning combination that is advantageous to the player is announced in the AT state, but is not announced in the non-AT state. Furthermore, when the lottery process for a winning combination (FIG. 90) is executed, a game start command corresponding to the lottery result is sent from the main MPU 342 to the presentation MPU 352, and the presentation MPU 352 controls the display of the image display device 334 based on the game start command, so that the announcement of the stop order is started before the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R become capable of stopping in the game corresponding to the execution of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 90). Additionally, the ART state is a gaming state in which the player is in the first RT mode or the second RT mode during the AT state. In the ART state, the probability of a replay winning increases, and as mentioned above, the expected number of gaming media awarded per game also increases. This makes it possible to make the ART state an advantageous gaming state.

In the response process at the end of game play, if any of the BB roles have been won or the game is in the BB state (step S4802: YES), BB processing is executed (step S4803). In the BB processing, if any of the BB roles have been won, a determination is made as to whether a BB win corresponding to the BB role has occurred in the current game. If a BB win has occurred, the BB state flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1," thereby transitioning the game state to the BB state. This allows the BB lottery table to be referenced in the role selection process (Figure 90) for subsequent games. Furthermore, by sending a command indicating the transition to the BB state to the presentation MPU 352, presentation for the BB state is initiated on the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334. Note that, when the game is transitioned to the BB state, the BB winning data is erased from the main RAM 344, thereby canceling the BB role winning state. Additionally, whether a first BB win or a second BB win occurs, the same BB state will result.

In the BB state, the BB processing determines whether game media have been awarded in the current game, and if game media have been awarded, adds the number of game media awarded in the current game to the total award counter stored in the main RAM 344. Then, it determines whether the value of the total award counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the termination reference number. If the value is less than the value corresponding to the termination reference number, the BB processing ends. If the value is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the termination reference number, the BB state flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0," thereby ending the BB state. Furthermore, a command indicating that the BB state has ended is sent to the presentation-side MPU 352, causing the image display device 334 to display an ending image, and then the BB state presentation on the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 ends.

When the BB state ends, the lottery mode will return to normal mode, regardless of the lottery mode that was in effect before the BB state began. Also, if the BB state begins in the AT state, the ART preparation state processing described below will be executed after the BB state ends, regardless of the state before the BB state began.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4802, or if the processing of step S4803 is executed, it is determined whether or not the AT state is in effect (step S4804). If the AT state is not in effect (step S4804: NO), RT mode transition processing (step S4805) and transition chance management processing (step S4806) are executed. Note that if a stop operation is first performed on the center reel 316M or right reel 316R in a game that is neither the BB state nor the AT state, a notification is issued indicating that a stop operation should be performed starting with the left reel 316L, but no penalty is imposed that limits the awarding of profits in subsequent games.

In the RT mode transition process (step S4805), if it is determined that a first RT replay win has occurred in the current game, the system transitions to the first RT mode, and if it is determined that a second RT replay win has occurred in the current game, the system transitions to the second RT mode. Also, in the RT mode transition process, if it is determined that a second fall replay win has occurred in the current game, the system transitions to the first RT mode, and if it is determined that a first fall replay win has occurred in the current game, the system transitions to the normal mode.

As shown in the flowchart of Figure 98, the transition chance management process (step S4806) determines whether a special role has been won in the role lottery process for the current game (Figure 90) (step S4901). A special role is any of index values IV = 4 to 6. If a special role has been won (step S4901: YES), it determines whether the advantageous regulation flag set in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4902). The advantageous regulation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 342 to identify a situation in which transition to the AT state (i.e., the ART state) is prohibited. The processing performed when the advantageous regulation flag is set to "1" will be explained later.

If the advantageous regulation flag is not set to "1" (step S4902: NO), the transition lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock bonus is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344. The stock bonus is a bonus that can be accumulated if the special combination is won in the combination lottery process (Figure 90) when the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" during normal gameplay. The stock bonus is set to six levels, from "0" to "5," and if there are no accumulated bonuses, the stock bonus is set to "0." In the transition lottery table corresponding to a stock bonus of "0," a win with an index value IV = 4 results in a 5% probability of winning an AT transition, a win with an index value IV = 5 results in a 10% probability of winning an AT transition, and a win with an index value IV = 6 results in a 15% probability of winning an AT transition. The contents of the transition lottery table referenced when the stock bonus is "1" to "5" will be explained later.

After the transition lottery table is read in step S4903, the AT transition lottery process is executed (step S4904). In this AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344, is read, and the value of the read transition lottery counter is compared with the transition lottery table.

If the AT transition lottery process results in a win for AT transition (step S4905: YES), the initial number of games lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock benefit is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344 (step S4906). In the initial number of games lottery table corresponding to a stock benefit of "0", the probability of 50 games being selected is 90%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 9%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 1%. The contents of the initial number of games lottery table referenced when the stock benefit is "1" to "5" will be explained later.

After the initial number of games lottery table is read in step S4906, an initial number of games lottery process is executed (step S4907). In this initial number of games lottery process, the value of the number of games lottery counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344, is read, and the value of the read number of games lottery counter is compared with the initial number of games lottery table. The initial number of games corresponding to the comparison result is then set in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4908).

Then, it is determined whether the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). If it is the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), there is no need to wait for promotion to the second RT mode in the AT state, so the transition chance management process is terminated. As a result, the gaming state becomes the ART state, which is the AT state and the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has started is sent to the presentation side MPU 352. Upon receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to produce a presentation indicating that the ART state has started, and then causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to produce a presentation corresponding to the ART state. Then, the value of the stock bonus counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4909). The stock bonus counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 342 to determine whether or not a stock bonus is available and the value of the stock bonus.

If the mode is not the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for promotion to the second RT mode as an ART preparation state, so the ART preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4911). The ART preparation state flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 342 to identify that the mode is the ART preparation state.

Returning to the explanation of the response process at the end of play (Figure 97), if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is 1 or greater, or if the ART preparation status flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S4804. In this case, on the condition that the ART preparation status flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4807: YES), ART preparation status processing is executed (step S4808).

The ART preparation state processing determines whether promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, and if promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0". This transitions the gaming state from the AT state to the ART state. A command indicating that the ART state has started is also sent to the presentation side MPU 352. Upon receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to produce a presentation indicating that the ART state has started, and then causes the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 to produce a presentation corresponding to the ART state.

When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or greater, the stop order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to enable a bell win is announced when a win occurs with an index value IV = 1 to 3, regardless of whether the ART preparation status flag is set to "1." Also, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or greater, the stop order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to enable a 1st RT replay win or a 2nd RT replay win is announced when a win occurs with an index value IV = 9 to 12 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 91) or the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 93), regardless of whether the ART preparation status flag is set to "1." Additionally, if the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or greater, regardless of whether the ART preparation status flag is set to "1," if a win occurs with index value IV = 13 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (Figure 93), the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to achieve a normal replay win will be announced.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). Figure 99 is a flowchart showing ART state processing.

First, the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b (see Figure 86) provided in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S5001). The advantageous game number counter 344b is a counter used to measure the number of games played from the time a transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0". The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0", even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0" after a transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games played across multiple ART states.

Then, the RT mode transition process is executed (step S5002). In the RT mode transition process, if it is determined that a first RT replay win has occurred, the system transitions to the first RT mode; if it is determined that a second RT replay win has occurred, the system transitions to the second RT mode; if it is determined that a first fall replay win has occurred, the system transitions to the normal mode; and if it is determined that a second fall replay win has occurred, the system transitions to the first RT mode.

Then, in the lottery process for the role in this game (Figure 90), it is determined whether or not a special role has been won (step S5003). A special role is any of index values IV = 4 to 6. If a special role has been won (step S5003: YES), a lottery process for adding the number of continued games is executed (step S5004). In the lottery process for adding the number of continued games, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continued games in the ART state, and if so, the number of added games. In the lottery process for adding the number of continued games, a lottery table for adding the number of continued games corresponding to each of index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343, and the value of a lottery counter for the number of games, which is updated periodically (for example, every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344, is read, and the value of the lottery counter is compared against the lottery table for adding the number of continued games. The lottery table for adding the number of continued games is set so that the probability of an addition occurring increases in the order of IV=4 → IV=5 → IV=6, and the expected number of added games to be won increases in that order. If an addition is won in the lottery process for adding the number of continued games (step S5005: YES), the number of added games selected in the lottery process for adding the number of games is added to the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 (step S5006).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5003, if a negative judgment is made in step S5005, or if the processing of step S5006 is executed, the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is decremented by 1 (step S5007). Then, if the value of the ART game number counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5008: YES), ART state termination processing is executed (step S5009). In this termination processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is sent to the presentation side MPU 352. Upon receiving this command, the presentation side MPU 352 controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after an effect indicating that the ART state has ended is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the response process at the end of a game (Figure 97), if the process of step S4806, step S4808, or step S4809 is executed, a game end command is sent to the presentation-side MPU 352 (step S4810). If the presentation-side MPU 352 receives the game end command, it controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that the presentation being executed in the current game ends. Then, it executes game management processing (step S4811).

Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the game management process.

During the game management process, if the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is not set to "1" (step S5101: NO), it is determined whether the value of the total game number counter 344a in the main RAM 344 is equal to or greater than "3000," which corresponds to the number of games that trigger management (step S5102). The number of games that trigger management is not limited to 3000 and may be, for example, 6000. Furthermore, the number of games that trigger management is not limited to being set less than the maximum number of games that can be played in a single business day at an amusement parlor; it may be set to approximately the maximum number of games, or may be set to more than the maximum number of games. If the value of the total game number counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of games that trigger management (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b in the main RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated (step S5103). In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game number counter 344b" / "value of total game number counter 344a".

Then, it is determined whether the value resulting from this calculation exceeds the regulated ratio (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether the value resulting from the calculation in step S5103 exceeds the regulated ratio of 0.7. In other words, when the total number of games played in all gaming states including the normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, and ART state reaches 3000, it is determined whether the total number of games played in the ART state or in the AT state after the ART state has started exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of 3000 games.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5104, a calculation process for the restricted number of games is executed (step S5105). In the calculation process for the restricted number of games, the restricted number of games for which transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited is calculated to ensure that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is below the regulated ratio. Specifically, the calculation is made as follows: Restricted number of games = "Value of advantageous game number counter 344b" - "Value of total game number counter 344a" x "Regulated ratio (i.e., "0.7")) + "Number of additional games (specifically, "100"). The calculated value of the restricted number of games is then set in the restricted game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5106). The restricted game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 342 to specify the number of games for which transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited. In addition, the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5107). This prohibits transition to the AT state and the ART state.

If the ART preparation state flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5108: YES), various clearing processes are performed by clearing the ART preparation state flag to "0" and clearing the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 to "0" (step S5109). As a result, if the advantage regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" during the ART preparation state, the ART preparation state ends without transitioning to the ART state. In this case, the AT state ends, and the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to achieve the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win is not executed, and the notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to prevent the first fall replay win or the second fall replay win is not executed. Then, the normal return process is executed (step S5110). In the normal return process, a normal return command is sent to the presentation-side MPU 352. When the presentation-side MPU 352 receives this normal return command, it executes an effect indicating that the ART preparation state has ended and the normal game state has been restored without transitioning to the ART state, and then controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that an effect corresponding to the normal game state is executed.

If the ART preparation status flag in the main RAM 344 is not set to "1" (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is 1 or greater (step S5111). If the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or greater (step S5111: YES), i.e., if the game is in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5112). As a result, if the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" in the ART state, the ART state will end even if there are still games remaining in the ART state. In this case, the AT state will end, and the notification of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to achieve the first RT replay winning or second RT replay winning will not be executed, and the notification of the stopping order of reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to prevent the first fall replay winning or second fall replay winning will not be executed.

Then, ART state termination processing is executed (step S5113). In this termination processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is sent to the presentation-side MPU 352, similar to step S5009 in the ART state processing (Figure 99). By receiving this command, the presentation-side MPU 352 controls the upper lamp 332, speaker 333, and image display device 334 so that an effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed after an effect indicating that the ART state has ended is executed. The effect executed in this case is the same as the effect executed when step S5009 in the ART state processing (Figure 99) is executed, i.e., when the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0". This makes it difficult for players to distinguish whether the ART state ends when the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" during the ART state, or when the number of remaining games to be played in the ART state reaches "0".

As shown in the explanatory diagram in FIG. 101(a), in the ART state, the image display device 334 displays the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R when a winning combination is achieved in the lottery process (FIG. 90) with index values IV = 1 to 3 or IV = 9 or higher. In FIG. 101(a), an image G1 indicating that the center reel 316M will stop first, an image G2 indicating that the left reel 316L will stop next, and an image G3 indicating that the right reel 316R will stop last are displayed. While an image displaying the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is displayed in this manner, the upper left corner of the image display device 334 displays a game count image G4 (specifically, an image reading "30 games in progress") indicating the number of games played since the start of the current ART state and before the value of the ART game count counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0." Additionally, a text image G5 asking "How long will this continue?" is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 334.

However, no image is displayed on the image display device 334 to notify the player of the remaining number of games to be played in the current ART state, i.e., the value set in the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344. Furthermore, no notification that allows the player to recognize the remaining number of games to be played in the current ART state is executed, including by the image display device 334. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the end of the ART state was due to the forced termination or because the remaining number of games to be played in the ART state had reached "0", even if the ART state is configured to be forcibly terminated if the value of the total game number counter 344a exceeds the value corresponding to the management trigger game number and the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a exceeds the regulated ratio, even if the ART state is in the middle of being terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game count management process (Figure 100), if the processing of step S5110 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S5111, or if the processing of step S5113 is executed, the value of the total game count counter 344a of the main RAM 344 and the value of the advantageous game count counter 344b of the main RAM 344 are each cleared to "0" (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S5102 or if a negative judgment is made in step S5104, the processing of step S5114 is not executed. As a result, on the condition that the value of the total game count counter 344a becomes the management trigger game count and execution restriction of the AT state and ART state has occurred, the game history managed using the total game count counter 344a and the advantageous game count counter 344b is temporarily cleared to "0".

However, this is not limited to this, and the processing of step S5114 may be executed even if a negative judgment is made in step S5104. In this case, if the value of the total game count counter 344a becomes equal to or greater than the management trigger game count, the game history managed using the total game count counter 344a and the advantageous game count counter 344b will be temporarily cleared to "0" regardless of whether the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1".

If the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1," the transition chance management process (FIG. 98) makes a positive determination in step S4902. In this case, the stock bonus lottery process is executed (step S4912). The stock bonus lottery process determines whether or not to award a stock bonus. Specifically, the stock bonus lottery process reads from the main ROM 343 the stock bonus lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6, reads the value of the stock bonus lottery counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344, and compares the value of the lottery counter against the stock bonus lottery table. The stock bonus lottery table is configured so that the probability of winning a stock bonus increases in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6. If the stock bonus lottery result is a winning entry (step S4913: YES), the value of the stock bonus counter stored in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4914).

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram in Figure 101(b), if the value of the stock bonus counter is 1 or greater, a stock bonus image G6 indicating that a stock bonus has been awarded is displayed on the image display device 334. In addition, the same number of bonus number images G7 as the number of stock bonuses awarded are displayed. In the case of Figure 101(b), the value of the stock bonus counter is "2", so two bonus number images G7 are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a stock bonus has been awarded, and also makes it possible for the player to recognize the number of stock bonuses that have been awarded.

When a stock bonus is granted, step S4903 of the transition chance management process (Figure 98) reads out a transition lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock bonus. In this case, the larger the stock bonus value, the more advantageous the transition lottery table is read out. Specifically, as already explained, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "0," a win with an index value IV = 4 results in a 5% probability of AT transition winning, a win with an index value IV = 5 results in a 10% probability of AT transition winning, and a win with an index value IV = 6 results in a 15% probability of AT transition winning. In contrast, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "1," a win with an index value IV = 4 results in a 15% probability of AT transition winning, a win with an index value IV = 5 results in a 20% probability of AT transition winning, and a win with an index value IV = 6 results in a 25% probability of AT transition winning. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "2," if a win occurs with an index value IV = 4, the probability of transition to the AT is 25%, if a win occurs with an index value IV = 5, the probability of transition to the AT is 30%, and if a win occurs with an index value IV = 6, the probability of transition to the AT is 35%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "3," if a win occurs with an index value IV = 4, the probability of transition to the AT is 35%, if a win occurs with an index value IV = 5, the probability of transition to the AT is 40%, and if a win occurs with an index value IV = 6, the probability of transition to the AT is 45%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock benefit is "4," if a win occurs with an index value IV = 4, the probability of transition to the AT is 45%, if a win occurs with an index value IV = 5, the probability of transition to the AT is 50%, and if a win occurs with an index value IV = 6, the probability of transition to the AT is 55%. Furthermore, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "5," if a win occurs with an index value IV = 4, there is a 55% chance of winning the AT transition; if a win occurs with an index value IV = 5, there is a 60% chance of winning the AT transition; and if a win occurs with an index value IV = 6, there is a 65% chance of winning the AT transition. This configuration not only increases the player's attention to the stock bonus being awarded, but also increases the player's satisfaction with winning a special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) even when the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1." Note that the process of clearing the stock bonus counter in the main RAM 344 to "0" is executed when an AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery process, so the probability of winning the AT transition in the AT transition lottery process does not decrease until an AT transition is won.

Also, if a stock bonus has been awarded, step S4906 of the transition chance management process (Figure 98) reads out an initial game count lottery table corresponding to the value of the awarded stock bonus. In this case, the larger the value of the stock bonus, the more advantageous the initial game count lottery table for the player is read out. Specifically, as already explained, in the initial game count lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "0," the probability of 50 games being selected is 90%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 9%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 1%. In contrast, in the initial game count lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "1," the probability of 50 games being selected is 80%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 14%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 6%. Furthermore, in the initial game count lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "2," the probability of 50 games being selected is 70%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 19%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 11%. In the initial game count lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "3," the probability of 50 games being selected is 60%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 24%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 16%. In the initial game count lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "4," the probability of 50 games being selected is 50%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 29%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 21%. In the initial game count lottery table selected when the stock bonus is "5," the probability of 50 games being selected is 40%, the probability of 100 games being selected is 34%, and the probability of 200 games being selected is 26%. This configuration not only increases the player's attention to the fact that a stock bonus will be awarded, but also increases the player's satisfaction at winning a special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) even when the advantage regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1."

Returning to the explanation of the game management process (Figure 100), if the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5101: YES), the value of the regulated game count counter in the main RAM 344 is decremented by 1 (step S5115). Then, if the value of the regulated game count counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S5116: YES), the advantageous regulation flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). This cancels the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted. Incidentally, the value of the regulated game count counter is not notified, and no notification is made to indicate that the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is lifted. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing when the restriction will be lifted.

Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 342 to manage game history and notify the results of that management will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 102. Note that the management process is executed in step S4513 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 88).

First, the value of the total game counter 344a in the main RAM 344 is determined (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous game counter 344b in the main RAM 344 is determined (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game counter 344b in the main RAM 344 to the value of the total game counter 344a is calculated (step S5203). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of advantageous game counter 344b" / "value of total game counter 344a." Then, the first through third notification display devices 346-348 are controlled to display the hundreds digit of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, without the intervention of another control device, so that the hundreds digit is displayed on the first notification display device 346, the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 348 (step S5204). The calculation result is reported as a percentage. Specifically, if the result of the above calculation multiplied by 100 is "35", then first alert display device 346 will display "0", second alert display device 347 will display "3", and third alert display device 348 will display "5". Furthermore, if the result of the above calculation multiplied by 100 is "100", first alert display device 346 will display "1", second alert display device 347 will display "0", and third alert display device 348 will display "0".

By executing the management process as described above, the results of game history management are constantly displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346-348, allowing the amusement hall manager to grasp the results of game history management by leaving the front door 312 open and visually checking the first to third notification display devices 346-348. Furthermore, the timer interrupt process (Figure 88) is executed at intervals shorter than the shortest period required to complete one game, and more specifically, at intervals shorter than the shortest period required from the end of one game to the start of the next. Therefore, by visually checking the first to third notification display devices 346-348, the amusement hall manager can grasp the results of game history management up to the most recently completed game.

Next, the lighting process, which controls the light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b, which are provided to irradiate the main control unit 340 with light when the front door 312 is open, will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 103. The lighting process is executed in step S4514 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 88).

If no light is being emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: NO), the system determines whether the front door 312 is open based on the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e (step S5302). If the front door 312 is open (step S5302: YES), the system determines whether the opening angle of the front door 312 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, the system determines whether the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e. This predetermined opening angle is set to 86% of the maximum opening angle of the front door 312. Specifically, since the maximum opening angle of the front door 312 is when the front door 312 is opened 90° relative to the housing 311, the predetermined opening angle is set to approximately 77° relative to the housing 311. If a positive determination is made in step S5303, that is, if the front door 312 is not closed and the opening angle of the front door 312 is 77° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b (step S5304). This causes the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b to irradiate light onto the irradiation range IR that includes the main control device 340. This light irradiation state continues until the processing of step S5306, which will be described later, is executed.

If light is being emitted from the lighting devices 349a, 349b (step S5301: YES), it is determined whether the front door 312 is closed or whether the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e (step S5305). If a positive determination is made in step S5305, the output of drive signals to the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b is stopped (step S5306). This places the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b in a non-illuminating state, and the emission of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b toward the illumination range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 312 and the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b will be explained with reference to the time charts in Figures 104(a) and 104(b). Figure 104(a) shows the state of the front door 312, and Figure 104(b) shows the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b. The following explanation will also refer to Figures 105(a) and 105(b) as appropriate. Figure 105(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the front door 312 is in an open state and its opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, and Figure 105(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the opening angle of the front door 312 is at its maximum opening angle, exceeding the predetermined opening angle.

First, we will explain what happens when the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped when the opening angle of the front door 312 is below a predetermined opening angle.

As shown in Figure 104(a), when the front door 312 is closed, the operation to open the front door 312 begins at timing t1. In this case, at timing t1, the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b begin emitting light as shown in Figure 104(b). Thereafter, at timing t2, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped before the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle. In this state, as shown in Figure 105(a), light is irradiated toward the main control device 340 from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b. As a result, even when the front door 312 is slightly open, the main control device 340 is brightly illuminated, allowing the amusement hall manager to visually confirm the display contents of the circuit board box 345 of the main control device 340 and the first to third alarm display devices 346-348. In this case, the front door 312 does not need to be fully opened during the confirmation process, making the confirmation process easier.

Then, as shown in Figure 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 begins at timing t3, and the front door 312 enters the closed state at timing t4. In this case, the light emission from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b is stopped at timing t4, as shown in Figure 104(b).

Next, we will explain what happens when the front door 312 is opened until it reaches its maximum opening angle.

As shown in Figure 104(a), when the front door 312 is closed, the operation to open the front door 312 begins at timing t5. In this case, at timing t5, light emission from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b begins as shown in Figure 104(b). Thereafter, at timing t6, the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle as shown in Figure 104(a). As a result, light emission from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b stops as shown in Figure 104(b) at timing t6.

Subsequently, at timing t7, when the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches its maximum opening angle, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105(b), the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b do not emit light toward the main control device 340. When the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, as occurs when the opening angle reaches its maximum opening angle, the inside of the cabinet 311 is illuminated by light from the gaming hall's interior lighting or sunlight. In this case, if the main control device 340 is illuminated by the lighting devices 349a, 349b, there is a concern that the visibility of the main control device 340 and the first to third alarm display devices 346-348 may be reduced. In response to this, by stopping the emission of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Then, as shown in Figure 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 begins at timing t8, and at timing t9 the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle. In this case, at timing t9, light emission from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b begins as shown in Figure 104(b). Then, as shown in Figure 104(a), the front door 312 enters the closed state at timing t10. In this case, light emission from the pair of lighting devices 349a, 349b stops as shown in Figure 104(b) at timing t10.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The total number of games played regardless of the game state is measured by the total game number counter 344a in the main RAM 344, and the number of games played in the ART state or in the AT state after the ART state has started is cumulatively measured by the advantageous game number counter 344b in the main RAM 344. The ratio of the advantageous game number to the total number of games is then calculated, and if this calculated ratio is a regulated ratio, restrictions are placed on the progress of play. This makes it possible to place restrictions on the progress of play depending on the occurrence of the ART state, and makes it possible to deal with cases where the occurrence of the ART state does not match the pattern assumed during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

When restrictions are imposed on the progress of play based on the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, restrictions are imposed on the progress of play so that this ratio does not fall within the regulated ratio. This makes it possible to ensure that even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes a regulated ratio, this ratio falls within the range of ratios envisioned during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

If the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is a regulated ratio, the ART state will be terminated even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is not "0". This makes it possible to forcibly terminate the ART state when the above ratio becomes a regulated ratio, and to impose restrictions on the execution mode of the game state if the occurrence mode of the ART state does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

When the total number of games measured by the total game number counter 344a reaches or exceeds the management trigger game number, which is a number of games that is greater than the number of games that can initially be set to continue in the ART state when the ART state is newly started, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and if this calculated ratio is the regulated ratio, the ART state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the ART state is forcibly terminated.

In ART mode, the number of remaining games to be played in that ART mode is not announced. This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART mode is forcibly terminated because the ratio of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches a regulated ratio.

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches a regulated ratio, transition to the ART state is regulated. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent transition to the ART state depending on the occurrence of that ART state, and to restrict the execution of the game state if the occurrence of the ART state does not match the state anticipated during the design stage of the slot machine 310.

The period during which transition to ART state is restricted varies depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the restriction on transition to ART state from being set too low or too high regardless of the ratio.

If a special role is won in the role lottery process (Figure 90) when the ratio of advantageous games to the total number of games is a regulated ratio and transition to the ART state is prevented, the process to determine whether to transition to the ART state will not be executed, but a stock bonus will be awarded as an alternative bonus. This makes it possible to prevent players from thinking that winning a special role in the role lottery process (Figure 90) was a waste when transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

The more stock bonuses granted, the more advantageous it is for the player. This makes it possible to maintain the player's anticipation of winning a special role in the role lottery process (Figure 90) even in situations where transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

If a stock bonus is awarded, a corresponding notification will be issued. This will help ensure that players do not lose their motivation to continue playing, even in situations where transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

When a stock bonus is granted, a transition to the ART state is more likely to occur after the state in which the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked is lifted. This makes it possible to associate the granting of a stock bonus with the transition to the ART state. Therefore, even if a special role is won in the role lottery process (Figure 90) when the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to make the player expect a transition to the ART state.

Providing lighting devices 349a and 349b to illuminate the main control device 340 makes it easier to check the main control device 340 with the front door 312 open. In this case, when the front door 312 is closed, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminated state. This prevents the lighting devices 349a and 349b from being illuminated unnecessarily when the main control device 340 is not being checked. Furthermore, when the front door 312 is opened, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are automatically illuminated. This eliminates the need for a separate operation to illuminate the lighting devices 349a and 349b, making it easier to check the main control device 340.

The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided inside the housing 311 in which the main control device 340 is provided. This makes it easier to illuminate the main control device 340 using the lighting devices 349a and 349b in response to the opening operation of the front door 312.

The lighting devices 349a and 349b are not illuminated regardless of the open position of the front door 312; rather, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are selectively illuminated in certain open positions. This allows the lighting devices 349a and 349b to be illuminated only in conditions that are favorable for checking the main control device 340, and to be turned off in conditions where lighting the lighting devices 349a and 349b makes checking the main control device 340 more difficult.

When the front door 312 is in the maximum open position, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminating state. This prevents the lighting devices 349a and 349b from being in a non-illuminating state in situations where the main control device 340 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting in the gaming hall, thereby preventing the inconvenience of the lighting from the lighting devices 349a and 349b making it difficult to check the main control device 340.

<Alternative to the 17th embodiment>
The total number of games played regardless of the game state and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the ART state, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, this is not limited to this. The number of wins and the total number of games played for the predetermined role to be selected in the role selection process ( FIG. 90 ) may be stored as history information, and the winning probability for the predetermined role may be calculated. In this case, the target predetermined roles may include a first predetermined role and a second predetermined role. The number of wins for each of the first and second predetermined roles may be stored as history information, and the winning probability for each of the first and second predetermined roles may be calculated. Alternatively, the number of wins for each of all roles may be stored as history information, and the winning probability for each role may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the gaming parlor manager of the winning probability for the roles under management.

Alternatively, the total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games played may be stored as historical information, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games played may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the gaming parlor manager of the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games played. Alternatively, combinations of the total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games played may be stored as historical information separately for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal gaming state, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated separately for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal gaming state.

Alternatively, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games played in gaming states other than the BB state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the BB state may be calculated.Alternatively, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games played in gaming states other than the ART state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the ART state may be calculated.Alternatively, the total number of transitions to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games played in gaming states other than the BB state and the ART state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the BB state and the ART state may be calculated.

- The display of each determination result on the first to third alarm display devices 346-348 may be configured to begin when the check result display period begins and end when the check result display period ends. Alternatively, the display of each previous determination result on the first to third alarm display devices 346-348 may begin when a sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 detects that the front door 312 has been opened relative to the housing 311, and the display of each determination result on the first to third alarm display devices 346-348 may end when the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 detects that the front door 312 has been closed relative to the housing 311. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third alarm display devices 346-348.

- Although the number of games remaining to be played in the ART state is not announced, it may alternatively be announced. In this case, if the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the reason for the forced termination may be announced on the image display device 334. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming confused when the ART state has been forcibly terminated even though the number of games remaining to be played in the ART state is not "0".

Also, if the number of remaining games to continue in the ART state is greater than the number of games at which the ART state will be forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the number of games remaining until the ART state is forcibly terminated may be announced as the remaining number of games to continue in the ART state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated.

Alternatively, the number of games remaining until the ART state ends may not be announced until the number of games remaining in the ART state, or the number of games at which the ART state will be forcibly ended in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, reaches 10 games, and the number of games remaining until the ART state ends may be announced when either of these numbers reaches 10 games. In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that there are 10 games or less remaining in the ART state, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly ended.

- If the number of remaining games to continue in ART state reaches or exceeds the number of games at which the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the configuration may be such that even if an opportunity arises to add to the number of remaining games to continue in ART state, the addition will not occur.

- When the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the degree of advantage in the next ART state may be configured to change in relation to the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state at the time the forced termination occurred. For example, the greater the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state at the time the forced termination occurred, the greater or more likely the initial number of continuing games will be in the next ART state, or the more likely the number of continuing games will be added in the next ART state. This makes it possible to provide compensation according to the remaining number of continuing games when the ART state is forcibly terminated when the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state is large.

- Notification of calculation results using game history is not limited to being performed by the first to third notification display devices 346-348, and may be performed using, for example, the credit display unit 335 and the number of awards display unit 336. This makes it possible to use both the credit display unit 335 and the number of awards display unit 336 as display units for notifying calculation results. Furthermore, in this configuration, if there are multiple types of events to be notified, the events to be notified may be displayed in sequence, as in the thirteenth embodiment above. When the events to be notified are displayed in sequence in this manner, for example, the type of event to be notified may be displayed in the credit display unit 335, and the calculation result for the event to be notified or information corresponding to the content of the calculation result may be displayed in the number of awards display unit 336. This makes it possible to notify multiple types of events to be notified using a small number of display units, even if there are multiple types of events to be notified.

- The system may be configured to have a counter that measures the gaming history up to the management trigger game number (specifically, 3,000 games), and a counter that measures the gaming history beyond the management trigger game number. In this case, the former counter is used to perform a calculation using the gaming history up to the management trigger game number, and control is performed according to the calculation result. When this calculation is performed, the former counter is cleared to "0." On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the gaming history without clearing it to "0" even when the above calculation is performed, and to perform a calculation using this cumulative gaming history. This makes it possible to execute control corresponding to the calculation result each time the management trigger game number is reached, while also managing the gaming history beyond the management trigger game number.

- The targets of forced termination in relation to the results of game history management are not limited to advantageous game states such as ART states, but may also be unfavorable game states.

- The configuration may be provided with an operation unit that can be operated to forcibly switch the lighting devices 349a, 349b to a non-illuminating state even when the front door 312 is open. In this case, when illumination by the lighting devices 349a, 349b is not required, the lighting devices 349a, 349b can be switched to a non-illuminating state. The operation unit may also be located in a position that allows it to be operated even when the front door 312 is closed, or in a position that cannot be operated when the front door 312 is closed but can be operated when the front door 312 is open.

- The lighting devices 349a and 349b may be configured to always be illuminated when the front door 312 is open, and always be in a non-illuminated state when the front door 312 is closed.

- Even when the front door 312 changes from a closed state to an open state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b may be maintained in a non-illuminating state until a predetermined opening angle is reached, and then the lighting devices 349a and 349b may be illuminated when the opening angle reaches or exceeds the predetermined angle. In addition to this configuration, the lighting devices 349a and 349b may be configured to be non-illuminating when the front door 312 reaches the maximum open position, as in the above embodiment.

- The intensity of light emitted from the lighting devices 349a, 349b may be changed depending on the opening angle of the front door 312. For example, when the front door 312 is closed, the lighting devices 349a, 349b are in a non-illuminating state or in an illuminating state with a relatively low intensity; when the front door 312 is open and the opening angle of the front door 312 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, the lighting devices 349a, 349b are in an illuminating state with a relatively high intensity; and when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, the lighting devices 349a, 349b are in an illuminating state with a relatively low intensity.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for managing the game history in the slot machine 310 is different from that of the seventeenth embodiment. The configuration that differs from the seventeenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the seventeenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 106(a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM 344.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 344a and a favorable game number counter 344b, as in the seventeenth embodiment. As in the seventeenth embodiment, the total game number counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of whether the gaming state is normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. The total game number counter 344a can measure a maximum of 3,000 games, and therefore has a data capacity sufficient to measure this number of games. Specifically, the total game number counter 344a has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Even if the power to the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the total game number counter 344a retains the information on the measured number of games unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned ON.

As in the seventeenth embodiment, the advantageous game number counter 344b is a counter for measuring the number of games played from the time a transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0." The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0," even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0" after a transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used to measure the total number of games played over multiple ART states. The advantageous game number counter 344b can measure a maximum of 3,000 games, and therefore has a data capacity sufficient to measure this number of games. Specifically, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Note that even if the power to the slot machine 310 is turned OFF, the advantageous game number counter 344b retains the information on the measured number of games unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned ON.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a total game counter 361. Similar to the total game counter 344a, the total game counter 361 is a counter for counting the number of games played regardless of whether the gaming state is normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. However, the total game counter 361 maintains counting for a number of games exceeding 3,000. Furthermore, even if the slot machine 310 is powered off, the counted number of games is retained unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on. The total game counter 361 has a data capacity that allows it to count the number of games over multiple business days without reaching an upper limit. Specifically, the total game counter 361 has a data capacity of 2 bytes. For example, if the maximum number of games that can be played in one business day is 8,000, the total game counter 361 can continuously count the number of games for more than five years.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a total accumulation buffer 362. Figure 106(b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the various counters 362a to 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. The total accumulation buffer 362 includes a total payout counter 362a, a total advantageous counter 362b, and a total bonus counter 362c.

The total payout counter 362a is a counter that measures the total number of gaming media paid out to a player regardless of whether the gaming state is normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. Even if the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total payout counter 362a retains information on the measured total number of gaming media paid out unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on. The total payout counter 362a has a data capacity that allows it to measure the total number of gaming media over multiple business days without reaching an upper limit. Specifically, the total payout counter 362a has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total payout number of gaming media in one business day is set to "120,000," the total payout counter 362a can measure the total number of gaming media paid out over four months or more.

The total advantageous counter 362b is a counter that measures the total number of gaming media paid out to a player from the time the slot machine 310 transitions to the ART state until the value of the ART game counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0." The value of the total advantageous counter 362b is maintained without being cleared to "0," even if the value of the ART game counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0" after the slot machine 310 transitions to the ART state. In other words, the total advantageous counter 362b is used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out over multiple ART states. Even if the slot machine 310 is powered off, the total advantageous counter 362b retains information on the total number of gaming media paid out that it is measuring, unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the slot machine 310 is subsequently powered on. The total advantageous counter 362b has a data capacity that allows it to measure the total number of gaming media over multiple business days without reaching its upper limit. Specifically, the total advantageous counter 362b has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of gaming media paid out in one business day is 120,000, the total advantageous counter 362b can measure the total number of gaming media paid out over a period of four months or more.

The total bonus counter 362c is a counter for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to a player during the BB state. The value of the total bonus counter 362c is maintained at "0" and is not cleared even after the BB state ends. In other words, the total bonus counter 362c is used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out over multiple BB states. Even if the slot machine 310 is powered off, the total bonus counter 362c retains information on the measured total number of gaming media paid out unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the slot machine 310 is subsequently powered on. The total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity that allows it to measure the total number of gaming media over multiple business days without reaching its upper limit. Specifically, the total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data capacity of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of gaming media paid out in one business day is "120,000," the total bonus counter 362c can measure the total number of gaming media paid out over more than four months.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a first cumulative buffer 363 and a second cumulative buffer 364. Figure 106(c) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the various counters 363a to 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363, and Figure 106(d) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the various counters 364a to 364c provided in the second cumulative buffer 364. As shown in Figure 106(c), the first cumulative buffer 363 is provided with a first total payout counter 363a, a first advantageous period counter 363b, and a first bonus period counter 363c. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 106(d), the second cumulative buffer 364 is provided with a second total payout counter 364a, a second advantageous period counter 364b, and a second bonus period counter 364c.

Like the total payout counter 362a, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a are counters for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to a player regardless of whether the gaming state is normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure the total number of gaming media paid out in a maximum of 6,000 games, and therefore have a data capacity sufficient to measure that total number of gaming media. Specifically, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Note that even if the slot machine 310 is powered off, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a retain information on the total number of gaming media paid out that they are measuring, unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the slot machine 310 is subsequently powered on.

Like the total advantageous counter 362b, the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b are counters for measuring the total number of gaming media paid out to a player from the time a transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game count counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0." The values of the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b are maintained without being cleared to "0," even if the value of the ART game count counter in the main RAM 344 reaches "0" after a transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b are used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out in multiple ART states. The first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b measure the total number of gaming media paid out in a maximum of 6,000 games, and therefore have a data capacity sufficient to measure the total number of gaming media. Specifically, the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Even if the slot machine 310 is powered off, the first advantageous counter 363b and the second advantageous counter 364b retain information on the total number of gaming media paid out that they are measuring, unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on.

Like the total bonus counter 362c, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are counters used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out to a player during the BB state. The values of the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are maintained and not cleared to "0" even after the BB state ends. In other words, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are used to measure the total number of gaming media paid out during multiple BB states. The first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c measure the total number of gaming media paid out in a maximum of 6,000 games, and therefore have a data capacity sufficient to measure that total number of gaming media. Specifically, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Furthermore, even if the slot machine 310 is powered off, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c will retain the information on the total number of gaming media paid out that they are measuring unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on.

As shown in Figure 106(a), the main RAM 344 is provided with a calculation area 365 for the total cumulative total, a calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total, and a calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. The calculation area 365 for the total cumulative total stores information resulting from calculating the ratio of the total number of gaming media payouts in ART state to the total number of gaming media payouts using the total total payout counter 362a and the total advantageous counter 362b provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362, and also stores information resulting from calculating the ratio of the total number of gaming media payouts in BB state to the total number of gaming media payouts using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362. The calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total stores information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, using the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous period counter 363b provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363, and also stores information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, using the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus period counter 363c provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363. The second cumulative calculation area 367 stores information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in ART state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games using the second total payout counter 364a and second advantageous period counter 364b provided in the second cumulative buffer 364, and also stores information on the results of calculating the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in BB state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games using the second total payout counter 364a and second bonus period counter 364c provided in the second cumulative buffer 364.

By providing the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 as described above, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games. In this case, the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are used so that the start and end of the periods they manage are offset from each other. Specifically, if the total number of games managed by each cumulative buffer 363, 364 is A (specifically, 6,000 games) and the number of cumulative buffers 363, 364 is B (specifically, two), the start and end of the periods they manage are offset from each other by the number of games A/B (specifically, 3,000 games). Furthermore, when a period to be managed in first accumulation buffer 363 ends, the next period to be managed in first accumulation buffer 363 begins with the next game, and when a period to be managed in second accumulation buffer 364 ends, the next period to be managed in second accumulation buffer 364 begins with the next game. Therefore, the periods to be managed by first accumulation buffer 363 and the periods to be managed by second accumulation buffer 364 occur repeatedly, with the start and end of these periods shifted by a certain number of games.

Figure 107 is a time chart showing how game history is managed in this embodiment. Figure 107(a) shows the timing when 3,000 games have elapsed, Figure 107(b) shows the timing when a game is executed, Figure 107(c) shows the timing when total cumulative buffer 362 is updated, Figure 107(d) shows the timing when first cumulative buffer 363 is updated, Figure 107(e) shows the timing when first cumulative buffer 363 is initialized, Figure 107(f) shows the timing when second cumulative buffer 364 is updated, Figure 107(g) shows the timing when second cumulative buffer 364 is initialized, and Figure 107(h) shows the timing when the display target on notification display devices 346-348 is switched from one of the management results calculated using first cumulative buffer 363 to the other of the management results calculated using second cumulative buffer 364.

At timing t1, the slot machine 310 is powered on, and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 begins. In this case, the main RAM 344 is cleared, clearing the various counters 363a-363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e), and clearing the various counters 364a-364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(g). If the main RAM 344 clearing process is not executed even when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 begins, the various counters 363a-363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the various counters 364a-364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are not cleared to "0" when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 begins, and the values from the previous time the slot machine 310 was powered off are maintained.

After that, one game is played at each of times t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6, as shown in Figure 107(b). Then, at time t6, 3,000 games have passed, as shown in Figure 107(a). Assuming that gaming media are paid out in each of these games, the update process for the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed at each of times t2 through t6, as shown in Figure 107(c), and the update process for the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed, as shown in Figure 107(d). Note that in games in which gaming media are not paid out, the update processes for the total cumulative buffer 362 and the first cumulative buffer 363 are not executed. The update process for the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed at each of times t2 through t6, as shown in Figure 107(f). Since the period managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period managed by the second accumulation buffer 364 both begin and end at different times by 3,000 games, when initialization processing is performed on these accumulation buffers 363, 364, the update processing for the second accumulation buffer 364 will be put on hold until 3,000 games have elapsed since the initialization processing was performed.

After that, one game is played at each of times t7, t8, t9, and t10, as shown in Figure 107(b). Assuming that gaming media are paid out in each of these games, at each of times t7 through t10, the update process for the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed as shown in Figure 107(c), the update process for the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed as shown in Figure 107(d), and the update process for the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed as shown in Figure 107(f). Note that in games in which gaming media are not paid out, the update processes for the total cumulative buffer 362, first cumulative buffer 363, and second cumulative buffer 364 are not executed.

As shown in Figure 107(a), timing t10 is the timing when 3,000 games have passed since timing t6. In other words, this is the timing when 6,000 games have passed since the first cumulative total buffer 363 became the target of update, which is the period that becomes the target of one management. Therefore, management results for 6,000 games are calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363. These calculated management results are stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. Then, after the management results are stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, the various counters 363a to 363c in the first cumulative total buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 107(e).

The timing for switching the display target is also as shown in Figure 107 (h). When the clearing process for the main RAM 344 is executed, the display content corresponding to the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on the notification display devices 346-348 becomes the initial display content that does not correspond to any management result. This initial display content continues for the period during which the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363, 364 are displayed, until the first management result is calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363. When the information on the management result calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363 is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366 at timing t10, the display content of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on the notification display devices 346-348 becomes the display content that corresponds to the information on the management result stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. This display content is maintained as the display content of the management results of the cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on the notification display devices 346-348 until the information on the management results calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364 is stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367.

After that, one game is played at each of times t11, t12, t13, and t14, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that gaming media are paid out in each of these games, at each of times t11 to t14, the update process for the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c), the update process for the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(d), and the update process for the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(f). Note that in games in which gaming media are not paid out, the update processes for the total cumulative buffer 362, first cumulative buffer 363, and second cumulative buffer 364 are not executed.

As shown in Figure 107(a), the timing of t14 is the timing when 3,000 games have passed since the timing of t10. In other words, this is the timing when 6,000 games have passed since the second cumulative total buffer 364 became the target of update, which is the period that becomes the target of management. Therefore, the management results for 6,000 games are calculated using the second cumulative total buffer 364. These calculated management results are stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367. Then, after the management results are stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second cumulative total buffer 364 are cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 107(g).

The timing for switching the display target is also shown in Figure 107 (h). At timing t14, the management result information calculated using second cumulative total buffer 364 is stored in second cumulative total calculation area 367, causing the display content of the management results of cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on notification display devices 346-348 to switch from the display content corresponding to the management result information stored in first cumulative total calculation area 366 to the display content corresponding to the management result information stored in second cumulative total calculation area 367. This display content is maintained as the display content of the management results of cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on notification display devices 346-348 until new management result information calculated using first cumulative total buffer 363 is stored in first cumulative total calculation area 366.

After that, one game is played at each of times t15, t16, t17, and t18, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that gaming media are paid out in each of these games, at each of times t15 to t18, the update process for the total cumulative buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c), the update process for the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(d), and the update process for the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(f). Note that in games in which gaming media are not paid out, the update processes for the total cumulative buffer 362, first cumulative buffer 363, and second cumulative buffer 364 are not executed.

As shown in Figure 107(a), timing t18 is the timing when 3,000 games have passed since timing t14. In other words, it is the timing when 6,000 games have passed since the start of a new management period using the first cumulative total buffer 363. Therefore, management results for 6,000 games are calculated using the first cumulative total buffer 363. These calculated management results are stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. Then, after the management results are stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366, the various counters 363a to 363c in the first cumulative total buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in Figure 107(e).

The timing for switching the display target is also shown in Figure 107 (h). At timing t18, the management result information calculated using first cumulative total buffer 363 is stored in first cumulative total calculation area 366, and the display content of the management results of cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on notification display devices 346-348 is switched from the display content corresponding to the management result information stored in second cumulative total calculation area 367 to the display content corresponding to the management result information stored in first cumulative total calculation area 366. This display content is maintained as the display content of the management results of cumulative total buffers 363, 364 on notification display devices 346-348 until new management result information calculated using second cumulative total buffer 364 is stored in second cumulative total calculation area 367.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration that enables the management of game history as described above. Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the game management processing executed by the main MPU 342. Note that the game management processing is executed in step S4811 of the response processing at the end of game play (Figure 97).

First, processing for advantageous period restrictions is executed (step S5401). This processing for advantageous period restrictions is identical to the processing of steps S5101 to S5117 of the game management processing (Figure 100) in the 17th embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether or not gaming media have been awarded in the current game (step S5402). If gaming media have been awarded (step S5402: YES), a value corresponding to the number of gaming media awarded this time is added to the total total payout counter 362a of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5403), and a value corresponding to the number of gaming media awarded this time is added to the first total payout counter 363a of the first accumulation buffer 363 (step S5404). Additionally, provided that the period is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is the period before 3,000 games have elapsed since the main RAM 344 clearing process was executed (step S5405: NO), a value corresponding to the number of gaming media awarded this time is added to the second total payout counter 364a of the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5406).

If a positive judgment is made in step S5405 or if the processing of step S5406 is executed, the ART state is determined by determining whether the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is 1 or greater (step S5407). If a positive judgment is made in step S5407, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the total advantageous state counter 362b in the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5408), and a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the first advantageous state counter 363b in the first cumulative buffer 363 (step S5409). Furthermore, provided that the current period is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is the period before 3,000 games have elapsed since the clearing processing of the main RAM 344 was executed (step S5410: NO), a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the second advantageous state counter 364b in the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5411).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5407, it is determined whether the current gaming state is BB state (step S5412). If a positive judgment is made in step S5412, a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the total bonus counter 362c in the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5413), and a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the first bonus counter 363c in the first accumulation buffer 363 (step S5414). Furthermore, provided that the current period is not the second accumulation waiting period, which is the period before 3,000 games have elapsed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 was executed (step S5415: NO), a value corresponding to the number of gaming media currently awarded is added to the second bonus counter 364c in the second accumulation buffer 364 (step S5416).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5402, a positive judgment is made in step S5410, the processing of step S5411 is executed, a negative judgment is made in step S5412, a positive judgment is made in step S5415, or the processing of step S5416 is executed, a calculation process for the total cumulative total is executed (step S5417). In this calculation process, the total total payout counter 362a and the total advantageous counter 362b provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of gaming media payouts in the ART state to the total number of gaming media payouts, and the calculation result is stored in the total cumulative total calculation area 365. In addition, in this calculation process, the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total cumulative total buffer 362 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of gaming media payouts in the BB state to the total number of gaming media payouts, and the calculation result is stored in the total cumulative total calculation area 365. When the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in ART state is reached, the former calculation result is reported; when the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is reported.

Then, in step S5418, target switching processing is executed. Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the target switching processing. First, the value of the total game count counter 361 in the main RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S5501). The total game count counter 361 is used by the main MPU 342 to identify a period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 and a period to be managed using the second cumulative total buffer 364. Then, in step S5502, it is determined whether the value of the total game count counter 361 after incrementing by 1 is 3000 x 2n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1). If the value of the total game count counter 361 is 3000 x 2n, this means that a period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 has ended. For example, if 6000 games, 12000 games, or 18000 games have passed since the main RAM 344 clearing processing was executed, the period to be managed using the first cumulative total buffer 363 has ended.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5502, a calculation process for the first cumulative total is executed (step S5503). In this calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous period counter 363b provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, and the calculation result is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. In addition, in this calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus period counter 363c provided in the first cumulative total buffer 363 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, and the calculation result is stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366. When the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in ART state is reached, the former calculation result is reported; when the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is reported.

Then, the first cumulative display flag stored in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5504), and the second cumulative display flag stored in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5505). The first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag are flags used by the main MPU 342 to determine which of the two management results calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364 will be displayed on the notification display devices 346-348. When the first cumulative display flag is set to "1" and the value of the second cumulative display flag is "0," the management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 will be displayed. When the value of the first cumulative display flag is "0" and the value of the second cumulative display flag is set to "1," the management result calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 will be displayed. Furthermore, if the value of both the first cumulative total display flag and the second cumulative total display flag is "0", the initial display content that does not correspond to either the first cumulative total buffer 363 or the second cumulative total buffer 364 will be displayed.

Then, the first accumulation buffer 363 is cleared (step S5506). This clears the various counters 363a to 363c in the first accumulation buffer 363 to "0."

If a negative judgment is made in step S5502, it is determined whether the value of the total game count counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000 x (2n + 1) (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1) (step S5507). If the value of the total game count counter 361 is 3000 x (2n + 1), this means that one period of time to be managed using the second accumulation buffer 364 has ended. For example, if 9000 games have passed since the clearing process of the main RAM 344 was executed, if 15000 games have passed, or if 21000 games have passed, then one period of time to be managed using the second accumulation buffer 364 has ended.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5507, a calculation process for the second cumulative total is executed (step S5508). In this calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second advantageous period counter 364b provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. In addition, in this calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus period counter 364c provided in the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state to the total number of gaming media paid out over a continuous period of 6,000 games, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second cumulative total. When the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in ART state is reached, the former calculation result is reported; when the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is reported.

Then, the first cumulative total display flag stored in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5509), and the second cumulative total display flag stored in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5510). The second cumulative total buffer 364 is also cleared (step S5511). This clears the various counters 364a to 364c in the second cumulative total buffer 364 to "0."

Next, the management processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 110. Note that the management processing is executed in step S4513 of the timer interrupt processing (Figure 88).

First, it is determined whether it is time to update the display content on the notification display devices 346-348 (step S5601). The display targets of the notification display devices 346-348 include the total cumulative buffer 362, which indicates the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state; the total cumulative buffer 362, which indicates the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state; the first cumulative buffer 363, which indicates the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state; the first cumulative buffer 363, which indicates the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state; the second cumulative buffer 364, which indicates the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state; the second cumulative buffer 364, which indicates the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state; and the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. On the notification display devices 346-348, the display content of one display object is displayed for a predetermined notification period (specifically, 5 seconds), after which the display content is changed to the next display object and the display content of the changed display object is displayed for the predetermined notification period. On the notification display devices 346-348, the display objects first display the ratios for the total cumulative buffer 362, then the ratios for the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364 whose management period ended most recently, and then the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. This process of switching display objects is then repeated. Note that the content set at the previous update timing continues to be displayed on the notification display devices 346-348 until it is time to update the display content.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5601, an update process for the display target counter is executed (step S5602). The display target counter is provided in the main RAM 344. If the value of the display target counter is "0", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state. If the value of the display target counter is "1", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state. If the value of the display target counter is "2", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 362. If the value of the display target counter is "3", the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in ART state; if the value of the display target counter is "3", the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364, which is the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in BB state; if the value of the display target counter is "4", the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. Furthermore, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 is "5", the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0".

Then, by determining whether the value of the display target counter is "0" or "1," it is determined whether the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is a ratio of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5603). If a positive determination is made in step S5603, a process for setting the display of the type of total cumulative total is executed (step S5604). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "0," "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is "1," "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 346. In other words, in this embodiment, information corresponding to the type of display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Then, a process for setting the display of the total cumulative total result is executed (step S5605). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "0," information stored in the total cumulative total calculation area 365, which is stored in the total cumulative total buffer 362, corresponding to the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state, is displayed on the second alert display device 347 and the third alert display device 348. Furthermore, if the value of the display target counter is "1," information stored in the total cumulative total calculation area 365, which is stored in the total cumulative total buffer 362, corresponding to the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, is displayed on the second alert display device 347 and the third alert display device 348. In these cases, the ratio is displayed as a percentage, with the tens digit displayed on the second alert display device 347 and the ones digit displayed on the third alert display device 348. Note that, since this configuration makes it impossible to distinguish between 100% and less than 1%, different displays may be used for 100% and less than 1%.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5603, it is determined whether the value of the counter to be displayed is "2" or "3," thereby determining whether the display target on the notification display devices 346-348 is the ratio for the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5606). If a positive judgment is made in step S5606, a process for setting the type display for a partial period is executed (step S5607). In this setting process, if the value of the counter to be displayed is "2," "2" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the counter to be displayed is "3," "3" is displayed on the first notification display device 346.

If the first cumulative total display flag in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5608: YES), a setting process for displaying the results of the first cumulative total is executed (step S5609). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2," information stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366 and contained in the first cumulative total buffer 363, which corresponds to the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state, is displayed on the second alert display device 347 and the third alert display device 348. Also, if the value of the display target counter is "3," information stored in the first cumulative total calculation area 366 and contained in the first cumulative total buffer 363, which corresponds to the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state, is displayed on the second alert display device 347 and the third alert display device 348.

If the first cumulative total display flag in the main RAM 344 is not set to "1" and the second cumulative total display flag is set to "1" (step S5610: YES), a setting process for displaying the second cumulative total result is executed (step S5611). In this setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2," information stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367 and corresponding to the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the ART state in the second cumulative total buffer 364 is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Furthermore, if the value of the display target counter is "3," information stored in the second cumulative total calculation area 367 and corresponding to the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out in the BB state in the second cumulative total buffer 364 is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

If both the first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag in the main RAM 344 are not set to "1" (step S5610: NO), an initial display setting process is executed (step S5612). This setting process ensures that the display content of the second alarm display device 347 and the third alarm display device 348 becomes the initial display content, regardless of the value of the counter to be displayed. Specifically, the letter "L," which is not displayed when displaying ratios for other situations, is displayed on both the second alarm display device 347 and the third alarm display device 348. However, even in this case, the first alarm display device 346 displays content corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed. This allows the amusement hall manager to determine which display target the initial display content corresponds to when it is displayed on the second alarm display device 347 and the third alarm display device 348.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5606, this means that the display target of the notification display devices 346-348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game count counter 344b to the value of the total game count counter 344a. In this case, first, a setting process for displaying the type of advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5613). In this setting process, the first notification display device 346 is caused to display "4", which corresponds to the value of the counter to be displayed. In addition, a setting process for displaying the result of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5614). In this setting process, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game count counter 344b to the value of the total game count counter 344a is calculated, and information corresponding to the calculation result is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The system is equipped with a first cumulative buffer 363 and a second cumulative buffer 364. A continuous period of 6,000 games is managed using the first cumulative buffer 363, and a continuous period of 6,000 games is managed using the second cumulative buffer 364. Furthermore, the period managed using the first cumulative buffer 363 (hereinafter also referred to as the first period) and the period managed using the second cumulative buffer 364 (hereinafter also referred to as the second period) partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results for the first period during one second period, and to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results for the second period during one first period. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while ensuring that the first and second periods are available as periods for management. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which various ratios are derived while ensuring that the first and second periods are managed, without excessively increasing the storage capacity of the first and second accumulation buffers 363 and 364.

The first and second periods both end when 6,000 games have elapsed, so the end conditions for the periods are the same. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration where management is performed using both the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364.

When a first period ends, a new first period begins immediately after that first period, and when a second period ends, a new second period begins immediately after that second period, and the difference between the first and second periods remains constant. This makes it possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the first and second periods while maintaining a constant deviation.

When a first period ends, the first cumulative buffer 363 is cleared to "0," and when a second period ends, the second cumulative buffer 364 is cleared to "0." This ensures that the first cumulative buffer 363 has a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second cumulative buffer 364 has a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the second period. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while keeping the capacity of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 low.

When the first period has elapsed, notification of the various ratios corresponding to that first period begins, and when the second period has elapsed, notification of the various ratios corresponding to that second period begins. This allows various ratios to be reported as the first and second periods elapse, making it possible to report various ratios in a situation that is relatively close to the current situation.

<Alternative to the 18th embodiment>
The number of accumulation buffers 363, 364 used to calculate various ratios for a 6000-game period is not limited to two, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364, but may be three, four, five, or more. If there are three accumulation buffers, both the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be off by 2000 games, if there are four accumulation buffers, both the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be off by 1500 games, and if there are five accumulation buffers, both the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be off by 1000 games.

- The period managed by the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not limited to 6,000 games, but may be a number of games less than 6,000, such as 4,000 games, or a number of games greater than 6,000, such as 8,000 games. Furthermore, it is not limited to a number of games that is divisible by the number of cumulative buffers 363, 364, such as 6,000 games, but may be a number of games that is not divisible by the number of cumulative buffers 363, 364, such as 6,001 games. If the number of games is not divisible, then when the total number of games managed by each accumulation buffer 363, 364 is A (specifically, 6001 games) and the number of accumulation buffers 363, 364 is B (specifically, 2), the configuration may be such that both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of games that is the quotient of A/B (specifically, 3000 games), or the number of games that is the quotient of A/B plus 1 (specifically, 3001 games).

- Instead of the cumulative total buffers 363, 364, ring buffers such as the first history memory 371 and second history memory 372 in the 19th embodiment described below may be used. The results of each game are stored as history information in the ring buffer corresponding to the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the ring buffer corresponding to the second cumulative total buffer 364, and this stored history information is used to calculate various ratios as in the 18th embodiment described above. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various ratios while allowing the first and second periods, which span 6,000 games, to partially overlap each other.

- The objects managed by the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are not limited to the above-mentioned ratios, and may instead be, for example, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games (in the 18th embodiment, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a) managed by these cumulative buffers 363, 364.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
As in the eighteenth embodiment, a configuration that uses the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 to partially overlap each management period and to notify the management results for each management period at a shorter cycle than the management period may be applied to the third embodiment. Figure 111 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. Note that explanations of the same configuration as in the third embodiment will basically be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a calculation result memory 131, similar to the third embodiment. These functions are the same as those of the third embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is also provided with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372. These first history memory 371 and second history memory 372 have the same configuration. Furthermore, although the first history memory 371 and second history memory 372 differ in overall data capacity, their basic configuration is a ring buffer similar to the history memory 117 in the third embodiment. Figure 112 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the first history memory 371 and second history memory 372.

Each history memory 371, 372 has a history area 371a, 372a for sequentially storing history information. Multiple pointer information items are set in the history areas 371a, 372a using consecutive numbers, and history information storage areas 371b, 372b are set in one-to-one correspondence with each pointer information item. The history information storage areas 371b, 372b can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 371b, 372b has a data capacity of 2 bytes, with 1 byte of data allocated as an area for storing RTC information and 1 byte of data allocated as an area for storing correspondence information. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information in response to signals input to the first through fifteenth buffers 122a-122o (actually the first through tenth buffers 122a-122j in this pachinko machine 10), the date and time information currently measured by the RTC 115 is first stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage areas 371b, 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. Then, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer 122a-122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a-123o corresponding to that buffer 122a-122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage areas 371b, 372b corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

The history information storage areas 371b, 372b are provided in a number sufficient to store all the history information when 30,000 game balls are fired. For example, if history information is generated a maximum of 40,000 times under normal use before 30,000 game balls are fired, then more than 40,000 history information storage areas 371b, 372b are provided. This makes it possible to store and retain history information up to the time at least 30,000 game balls are fired in each history memory 371, 372.

In addition to the history areas 371a and 372a, the history memories 371 and 372 also have pointer areas 371c and 372c. The pointer areas 371c and 372c store information that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the pointer information currently being written to in the history memories 371 and 372. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the pointer areas 371c and 372c are set with information specifying pointer information of "0" as the write target. Each time a new piece of history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the last pointer information is to be written and history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the last pointer information, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that pointer information of "0" is the write target. As a result, if an opportunity arises to store more history information than can be stored, the oldest history information stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b will be overwritten with new history information in order.

Furthermore, when various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using history memories 371, 372 and the calculation results are stored in calculation result memory 131, all history information storage areas 371b, 372b for history memories 371, 372 referenced during the calculation are cleared to "0," and the information in pointer areas 371c, 372c is updated so that pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been read from becoming the target of reading again.

By providing the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters using history information for the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. In this case, the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are used such that the start and end of the period to be managed are offset from each other, as with the cumulative buffers 363 and 364 in the 18th embodiment described above. Specifically, if the number of game balls discharged to be managed by each history memory 371 and 372 is A (specifically, 30,000 balls) and the number of history memories 371 and 372 is B (specifically, 2 balls), then both the start and end of the period to be managed are offset by the number of game balls discharged that is A/B (specifically, 15,000 balls). Furthermore, when a period to be managed in the first history memory 371 ends, the next period to be managed in the first history memory 371 begins with the release of the next gaming ball, and when a period to be managed in the second history memory 372 ends, the next period to be managed in the second history memory 372 begins with the release of the next gaming ball. Therefore, the periods to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 repeatedly occur with both the start and end of these periods shifted by a certain number of balls released.

Next, we will explain the processing configuration that enables management of game history using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (Figure 18).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112, out of the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, is set in a confirmation target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S5701). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116, out of the first through fifteenth correspondence areas 123a through 123o, that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for this identified number is set in the confirmation target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first through tenth correspondence areas 123a through 123j, and therefore in step S5701 the confirmation target counter is set to "10."

Then, it is determined whether the contents of the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, constitute a trigger for writing history information (step S5702). Specifically, if the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, among the first through fifteenth buffers 122a through 122o, has changed from "0" to "1," it is determined that a trigger for writing has occurred. Furthermore, if the current value of the counter to be checked is between "8" and "10," it is determined that a trigger for writing has occurred if the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked has changed from "1" to "0."

If a positive judgment is made in step S5702, RTC information, which is date and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S5703). Then, a write process to the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5704). In this write process, the pointer information in the history area 371a currently being written to is identified by referencing the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371, and the RTC information read in step S5703 is written to the history information storage area 371b in the history area 371a corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, if the correspondence information is any of the following: information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also the start information or end information is written to the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information being written.

Then, the target pointer is updated (step S5705). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is read and incremented by 1. A determination is made as to whether the pointer information after incrementing by 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 371a. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after incrementing by 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 371c as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 371c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

Then, it is determined whether the second cumulative waiting period has begun by determining whether the number of game balls discharged from the play area PA has reached 15,000 since the clearing process for the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 was executed (step S5706). In this embodiment, when the clearing process for the main RAM 65 is executed, a clear signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, and when the management IC 66 receives the clear signal from the main CPU 63, it executes the clearing process for the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. By executing this clearing process, the history areas 371a, 372a of each history memory 371, 372 are all cleared to "0", and the pointer areas 371c, 372c of each history memory 371, 372 are also cleared to "0". If an opportunity to write history information occurs thereafter, only the first history memory 371 is updated until the number of discharged items reaches 15,000. After the number of discharged items reaches 15,000, both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are updated each time an opportunity to write history information occurs.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5706, a write process to the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5707). In this write process, the pointer information in the history area 372a currently being written to is identified by referencing the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372, and the RTC information read in step S5703 is written to the history information storage area 372b of the history area 372a corresponding to the pointer information being written. Correspondence information is also read from the correspondence area 123a-123o corresponding to the current value of the counter being checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information being written. Furthermore, if the correspondence information is any of information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, not only the correspondence information but also start information or end information is written to the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information being written.

Then, the target pointer is updated (step S5708). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is read and incremented by 1. A determination is made as to whether the pointer information after incrementing by 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 372a. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after incrementing by 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 372c as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 372c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5702, a positive judgment is made in step S5706, or the processing of step S5708 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S5709). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S5710). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S5710: NO), the processing from step S5702 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "0" (step S5710: YES), the target switching processing is executed (step S5711).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the target switching process.

First, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been discharged from the play area PA (step S5801). If a game ball has been discharged (step S5801: YES), an increment process is performed on the total discharge counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S5802). In this increment process, the value of the number of game balls currently discharged from the play area PA is added to the total discharge counter. Then, in step S5803, it is determined whether the value of the total discharge counter is 15,000 x 2n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1). If the value of the total discharge counter is 15,000 x 2n, this means that a period of time subject to management using the first history memory 371 has ended. For example, if 30,000 game balls, 60,000 game balls, or 90,000 game balls have been discharged since the clear process of the first history memory 371 was executed, this indicates that a period of time subject to management using the first history memory 371 has ended.

If a positive determination is made in step S5803, a calculation process using the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5804). In this calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the first history memory 371. The content of this calculation of various parameters is the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (Figure 32) in the third embodiment. The various parameters resulting from this calculation are then written to the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, a process to clear the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5805). As a result, the history area 371a of the first history memory 371 is cleared to all "0"s, and the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S5803, it is determined whether the value of the total dispensed number counter is 15,000 x (2n + 1) (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1) (step S5806). If the value of the total dispensed number counter is 15,000 x (2n + 1), this means that a period of time subject to management using the second history memory 372 has ended. For example, if 45,000 game balls have been dispensed since the clearing process of the second history memory 372 was executed, if 75,000 game balls have been dispensed, or if 105,000 game balls have been dispensed, this will mark the end of a period of time subject to management using the second history memory 372.

If a positive determination is made in step S5806, a calculation process using the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5807). In this calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the second history memory 372. The content of this calculation of various parameters is the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power outage response process (Figure 32) in the third embodiment. The various parameters resulting from this calculation are then written to the calculation result memory 131. In this case, if other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. In addition, the current date and time information is read from the RTC 115, and the read date and time information are attached to the calculation result information written this time. This makes it possible to determine the timing of the calculation result information written this time.

Then, the second history memory 372 is cleared (step S5808). As a result, the history area 372a of the second history memory 372 is cleared to all "0"s, and the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0".

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The system is equipped with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372. The first history memory 371 is used to manage the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the play area PA, and the second history memory 372 is used to manage the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the play area PA. Furthermore, the period managed using the first history memory 371 (hereinafter also referred to as the first period) and the period managed using the second history memory 372 (hereinafter also referred to as the second period) partially overlap. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results for the first period during one second period, and to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results for the second period during one first period. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while ensuring that the first and second periods are available as periods for management. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the frequency with which various parameters are derived while ensuring that the first and second periods are managed, without excessively increasing the storage capacity of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

The first and second periods both end when 30,000 game balls have been discharged from the game area PA, and therefore have the same end conditions. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration where management is performed using both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

When a first period ends, a new first period starts immediately after that first period, and when a second period ends, a new second period starts immediately after that second period, and the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the first period and the second period while maintaining a constant deviation.

When a first period ends, the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0," and when a second period ends, the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0." This allows the first history memory 371 to have a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second history memory 372 to have a sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the second period. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while keeping the capacity of the first history memory 371 and second history memory 372 low.

<Alternative to the 19th embodiment>
The number of history memories 371, 372 used to calculate various parameters for the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is not limited to two, the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, but may be three, four, five, or more. If there are three, both the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be shifted by 10,000 balls, if there are four, both the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be shifted by 7,500 balls, and if there are five, both the start and end of the period managed by each history memory will be shifted by 6,000 balls.

- The period managed by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, and may be a number less than 30,000, such as 20,000, or a number greater than 30,000, such as 40,000. Furthermore, it is not limited to a number that is divisible by the number of history memories 371, 372, such as 30,000, and may be a number that is not divisible by the number of history memories 371, 372, such as 30,001. If the number is not divisible, then when the number of discharged items managed by each history memory 371, 372 is A (specifically, 30,001 items) and the number of history memories 371, 372 is B (specifically, 2 items), the configuration may be such that both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of items obtained by dividing A by B (specifically, 15,000 items), or the number of items obtained by adding 1 to the quotient of A/B (specifically, 15,001 items).

- Instead of the history memories 371, 372, a configuration may be adopted in which counters such as the first cumulative buffer 363 and second cumulative buffer 364 in the 18th embodiment are used. The counter corresponding to the first history memory 371 and the counter corresponding to the second history memory 372 each store the number of balls that have entered each entry area, and the stored number of balls is used to calculate various parameters as in the 19th embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various parameters while allowing the first period and the second period, which are the periods until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, to partially overlap each other.

- The configuration is not limited to using multiple history memories such as the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. For example, as in the third embodiment above, a single history area capable of storing history information over a long period may be used, and history information corresponding to a first period may be extracted from the history information stored in the history area to calculate various parameters, and history information corresponding to a second period that partially overlaps with the first period may be extracted to calculate various parameters. In this case, by providing a history area with a capacity sufficient to store history information for the period until 45,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, it is possible to extract history information corresponding to both the first and second periods.

- When writing history information to history memories 371, 372, the configuration is not limited to writing the history information to the area corresponding to the pointer information indicated in pointer areas 371c, 372c, and then updating the pointer information in pointer areas 371c, 372c. The area into which new history information is written may always be fixed, and the information stored in each area may be shifted sequentially when writing new history information. For example, if there are first to fifth areas, the area into which new history information is written may always be the first area, and when an opportunity arises to write new history information, the information may be shifted from the fourth area to the fifth area, the third area to the fourth area, the second area to the third area, or the first area to the second area, before the new history information is written to the first area.

<Other Embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The following alternative configurations may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the first embodiment and others described above, the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history), but this is not limited to this. Only some of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information. For example, only the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, and second operating opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. Even in this case, it is possible to understand the ball entry patterns of game balls over a specified period for the ball entry sections for which history information is stored.

(2) In the first embodiment and others described above, signal paths 118a-118c are set up to transmit information corresponding to the game ball's entry results, corresponding to the first entry port detection sensor 42a, the second entry port detection sensor 43a, and the third entry port detection sensor 44a, respectively. However, this is not limited to this, and information corresponding to the entry results for the same type of entry port may be transmitted as a single type of information, even in a configuration in which there are multiple entry ports of the same type and multiple entry port detection sensors corresponding to them. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, this is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be pre-stored in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute processing to have the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence information, which reduces the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(4) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, the transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a-122o to the management IC 66 is performed from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be capable of two-way communication, and the main CPU 63 may transmit the correspondence information to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting the transmission of the correspondence information is received from the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and configured to be used for both reading and writing. The correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped is stored and retained in the correspondence memory 116 even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This reduces the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a-122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a-118g for transmitting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a. However, this is not limited to this, and a dedicated signal path may be provided for transmitting the correspondence information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This allows the management IC 66 to determine what type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 based on the type of buffer 122a-122o that receives that information.

(6) In the first embodiment and other embodiments, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, this is not limited to this, and information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on historical information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly control the notification means, as in the eleventh embodiment, so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the various received parameters are issued. Alternatively, the main CPU 63 may be configured to transmit commands corresponding to the contents of the various received parameters to the audio and light-emitting control device 81, thereby enabling notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters to be issued using the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display device 41.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 may calculate various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and pattern display unit 41, etc. In this case, when the amusement hall opens for business, it may be possible to check whether the ball entry pattern in the game area PA on the previous business day was normal.

(8) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 result in an abnormal result, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to prevent play from starting until a prohibition cancellation operation is performed. Examples of configurations that prevent play from starting include prohibiting the release of game balls, disabling each ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a, or not executing the win/loss determination process even if a win occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The prohibition cancellation operation may also be performed by restarting the power to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch turned ON, or by operating an operating means that becomes operable when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11. This makes it possible to prevent play from continuing in a situation where the game ball's entry pattern in the play area PA is abnormal.

(9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using that history information may not be performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the calculation of various parameters may be performed by the operator performing the reading operation using the read history information, or the calculation of various parameters may be performed by the reading device using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the functions for storing history information and calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments may be provided by the main CPU 63, the dispensing CPU 92, or the audio and light control device 81. If the dispensing CPU 92 or the audio and light control device 81 has these functions, the information on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a-48a will be sent from the main CPU 63 to the control entity that has those functions.

(11) The management IC 66 may be provided with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, and may be configured to allow the management IC 66 to calculate various parameters using historical information and output historical information or various parameters even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to read historical information and various parameters using a reading device even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(12) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is configured to also serve as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters using a reading device, this is not limited to this, and the terminal used to read history information or various parameters using a reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position on the main control board 61 separate from the MPU 62.

(13) In the above embodiments, the correspondence memory 116, history memory 117, and calculation result memory 131 are not limited to configurations in which they are provided as non-volatile storage means such as flash memory. For example, any of these memories 116, 117, and 131 may be provided as volatile storage means that require a power supply to store and retain information, and backup power may be supplied to that memory so that information is stored and retained even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for that memory, or backup power may be supplied to that memory from the power supply and launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65.

(14) The configuration is not limited to one in which various parameters are calculated using history information; instead of storing and retaining history information, various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new game ball is detected by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters increases, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at any time.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which it includes a management CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU and performs storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. A configuration in which a hardware circuit designed to perform these functions is formed in the management IC 66 may also be employed. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment described above, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a gaming ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a-48a, it stores correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and also stores the information of the RTC 115 at that time in the history memory 117. Furthermore, for example, in the ninth embodiment described above, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a gaming ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a-48a, it increments the value of a counter corresponding to the buffer that received the signal by one. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs, such as in the first embodiment, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using the history information at that time. Furthermore, when a trigger occurs to output to the read terminal 102, the hardware circuit outputs the various parameters that are the calculation results, as well as the history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of storing the information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the opening and closing execution mode may be stored as history information, the timing of the transition to the opening and closing execution mode and the timing of the end may be stored as history information, the occurrence of a transition to the high-frequency support mode may be stored as history information, or the occurrence of a specified abnormality may be stored as history information. Furthermore, the probability of transition to the opening and closing execution mode may be calculated using the above-mentioned history information, the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode may be calculated, or the frequency of occurrence of a specified abnormality may be calculated. Furthermore, the history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be configured as separate chips, as separate boards, or as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the outlet 24a is counted, while history information including RTC information may be stored for game balls entering bonus-triggering entry sections, such as the general entry section 31, the special electric entry device 32, the first actuation section 33, and the second actuation section 34, which trigger the payout of prize balls and the win/loss determination process. This makes it possible to extract the history of game balls entering bonus-triggering entry sections, and to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each bonus-triggering entry section relative to the total number of game balls dispensed.

(19) The configuration may include items other than those described in the above embodiments that are recorded as history information. For example, the configuration may be such that at least one of the following events is stored as history information: the lower tray 56a becoming full, the timing at which the full state began, and the timing at which the full state was released; the configuration may be such that at least one of the following events is stored as history information: the tank 75 becoming ball-free, the timing at which the ball-free state began, and the timing at which the ball-free state was released; and the configuration may be such that at least one of the following events is stored as history information: the dispensing device 76 becoming abnormal, the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 began, and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment and other embodiments described above, the correspondence between the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 and the output instruction signal is preset during the design stage of the management IC 66. However, this is not limited to this, and the correspondence between the 16th buffer 122p and the output instruction signal may be recognized by the management IC 66 when a type identification command is sent from the main CPU 63. In this case, it is not necessary to preset in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each buffer 122a to 122p and the type of signal input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls that enter a designated entry point when the front door frame 14 is open may be stored as history information, and the number of game balls determined using this history information may be output to a reading device. This makes it possible to determine the number of game balls that enter a designated entry point when the front door frame 14 is open, and to determine whether or not there is any cheating. Furthermore, the number of game balls that enter a designated entry point when the front door frame 14 is open may be calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and an abnormality alert may be issued if the calculated number of game balls is abnormal. This makes it possible to deal with cheating by illegally opening the front door frame 14 and allowing game balls to enter a designated entry point.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment and the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that of the first embodiment and the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process to change the output state of each signal will match the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for each buffer 122a to 122o.

(24) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64 to the outside, the configuration may be such that either the program or the data can be selectively output to the outside, or such that only a specified program can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. Note that a possible configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside is one in which the main CPU 63 selects information to be output to the outside from the selected information received from the reading device via the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside.

(25) The other information to be output externally through the read terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, if an abnormality occurs, history information about the abnormality occurrence may be stored, and the stored history information may be output externally through the read terminal 102.

(26) Individual detection sensors 42a-48a are provided for each of the outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is determined by adding up the numbers of game balls detected by these detection sensors 42a-48a. However, this is not limited to this configuration. For example, a passage area may be provided through which all game balls discharged from the game area PA pass one by one, and a discharge detection sensor may be provided to detect game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, the detection results of the discharge detection sensor may be used to determine the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. Furthermore, in this configuration, as in the above embodiments, by providing detection sensors 42a-47a for detecting the number of game balls that have entered each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry section to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio and light emitting control device 81 based on commands sent from the main control device 60, a configuration in which the display control device 82 controls the audio and light emitting control device 81 based on commands sent from the main control device 60 may be adopted. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio and light emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, or the functions of one of these control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio and light emitting control device 81 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio and light emitting control device 81 to the display control device 82 may be arbitrary.

(28) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, etc.

The present invention can also be applied to non-ball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple symbols circumferentially printed on them, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and which award players a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of symbols appears on an active line visible through a display window after the reels stop when the stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine main body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, is equipped with a storage section and a take-up device, and the reels begin to rotate when the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the take-up device.

When applying the present invention to slot machines or gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines, for example, the results of the lottery process for winning roles executed when a game is started by operating the start lever may be stored as historical information, and the historical information may be used to calculate the actual probability of winning for each role. Alternatively, when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, this may be stored as historical information and the historical information may be used to calculate the actual probability of transition to the special gaming state. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of games played in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. Furthermore, this historical information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, and notifications corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be issued by the gaming machine itself.

(29) The characteristic features of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to one another in any combination. For example, the characteristic features of the first embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the twelfth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic features of the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic features of the sixteenth embodiment and the seventeenth embodiment may be combined; the characteristic features of the eighteenth embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment may be combined; and the characteristic features of the first to seventeenth embodiments may be combined to apply any combination of the features of the other embodiments.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are indicated in parentheses, etc. as appropriate, but the invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning entry 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
A specific storage execution means (a function for executing ball entry detection processing in the main CPU 63) for storing corresponding information in a specific storage means (main RAM 65) when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the processing of step S217 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the processing of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for executing a process to award a bonus to a player based on the information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means being stored in the specific storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a predetermined storage execution means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) that stores predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of gaming balls that enter the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of the gaming balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to be identified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine.

According to Feature A1, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, corresponding information is stored in a specific storage means, and a bonus is awarded to the player if that information is stored in the specific storage means. This allows the player to play in the hope of a gaming ball entering the predetermined entry means. In this configuration, when a gaming ball enters the predetermined entry means, corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and predetermined information that allows the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means to be determined by the gaming machine's control means or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the specific storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, because the predetermined information is stored and retained in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. A gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of a process for awarding a bonus to the player.

According to feature A2, the specified information does not trigger the execution of a process to grant a bonus to a player, making it possible to store and retain the specified information in an information format intended to appropriately manage the manner in which game balls enter the specified ball entry means.

Feature A3. The game area is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
The gaming machine described in feature A1 or A2 is characterized in that the predetermined storage execution means stores information corresponding to a gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means when the gaming ball has entered the specific ball entry means, and stores specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means, which enables the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific ball entry means to be identified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine.

According to Feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined scoring means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific scoring means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the scoring patterns of game balls into the predetermined scoring means but also the scoring patterns of game balls into the specific scoring means. Furthermore, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the scoring frequency ratio between the predetermined scoring means and the specific scoring means.

Feature A4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that all ball entry means for discharging game balls that have entered the game area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are ball entry means for storing information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering the game area in the predetermined storage means.

According to Feature A4, all ball entry means that eject game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in a specified storage means, making it possible to manage the frequency of balls entering any ball entry means using the information stored in the specified storage means. Also, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls that enter a specified ball entry means to the number of game balls that are ejected from the game area using the information stored in the specified storage means.

Feature A5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A5, the specified information includes information corresponding to the timing at which a gaming ball entered the specified ball entry means, and by using the specified information, it is possible to obtain a detailed understanding of the history of gaming balls entering the specified ball entry means.

Feature A6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of gaming balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A6, the specified information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the specified ball entry means, making it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the specified ball entry means while minimizing the information volume of the specified information.

Feature A7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A6, characterized in that the predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information in the predetermined storage means that enables identification of whether a gaming ball entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined circumstance (a function for executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment).

Feature A7 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature A8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A7, characterized in that it is equipped with external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature A8 makes it possible to read information stored in a specified storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to analyze the manner in which gaming balls enter the specified ball entry means.

Feature A9: A program output means (a function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) is provided that outputs a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102),
The gaming machine described in Feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output unit to output the information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature A9 makes it possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means using an information output unit for externally outputting a control program. This makes it possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

Feature A10. A gaming machine as described in Feature A9, characterized in that it includes means (a function for executing the processing of step S902 in the main CPU 63) for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and for outputting information corresponding to the identification result.

According to Feature A10, in a configuration in which information stored in a specified storage means is output externally using an information output unit for outputting a control program externally, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output externally is the control program or information stored in the specified storage means, and then outputs the identified information externally. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature A11. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to Feature A11, the second control means, which is provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means, has a predetermined memory execution means, making it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing an extreme increase in the processing load on the first control means.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature A13. The game area is provided with specific ball entry means (outlet 24a, general entry port 31, special electric entry device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) through which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
The predetermined storage execution means stores, in the predetermined storage means, information corresponding to a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means, so that specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of game balls that have entered the specific ball entry means or the frequency of the game balls entering the specific ball entry means to be identified by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means
A first transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means;
A second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized by comprising:

According to Feature A13, not only predetermined information corresponding to predetermined scoring means but also specific information corresponding to specific scoring means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the scoring patterns of game balls into predetermined scoring means, but also the scoring patterns of game balls into specific scoring means. Furthermore, by using both predetermined information and specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of scoring frequencies between predetermined scoring means and specific scoring means.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, first information is sent to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, second information is sent to the second control means using the second signal path. This ensures that the type of information sent corresponds to the signal path, simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the second control means.

Feature A14. The gaming machine described in Feature A13 is characterized in that the first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function to output one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function to output one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means via a third path, enabling the second control means to identify whether a predetermined situation exists.

Feature A14 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which game balls enter predetermined entry means and specific entry means. Furthermore, because the identification information that enables identification of whether a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means via the third path, it is possible to simplify the configuration for the second control means to distinguish the identification information from other information, such as the first information and the second information.

Feature A15. A gaming machine as described in Feature A13 or A14, wherein the first control means is equipped with identification information transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature A15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined goal-goaling method and the second information corresponds to a specific goal-goaling method is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, eliminating the need for the second control means to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine described in Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means begins.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is initiated, identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means or a specific ball entry means, the second control means can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A15 or A16, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature A17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, which simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature A18. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A15 to A17, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, is equipped with a means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the goal-scoring means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the goal-scoring means corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means using a third path,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A15 to A18, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation exists, even without receiving the identification information.

Feature A19 makes it possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and manage the manner in which game balls enter predetermined entry means and specific entry means. Furthermore, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A13 to A19, wherein the second control means is provided with a greater number of receiving units (buffers 122a-122p) capable of receiving information from the first control means than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

According to Feature A20, the second control means is provided with a greater number of receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. This makes it possible to accommodate changes in the number of types of information depending on the model of gaming machine without changing the configuration of the receiving units. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables recognition of the correspondence to the predetermined ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine;
A second external output means (a function for executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) for outputting to a device outside the gaming machine a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that enables recognition that the specific information corresponds to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized in that it comprises:

According to Feature A21, it is possible to read information stored in a predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to identify the manner in which a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means and the manner in which a gaming ball enters a specific entry means. Furthermore, when this external output is performed, a combination of the predetermined information and information that enables recognition that the information corresponds to the predetermined entry means is output to the outside, and a combination of specific information and information that enables recognition that the information corresponds to the specific entry means is output to the outside. This makes it possible to identify each entry mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A21, characterized in that it comprises information calculation means that uses the predetermined information to calculate status information corresponding to the status of game balls entering the game area during a predetermined period (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63).

According to Feature A22, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using predetermined information stored in a predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information.

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that can identify whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined circumstance (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in Feature A22 is characterized in that the information calculation means is equipped with a means for calculating the status information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the entry of a gaming ball into the specified ball entry means in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63).

Feature A23 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and calculate status information corresponding to the game ball's entry status.

Feature A24. A gaming machine as described in Feature A22 or A23, characterized in that it includes a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the processing of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, making it less likely that the specified information will exceed the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature A25. A gaming machine as described in Feature A22 or A23, wherein even when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to Feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the specified information used to calculate the mode information is stored and held in a specified storage means. Therefore, when reading out the mode information and analyzing the ball's entry mode, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the specified information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature A26. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A25, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage and execution means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage and execution means is started.

According to feature A26, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature A27. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A26, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means having the specific storage and execution means.

According to feature A27, the status information is calculated each time a recurring calculation trigger occurs while operating power is being supplied to the control means, making it possible to manage the status information in detail within one business day.

Feature A28: The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main-side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A27, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when no game is being played, and when game play is started while the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to Feature A28, because the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of mode information calculation simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when no game is being played, and is resumed from the state before the stop when game play begins. This makes it possible to exclude situations where no game is being played from the calculation of mode information, and to appropriately derive mode information when game play is being played.

Feature A29. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A28, characterized in that it is equipped with external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A29, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering the game.

Feature A30. The gaming machine described in Feature A29, wherein the external output means, when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine, outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A30, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read the mode information and analyze the ball's entry mode, and to refer not only to the mode information but also to the specified information that served as the basis for calculating that mode information.

Feature A31. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature A29 or A30, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to Feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, it is possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature A32: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A31, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112) that sequentially stores the status information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131).

Feature A32 allows the gaming machine to accumulate status information. This makes it possible to read out multiple status information at once when managing the status of game balls entering the machine.

Feature A33. The result storage and execution means
a means for determining whether the aspect information is information to be stored (a function for executing the process of step S1603 in the management-side CPU 112);
a means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112);
The gaming machine described in feature A32 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature A33, when the behavior information of the calculated result corresponds to the information to be stored, that behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, thereby reducing the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. A gaming machine according to Feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means, along with the mode information.

According to feature A34, the behavior information is accompanied by information that identifies the time when the behavior information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing when the information was calculated.

Feature A35. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features A22 to A34, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to Feature A35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an information calculation means separately from the first control means, it is possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature A36. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A22 to A35, characterized in that it is equipped with notification control means (a function that executes the processing of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) to notify content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature A36, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the details corresponding to the mode information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other personnel to understand the management results of the game ball's entry mode without having to read the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine described in feature A36 is characterized in that the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature A37 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means is equipped with the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to Feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, it is possible to consolidate the function of calculating status information and the function of issuing a notification corresponding to the calculation results into the first control means.

Feature A39. The gaming machine described in any one of Features A36 to A38, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the status information is within a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the status information is within a second range.

According to feature A39, rather than reporting the status information as is, content corresponding to the range in which the status information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the reporting means from having too many reporting patterns, and reduces the load on controlling the reporting means.

Feature A40. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A39, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting corresponding information when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to Feature A40, in a configuration in which corresponding information is output externally when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, the predetermined information is stored in a predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to easily determine the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the corresponding information, while accurately determining the number and frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature A41. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage and execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature A41 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of the following configurations may be applied to the configurations of Features A1 to A41: Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group B>
Feature B1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
an information calculation means for calculating status information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the control CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the control CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the control CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1802 in the control CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2005 in the control CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence pattern of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculations using the specified information.

Feature B2: The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that enables identification of whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in Feature B1 is characterized in that the information calculation means is equipped with a means for calculating the status information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the occurrence of the specified event in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63).

Feature B2 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results over a specific period of time.

Feature B3. A gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the processing of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

According to feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, the specified information stored in the specified storage means is erased, making it less likely that the specified information will exceed the storage capacity of the specified storage means.

Feature B4. A gaming machine as described in Feature B1 or B2, characterized in that even when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used to calculate the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to Feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used to calculate the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, when reading out the mode information and analyzing the results of games over a predetermined period, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the predetermined information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature B5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B4, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature B5, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature B6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62).

According to feature B6, the status information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means, making it possible to manage the status information in detail within one business day.

Feature B7: The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when no game is being played, and when game play is started while the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to Feature B7, because the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of mode information calculation simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when no game is being played, and is resumed when game play begins from the state before the measurement of the predetermined period of time was stopped. This makes it possible to exclude situations where no game is being played from the calculation of mode information, and to appropriately derive mode information when game play is being played.

Feature B8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B7, characterized in that it is equipped with external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature B8, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering the game.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B8, wherein the external output means, when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine, outputs the predetermined information to the device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read the mode information and analyze the ball's entry mode, and to refer not only to the mode information but also to the specified information that served as the basis for calculating that mode information.

Feature B10. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature B8 or B9, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

According to Feature B10, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, it becomes possible to output mode information to a device external to the gaming machine based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature B11: The information calculation means calculates the aspect information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that it is equipped with a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) that sequentially stores the status information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131).

Feature B11 allows the gaming machine to accumulate behavior information. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature B12. A gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means if the mode information is information to be stored (a function for executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature B12, when the behavior information of the calculation result corresponds to the information to be stored, that behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, thereby reducing the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. A gaming machine as described in Feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means, along with the mode information.

According to feature B13, the behavior information is accompanied by information that identifies the time when the behavior information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each behavior information while knowing when the information was calculated.

Feature B14: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B13, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

According to Feature B14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an information calculation means separately from the first control means, it is possible to have the second control means calculate the mode information based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature B15. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B14, characterized in that it is equipped with notification control means (a function that executes the processing of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) to notify content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature B15, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the behavior information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other person in charge to understand the results of gaming management over a specified period of time without having to read the behavior information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16: The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to Feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature B16 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized in that it is provided with:

Feature B17 enables the first control means to have a function for calculating status information and a function for issuing a notification corresponding to the calculation results to be consolidated in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having a predetermined storage means separate from the first control means.

Feature B18. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B15 to B17, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the status information is within a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the status information is within a second range.

According to feature B18, the status information is not reported as is, but rather content corresponding to the range in which the status information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load on controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. A predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing processing in steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing corresponding information in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment) when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, thereby storing the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means;
an information calculation means for calculating, using the predetermined information, state information corresponding to the state of game balls entering the game area during a predetermined period (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature B19, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, a storage process for the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, because the predetermined information is stored and retained in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

Feature B20. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage and execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature B20 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that the configurations of Features B1 to B20 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, using the predetermined information, aspect information corresponding to the game results for a predetermined period (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63);
a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (a calculation result memory 131);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, because the predetermined information is stored and retained in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculations using the specified information.

In addition, it is possible to accumulate behavior information on the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature C2. A gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means if the mode information is information to be stored (a function for executing the processing of step S1604 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature C2, when the behavior information of the calculation result corresponds to the information to be stored, that behavior information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the behavior information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, thereby reducing the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. A gaming machine according to Feature C1 or C2, wherein the result storage and execution means stores information that enables identification of the time when the mode information was calculated in the calculation result storage means, along with the mode information.

According to feature C3, the behavior information is accompanied by information that identifies the time when the behavior information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of behavior information while knowing when it was calculated.

Feature C4: The predetermined storage execution means includes a means for storing information that enables identification of whether the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112 in the first to seventh embodiments, a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2203 in the management CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the information calculation means is equipped with a means for calculating the status information by extracting or excluding the specified information corresponding to the occurrence of the specified event in the specified situation (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63).

Feature C4 makes it possible to distinguish whether a specific situation exists and calculate behavior information corresponding to the game results over a specific period of time.

Feature C5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C4, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means (a function for executing the processing of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment).

Feature C5 enables the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to be erased when the mode information is calculated, thereby making it less likely that the predetermined information will exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means.

Feature C6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C5, characterized in that even when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used to calculate the mode information remains stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature C6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used to calculate the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, when reading out the mode information and analyzing the results of games over a predetermined period, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the predetermined information that was the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature C7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C6, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature C7, the status information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, making it possible to manage the status information on a business day basis.

Feature C8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C7, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can occur repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means (MPU 62).

According to feature C8, the status information is calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs, which occurs repeatedly while operating power is being supplied to the control means, making it possible to manage the status information in detail within one business day.

Feature C9: The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the period measurement means stops measuring the period when no game is being played, and when game play is started while the period measurement has been stopped, resumes measuring the period from the state before it was stopped.

According to feature C9, because the mode information is calculated each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of mode information calculation simply by adjusting the predetermined period of time. In this case, measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when no game is being played, and is resumed from the state before the stop when game play begins. This makes it possible to exclude situations where no game is being played from the calculation of mode information, and to appropriately derive mode information when game play is being played.

Feature C10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C9, characterized in that it is equipped with external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs the behavior information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature C10, the state information is output to a device external to the gaming machine, making it possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering the game.

Feature C11. The gaming machine described in Feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature C11, not only the mode information but also the specified information is output to a device external to the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read the mode information and analyze the ball's entry mode, and to refer not only to the mode information but also to the specified information that served as the basis for calculating that mode information.

Feature C12. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature C10 or C11, characterized in that the external output means outputs the status information to a device external to the gaming machine when the second control means receives output instruction information transmitted from the first control means.

Feature C12 enables the processing load of the first control means to be reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, and enables mode information to be output to a device external to the gaming machine based on instructions from the first control means.

Feature C13. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C12, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the status information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means.

Feature C13 enables the second control means to calculate the mode information based on instructions from the first control means in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an information calculation means separate from the first control means.

Feature C14. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C13, characterized in that it is equipped with notification control means (a function that executes the processing of steps S2605, S2607, and S2608 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) to notify content corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature C14, the gaming machine itself notifies the user of the content corresponding to the behavior information. This allows the manager of the gaming hall or other person in charge to understand the results of gaming management over a specified period of time without having to read the behavior information from the gaming machine.

Feature C15: The control board (main control board 61) on which the notification control means is provided is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine described in feature C14 is characterized in that the notification means is provided on the control board.

Feature C15 makes it difficult for unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature C16: A first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (control CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means is provided with the information calculation means and the notification control means.

Feature C16 enables the first control means to have a function for calculating status information and a function for issuing a notification corresponding to the calculation results to be consolidated in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having a predetermined storage means separate from the first control means.

Feature C17. The gaming machine described in any one of Features C14 to C16, wherein the notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the status information is within a first range, and controls the notification means to execute a second notification when the status information is within a second range.

According to feature C17, the behavior information is not reported as is, but rather content corresponding to the range in which the behavior information is included is reported. This makes it possible to prevent the notification means from having too many notification patterns, and reduces the load on controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. A predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning opening 31, special winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
a predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing processing in steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing corresponding information in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment) when a gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, thereby storing the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, state information corresponding to the state of game balls entering the game area during a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments, a function for executing the processes of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management CPU 112; in the third embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management CPU 112; in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112; in the seventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2005 in the management CPU 112; and in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63);
a result storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) for sequentially storing the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means (a calculation result memory 131);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C18, when a gaming ball enters a predetermined entry means, a storage process for the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number or frequency of gaming balls entering the predetermined entry means, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which gaming balls enter the predetermined entry means. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game ball's entrance behavior itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculation using the specified information.

In addition, it is possible to accumulate behavior information on the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out multiple behavior information at once when managing the behavior of game results over a specified period of time.

Feature C19. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined storage and execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature C19 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the specified storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features C1 to C19. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A first storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function for executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment) when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game;
a second storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh embodiments, and a function for executing processing in steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) for storing specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) in the specified storage means when a specific event occurs as a result of a game;
a first external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event;
a second external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the control CPU 112) for outputting the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, it is possible to read information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to identify the occurrence mode of a predetermined event and the occurrence mode of a specific event. Furthermore, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output to the outside in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to a predetermined event, and the specific information is output to the outside in a manner that makes it possible to recognize that the specific information corresponds to a specific event. This makes it possible to identify the occurrence mode of each event using the information read from the predetermined storage means, even if the second control means does not process the information.

Feature D2. A gaming machine as described in Feature D1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting response information corresponding to the occurrence of the specified event.

According to Feature D2, in a configuration in which corresponding information is output externally when a predetermined event occurs, the predetermined information is stored in a predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to easily determine the number of occurrences and frequency of a predetermined event by using the corresponding information, while accurately determining the number of occurrences and frequency of a predetermined event by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature D3. A gaming machine as described in Feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is count information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to feature D3, the specified information is count information on the number of times a specified event has occurred, and the specific information is count information on the number of times a specific event has occurred, making it possible to manage the occurrence patterns of specified events and specific events while minimizing the information volume of the specified information and specific information.

Feature D4: A program output means (a function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) is provided that outputs a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102),
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the first external output means and the second external output means use the information output unit to output information stored in the specified storage means to a device external to the gaming machine.

Feature D4 makes it possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means using an information output unit for externally outputting a control program. This makes it possible to externally output information stored in a specified storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming too complicated.

Feature D5. A gaming machine as described in Feature D4, characterized in that it is equipped with selection means (a function for executing the processing of step S902 in the main CPU 63) that identifies whether the information to be output from the information output unit is information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and causes the information corresponding to the identification result to be output.

According to Feature D5, in a configuration in which information stored in a specified storage means is output externally using an information output unit for outputting a control program externally, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output externally is the control program or information stored in the specified storage means, and then outputs the identified information externally. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature D6. The gaming machine described in Feature D5, wherein the selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit.

According to feature D6, the information to be output from the information output unit is identified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration for selecting the information to be output.

Feature D7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D4 to D6, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that pre-stores the control program includes the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means.

Feature D7 makes it possible to centralize the signal paths to the information output unit within the chip. This makes it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal paths to the information output unit, while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features D1 to D7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. A program output means (a function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit (read terminal 102);
an information output unit (a function for executing an external output process in the management CPU 112) for outputting special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Feature E1 makes it possible to output special information externally using the information output unit used to output the control program externally. This makes it possible to output special information externally without complicating the configuration.

Feature E2. A gaming machine as described in Feature E1, characterized in that it is equipped with selection means (a function for executing the processing of step S902 in the main CPU 63) that identifies whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, and causes the information corresponding to the identification result to be output.

According to Feature E2, in a configuration in which special information is output externally using an information output unit for outputting a control program externally, the gaming machine identifies whether the information to be output externally is the control program or the special information, and then outputs the identified information externally. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is used for both purposes.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, wherein the selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit.

According to feature E3, the information to be output from the information output unit is identified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration for selecting the information to be output.

Feature E4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features E1 to E3, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main ROM 64) that pre-stores the control program includes the information output unit and the information output means.

Feature E4 makes it possible to centralize the signal paths to the information output unit within the chip. This makes it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal paths to the information output unit, while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features E1 to E4. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. Equipped with a first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) for awarding a bonus to a player when a predetermined event occurs;
An information transmission means (a function of executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) that transmits predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
The second control means, when receiving the predetermined event information, stores the corresponding information in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main RAM 65 in the tenth embodiment), thereby storing predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the number of occurrences or frequency of the predetermined event to be identified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment).

According to feature F1, a bonus is awarded to a player when a predetermined event occurs. This allows players to play in the hope that the predetermined event will occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and predetermined information that allows the number of times or frequency of the predetermined event to be determined by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. This allows information for managing the number of times or frequency of the predetermined event to be stored and maintained in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence pattern of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and maintaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Furthermore, by having a second control means provided separately from the first control means having the bonus granting means and a predetermined memory execution means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without excessively increasing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F2, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means.

Feature F3. The predetermined storage execution means, when a specific event occurs, executes a storage process of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) that enables the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine to identify the number of times or frequency of the specific event to be generated is stored in the predetermined storage means;
The first control means
a first transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when the predetermined event occurs;
A second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when the specific event occurs;
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature F3, not only predetermined information corresponding to predetermined events but also specific information corresponding to specific events is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the occurrence patterns of predetermined events but also the occurrence patterns of specific events. Furthermore, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequencies between predetermined events and specific events.

Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, first information is sent to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, second information is sent to the second control means using the second signal path. This ensures that the type of information sent corresponds to the signal path, simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the second control means.

Feature F4. The gaming machine described in Feature F3 is characterized in that the first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function to output one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function to output one of the open/close execution mode signal, high frequency support mode signal, and door open signal in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means via a third path, enabling the second control means to identify whether a predetermined situation exists.

Feature F4 makes it possible to distinguish whether a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence of a predetermined event and the occurrence of a specific event. Furthermore, because the identification information that enables identification of whether a predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means via the third path, it is possible to simplify the configuration for the second control means to distinguish the identification information from other information, such as the first information and the second information.

Feature F5. A gaming machine described in Feature F3 or F4, wherein the first control means is equipped with identification information transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to the specific event.

According to feature F5, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, eliminating the need for the second control means to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine described in Feature F5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means begins.

According to feature F6, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is initiated, the first control means transmits identification information to the second control means. Therefore, in situations where a predetermined event or a specific event may occur, the second control means can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature F7. The gaming machine described in Feature F5 or F6, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature F7, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, which simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature F8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F5 to F7, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes means for storing correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112).

According to feature F8, the second control means stores the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event. This eliminates the need to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to identify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature F9. The first control means is equipped with third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means using a third path,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F5 to F8, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation exists, even without receiving the identification information.

Feature F9 makes it possible to distinguish whether or not a predetermined situation exists and to manage the occurrence of a predetermined event and the occurrence of a specific event. Furthermore, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature F10 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that the configurations of Features F1 to F10 may also be combined with one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, feature group D, feature group E, and feature group F can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out to the tray storage section from, for example, a payout device. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be managed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. First control means (main CPU 63),
a second control means (control CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means
a first transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a first event occurs;
a second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) for transmitting second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a second event occurs;
an identification information transmitting means (a function of executing a recognition process in the main CPU 63) that transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when a first event occurs, first information is transmitted to the second control means via the first signal path, and when a second event occurs, second information is transmitted to the second control means via the second signal path. This ensures that the type of information transmitted corresponds to the signal path, simplifying the configuration for distinguishing between types of information in the second control means.

In addition, because identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, there is no need for the second control means to store the correspondence between these pieces of information in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means begins.

According to feature G2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is initiated, identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, in a situation where a game ball may enter a predetermined ball entry means or a specific ball entry means, the second control means can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature G3. A gaming machine described in Feature G1 or G2, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path.

According to feature G3, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, which simplifies the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information.

Feature G4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that the second control means, when receiving the identification information, includes means for storing correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) that enables identification that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112).

According to feature G4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the second control means to identify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the second control means each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the first information and the second information.

Feature G5. The first control means is provided with a third transmission means (a function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63 in the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, and a function of outputting any one of the open/close execution mode signal, the high frequency support mode signal, and the door open signal in the main CPU 63 in the second embodiment) that transmits third information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists to the second control means using a third path,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the specified situation exists, even without receiving the identification information.

Feature G5 makes it possible to manage the occurrence of the first event and the occurrence of the second event by distinguishing whether or not a predetermined situation exists. Furthermore, the fact that the third information is information that can identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists can be identified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature G6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G5, characterized in that the number of signal paths capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means is greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature G6 provides a greater number of signal paths than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. This makes it possible to accommodate changes in the number of types of information depending on the model of gaming machine without changing the signal path configuration. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Feature G7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features G1 to G7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group G can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out to the tray storage section from, for example, a payout device. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to have an optimal communication configuration, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in a predetermined storage means (the normal counter area 171, the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the high frequency support mode counter area 173 in the thirteenth embodiment), so that predetermined information (numerical information measured in each counter 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, 173a to 173e in the thirteenth embodiment) is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3205 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of step S3504 of the master CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information corresponding to the game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
A limiting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S3809 of the main CPU 63 in the fourteenth embodiment) that limits the progress of the game when the mode information is derived by the information deriving means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence pattern of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine uses the specified information stored in the specified storage means to derive behavior information corresponding to the game results over a specified period. This makes it possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game results over a specified period, for example.

In addition, when mode information is derived, game progress is restricted. This makes it possible to derive mode information in situations that differ from those in which normal gameplay occurs. This eliminates the need to parallelize normal game progress and mode information derivation, making it possible to reduce processing load.

Feature H2. A gaming machine as described in Feature H1, wherein the restriction means restricts the execution of at least some of the processes for progressing the game.

Feature H2 limits the execution of at least some of the processes for progressing the game when mode information is derived, thereby preventing an extreme increase in the number of processes per unit time when mode information is derived.

Feature H3. The gaming machine described in Feature H1 or H2, wherein the information deriving means derives the mode information after the progress of the game has been restricted by the restricting means.

According to feature H3, by deriving the behavior information after the progress of the game has been restricted, it is possible to derive the behavior information in a situation where no new predetermined events occur as the game progresses.

Feature H4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) that launches game balls toward the game area;
predetermined ball entry means (outlet 24a, general winning entry 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
Equipped with
The predetermined storage execution means stores the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means by executing storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means as the predetermined event,
The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the limiting means limits the launching of gaming balls by the launching means.

According to feature H4, the mode information is derived after the release of game balls is restricted, making it possible to derive mode information in situations where the entry of game balls into the specified ball entry means, which is the trigger for changing the mode information, is restricted.

Feature H5. The information deriving means derives the mode information after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the limiting means restricted the launch of game balls by the launching means,
A gaming machine described in feature H4, characterized in that the specified period is set to a period longer than the longest period expected to be required for a gaming ball launched from the launching means to enter the specified ball entry means.

According to feature H5, when the mode information is derived, the mode information is derived after a period of time longer than the longest expected period of time required from when the launch of a gaming ball is restricted until the gaming ball launched from the launching means enters the predetermined ball entry means has elapsed. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the gaming ball is not sure to enter the predetermined ball entry means, which would trigger a change in the mode information.

Feature H6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H5, wherein the restriction means restricts the progress of the game based on the occurrence of an opportunity to derive the mode information, and does not restrict the progress of the game even if the opportunity to derive the mode information occurs while a specific action is being performed on the gaming machine.

According to feature H6, while a specific action is being performed on the gaming machine, progress of the game is not restricted even if a trigger for deriving mode information occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a specific action from being hindered by the occurrence of a trigger for deriving mode information.

Feature H7. A gaming machine as described in Feature H6, wherein the restriction means restricts game progress after the specific action ends if an opportunity to derive the mode information occurs while the specific action is being performed on the gaming machine.

According to feature H7, if a trigger for deriving mode information occurs while a specific action is being performed on the gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the specific action is completed. This makes it possible to derive mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the trigger for deriving mode information, without impeding the execution of the specific action.

Feature H8. A lottery processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3003 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes lottery processing when the lottery condition is met;
A game control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that controls the game execution means (special chart display unit 37a) to perform a game operation for a predetermined duration and to be in a state corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery processing;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to feature H6 or H7, characterized in that the situation in which the specific action is being performed includes a situation in which the game round action is being performed by the game round execution means.

According to feature H8, even if a trigger for deriving mode information occurs while a game is being played, the game's progress is not restricted. This makes it possible to derive mode information even when game progress is restricted, without interrupting the game's play.

Feature H9. Equipped with a variable ball entry means (special telephone winning device 32) that can be opened so that game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H6 to H8, characterized in that the situation in which the specific action is being performed includes a situation in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state.

According to Feature H9, when the variable ball entry means is in an open state, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to derive mode information occurs. This makes it possible to derive mode information in situations where the progress of the game is restricted, while not interrupting the open state of the variable ball entry means.

Feature H10. Information storage means (main RAM 65) into which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game in the control means (main CPU 63) is written;
An initialization execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3709 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes initialization of the information storage means when an initialization trigger occurs;
When information is set to limit the progress of the game by the limiting means, a means for preventing the initialization of the information storage means by the initialization execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S3704 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature H10, when information is set to limit game progress using the limiting means, initialization of the information storage means is prevented when an initialization trigger occurs. This prevents initialization of the information storage means from being executed in response to a situation in which game progress is limited in which mode information is derived, even if an operation that erroneously triggers an initialization trigger is performed in an attempt to release the limited situation.

Feature H11: A separate execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3706 to S3708 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) is provided that executes initialization of the information storage means when a separate trigger different from the initialization trigger occurs,
A gaming machine as described in feature H10, characterized in that even when the information setting is performed so that the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means, initialization of the information storage means is executed by the separate execution means.

According to Feature H11, even if information is set to limit game progress using the limiting means, the information storage means is initialized when a different trigger occurs. This leaves room for initialization of the information storage means even if game progress is limited in the situation in which mode information is derived.

Feature H12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H11, wherein the state in which the game progress is restricted by the restriction means is lifted when the restriction period has elapsed.

According to feature H12, the state in which game progress is restricted when mode information is derived is lifted when the restriction period has elapsed, making it possible to prevent the game progress from being left in this restricted state.

Feature H13. Equipped with a performance control means (sound/light side CPU 163, display control device 82) that controls the performance execution means (pattern display device 41) so that the performance is executed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the presentation control means allows the presentation to continue to be executed even if the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game.

According to feature H13, even if the progress of a game is restricted when the mode information is being derived, the execution of the effect by the effect execution means continues. This makes it possible to prevent the effect from ending immediately even if an opportunity to derive mode information occurs while the player is playing and the progress of the game is restricted, thereby preventing the player from becoming confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

Feature H14: The effect control means includes a series of effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound/light side CPU 163 in the thirteenth embodiment, the display control device 82) that controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start trigger occurs,
The gaming machine described in feature H13 is characterized in that, if the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of presentations is being executed, the series of presentation control means does not execute control to end the series of presentations even if the specified presentation period has elapsed.

According to feature H14, if a trigger for deriving mode information occurs while a series of effects is being executed by the effect execution means and game progress is restricted, control to end the series of effects is not executed even if the specified performance period that would normally be the trigger for terminating the series of effects has elapsed. This makes it possible for the series of effects to continue even when game progress is restricted, and makes it possible for the player to believe that the execution of the effects is continuing even when game progress is restricted when mode information is being derived.

Feature H15. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the limiting means;
a second control means (a sound and light side CPU 163, a display control device 82) having the performance control means;
Equipped with
the performance control means controls the performance execution means so that a new performance is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means,
The gaming machine described in Feature H14 is characterized in that the series of presentation control means cancels a situation in which control to end the series of presentations is not executed even after the specified presentation period has elapsed due to the restriction imposed by the restriction means on the progress of the game while the series of presentations is being executed, when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to Feature H15, a state in which a series of effects is continued when game progress is restricted in order to derive mode information is terminated when start trigger information is sent from the first control means to the second control means to start a new effect. This eliminates the need to send dedicated information from the first control means to the second control means to terminate such a state in which a series of effects is continued.

Feature H16. A configuration in which the effect execution means performs a variable display of a pattern as the series of effects, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is placed on standby in a standby area and the standby display is performed, and then the pattern is displayed stationary;
The gaming machine described in feature H14 or H15 is characterized in that, if the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of presentations is being executed, the series of presentation control means continues the standby display even after the specified presentation period has elapsed.

According to feature H16, when a series of presentations is continued in a situation where game progress is restricted in order to derive mode information, the standby display, which is the stage before the images are displayed as still images when the series of presentations is ended, continues. This makes it possible to continue a series of presentations in a situation where game progress is restricted, while still allowing the player to recognize the results of the images being stopped. Furthermore, when the restrictions on game progress are lifted and the series of presentations is to be ended, it is sufficient to simply switch from the standby display to the still display at the time the restrictions on game progress are lifted. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of presentations when the restrictions on game progress are lifted.

Feature H17. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H13 to H16, wherein the effect control means continues the execution of the effect when the limiting means imposes a restriction on game progress, but also issues a notification corresponding to the restriction.

According to feature H17, if a series of effects continues in a situation where game progress is restricted in order to derive mode information, a corresponding notification is also executed, thereby preventing the player from becoming confused by the series of effects continuing longer than expected.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features H1 to H17. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature Group I>
Feature I1. A performance control means (sound/light CPU 163, display control device 82) that controls the performance execution means (pattern display device 41) so that the performance is executed;
A limiting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that limits the progress of the game based on the occurrence of a limiting trigger;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means continues the execution of the presentation even if the limiting means imposes a limit on the progress of the game.

According to Feature I1, the gaming machine can be managed appropriately by restricting game progress when a restriction trigger occurs. In this case, even if game progress is restricted, the effect execution means continues to execute the effect. This makes it possible to prevent the effect from ending immediately even if a restriction trigger occurs while the player is playing and restricts game progress, and prevents the player from becoming confused when a restriction occurs on game progress.

Feature I2. The effect control means is provided with a series of effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound/light side CPU 163 in the thirteenth embodiment, the display control device 82) that controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start trigger occurs,
The gaming machine described in feature I1 is characterized in that, if the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of presentations is being executed, the series of presentation control means does not execute control to end the series of presentations even if the specified presentation period has elapsed.

According to Feature I2, if a restriction trigger occurs and game progress is restricted while a series of effects is being executed by the effect execution means, control to end the series of effects is not executed even if the specified effect period that would normally be the trigger for ending the series of effects has elapsed. This makes it possible for the series of effects to continue even in situations where game progress is restricted, making it possible for the player to believe that the execution of the effects is continuing even when game progress is restricted.

Feature I3. A first control means (main CPU 63) having the limiting means;
a second control means (a sound and light side CPU 163, a display control device 82) having the performance control means;
Equipped with
the performance control means controls the performance execution means so that a new performance is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means,
The gaming machine described in Feature I2 is characterized in that the series of presentation control means cancels a situation in which control to end the series of presentations is not executed even if the specified presentation period has elapsed due to the restriction imposed by the restriction means on the progress of the game while the series of presentations is being executed, when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to Feature I3, the state in which a series of effects is continued when game progress is restricted is terminated when start trigger information is sent from the first control means to the second control means to start a new effect. This eliminates the need to send dedicated information from the first control means to the second control means to terminate such a state in which a series of effects is continued.

Feature I4. A configuration in which the effect execution means performs a variable display of a pattern as the series of effects, and when the series of effects ends, the pattern is placed on standby in a standby area and the standby display is performed, and then the pattern is displayed stationary;
The gaming machine described in feature I2 or I3 is characterized in that the series of presentation control means continues the standby display even after the specified presentation period has elapsed if the restriction means imposes a restriction on the progress of the game while the series of presentation is being executed.

According to Feature I4, when a series of effects is continued in a situation where game progress is restricted, the standby display, which is the stage before the images are displayed as still images when the series of effects is ended, continues. This makes it possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where game progress is restricted, while still allowing the player to recognize the results of the images being stopped. Furthermore, when the restrictions on game progress are lifted and the series of effects are to be ended, it is sufficient to simply switch from the standby display to the still display at the time the restrictions on game progress are lifted. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of effects when the restrictions on game progress are lifted.

Feature I5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I4, wherein the effect control means continues the execution of the effect when the limiting means imposes a restriction on game progress, but also issues a notification corresponding to the restriction.

According to feature I5, if a series of effects continues when game progress is restricted, a corresponding notification is also issued, preventing the player from becoming confused by the series of effects continuing for longer than expected.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features I1 to I5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S5001 of the main MPU 342 in the 16th embodiment) that stores information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of a game in a predetermined storage means (advantageous game number counter 344b) so that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means;
An information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S5103 of the master MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for deriving aspect information corresponding to the game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
A restriction means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5107 to S5113 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) that restricts the progress of the game based on the fact that the mode information derived by the information derivation means is information corresponding to the regulation;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This predetermined information is then used to derive behavior information corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period, and if the derived behavior information is compliant with regulations, restrictions are imposed on the progress of the game. This makes it possible to impose restrictions on the progress of the game depending on the occurrence of the predetermined event, and to deal with cases where the occurrence of the predetermined event does not match the behavior anticipated during the design stage of the gaming machine. As a result, gaming machines can be managed in an optimal manner.

Feature J2. The gaming machine described in Feature J1, wherein the restriction means imposes a restriction that prevents the mode information from becoming compliant with the regulation, based on the mode information being compliant with the regulation.

Feature J2 imposes restrictions on mode information so that it does not become regulated information, even if the mode information becomes regulated information. This makes it possible to ensure that even if the mode information becomes regulated information, it remains within the range of information anticipated during the gaming machine design stage.

Feature J3. State transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (a function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A predetermined termination means (a function for executing the processing of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature J1 or J2 is characterized in that the restriction means terminates the specified gaming state even if the specified termination trigger has not occurred, based on the fact that the mode information is information that complies with the regulation.

According to feature J3, if the mode information is regulatory-compliant, the specified gaming state will end even if the specified termination trigger has not occurred. This makes it possible to forcibly end the specified gaming state depending on the mode of occurrence of a specified event, and to impose restrictions on the execution mode of the gaming state if the mode of occurrence of the specified event does not match the mode assumed during the gaming machine design stage.

Feature J4. A gaming machine according to Feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Feature J4 makes it possible to restrict the degree of advantage if the occurrence of a specified event does not match the pattern anticipated during the gaming machine design stage.

Feature J5. A gaming machine according to Feature J3 or J4, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature J5, if the occurrence mode of a predetermined event that occurs in a predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed during the gaming machine's design stage, the predetermined gaming state is forcibly terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from deviating from the mode assumed during the gaming machine's design stage.

Feature J6. The predetermined period elapses when the number of games reaches a predetermined reference number of times,
A gaming machine described in feature J5, characterized in that the specified reference number of times is a number greater than the number of times that the specified gaming state can be continued when the specified gaming state is newly started.

Feature J6 makes it possible to prevent situations in which a predetermined game state is forcibly terminated due to the occurrence of a predetermined event from occurring in each predetermined game state.

Feature J7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J3 to J6, characterized in that the conditions for the predetermined termination trigger to occur in the predetermined gaming state are not notified.

Feature J7 prevents notification of the conditions for a predetermined termination trigger to occur in a predetermined game state, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence of a predetermined event.

Feature J8. State transition means for transitioning the game state to a predetermined game state (a function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A predetermined termination means (a function for executing the processing of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined termination trigger occurs;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J7, characterized in that the restriction means restricts the subsequent transition to the specified gaming state based on the state information being information that complies with the regulation.

According to feature J8, if the mode information is regulated information, the transition to a predetermined gaming state is restricted. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent the transition to a predetermined gaming state depending on the occurrence mode of a predetermined event, and to restrict the execution mode of the gaming state if the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed during the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J9. A gaming machine according to Feature J8, wherein the restriction means varies the period during which transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted, depending on the mode information.

Feature J9 allows the period during which transition to a predetermined gaming state is restricted to vary depending on the mode information, making it possible to prevent the restriction on transition to a predetermined gaming state from being set too low or too high regardless of the mode information.

Feature J10: The state transition means includes transition determination means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4903 to S4905 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) that executes a transition determination process to determine whether or not to transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger;
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with an alternative benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4912 to S4914 of the main MPU 342 in the 17th embodiment) that grants an alternative benefit instead of executing the transition determination process when the specified trigger occurs in a situation where the transition to the specified gaming state is restricted by the restriction means.

According to feature J10, if a predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where transition to a predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked in relation to mode information, the transition decision process to determine whether to transition to the predetermined gaming state is not executed, but an alternative benefit is awarded. This makes it possible to prevent a player from thinking that a predetermined trigger was wasted when it occurred in a situation where transition to a predetermined gaming state was forcibly blocked.

Feature J11. A gaming machine as described in Feature J10, wherein the alternative benefit provision means makes the content of the alternative benefit more advantageous or more likely to be advantageous the more the predetermined trigger occurs in a situation in which transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restriction means.

Feature J11 makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a predetermined trigger even in situations where transition to a predetermined game state is forcibly prevented.

Feature J12. A gaming machine as described in Feature J10 or J11, further comprising a means for notifying the player that the alternative benefit has been granted.

Feature J12 allows a player to be notified that an alternative benefit has been awarded, thereby preventing the player from losing motivation to continue playing even in situations where transition to a predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Feature J13. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J10 to J12, characterized in that, when the alternative benefit is granted, transition to the predetermined gaming state becomes more likely after the situation in which the restriction means prevents transition to the predetermined gaming state from occurring is lifted.

Feature J13 makes it possible to associate the granting of a substitute benefit with transitioning to a predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to make the player expect a transition to the predetermined gaming state even if a predetermined trigger occurs in a situation where transitioning to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented.

Feature J14. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J8 to J13, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Feature J14 makes it possible to restrict the degree of advantage if the occurrence of a specified event does not match the pattern anticipated during the gaming machine design stage.

Feature J15. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J8 to J14, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature J15, if the occurrence mode of a predetermined event that occurs in a predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed during the gaming machine's design stage, transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly prevented. This makes it possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from deviating from the mode assumed during the gaming machine's design stage.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features J1 to J15. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. An openable/closable body (front door 312),
a predetermined device (main control device 340) provided in a predetermined area that is exposed when the opening/closing body is opened;
lighting means (lighting devices 349a, 349b) that can illuminate at least a part of the predetermined device when in an illuminated state;
an illumination control means (a function of executing illumination processing in the main MPU 342) that adjusts the control state of the illumination means according to the position of the opening/closing body;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to Feature K1, when checking for abnormalities in a specific device, the opening and closing body is opened, and a lighting means is provided to illuminate at least a portion of the specific device, making this check easier. In this case, the control state of the lighting means is adjusted according to the position of the opening and closing body. This makes it possible for the lighting means to provide illumination in a preferred manner depending on the position of the opening and closing body. This allows for optimal management of the gaming machine.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, wherein the lighting control means controls the lighting means so that it is in a non-illuminating state when the opening/closing body is closed, and is in an illuminated state when the opening/closing body is opened.

According to feature K2, the lighting means is turned off when the opening/closing body is closed. This prevents the lighting means from being turned on unnecessarily when the specified device is not being checked. Furthermore, the lighting means is automatically turned on when the opening/closing body is opened. This eliminates the need for a separate operation to turn the lighting means on, making it easier to check the specified device.

Feature K3. The gaming machine described in Feature K1 or K2, wherein the lighting means is provided in the specified area.

According to feature K3, by providing a lighting device in a predetermined area, it becomes easier to illuminate a predetermined device using the lighting device in response to the opening operation of the opening/closing body.

Feature K4: The opening/closing body is displaceable within a predetermined displacement range from a closed position to a maximum open position,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the lighting control means controls the lighting means to enter the lighting state when the opening/closing body is located within a lighting-compatible range that is part of the specified displacement range, and controls the lighting means to enter the non-lighting state when the opening/closing body is operated to open but is not located within the lighting-compatible range.

According to feature K4, the lighting means is not illuminated regardless of which open position the opening/closing body is in, but is selectively illuminated in certain open positions. This makes it possible to illuminate the lighting means only in situations that are favorable for checking a specific device, and to turn off the lighting means in situations where turning the lighting means on would make it more difficult to check the specific device.

Feature K5. The illumination range does not include the maximum open position;
The gaming machine described in feature K4 is characterized in that the lighting control means controls the lighting means to be in the non-illuminated state when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position.

According to feature K5, the lighting means is in a non-illuminating state when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position. This prevents the lighting means from being in a non-illuminating state in situations where the designated device is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting in the amusement hall, making it difficult to check the designated device due to the illumination from the lighting means.

Feature K6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K5, wherein the specified device is a control device having a control board (main control board 341) and a transparent box (board box 345) that houses the control board.

Feature K6 allows the lighting means to illuminate the control device in response to the opening operation of the opening/closing body, making it easier to check the control board and board box of the control device.

Feature K7. The gaming machine has a box body (casing 311) that opens toward the front,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the front opening of the box body is closed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that the specified area exists in the internal space of the box body.

Feature K7 makes it possible to illuminate a specific device installed inside the box when the opening/closing body is opened.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features K1 to K7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1: A predetermined storage execution means (a function for executing game management processing in the main MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment) that stores information corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of a game, by executing the storage of the information in the predetermined storage means (the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment), thereby storing the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means;
information calculation means for calculating status information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period using the predetermined information (a function for executing the processes of steps S5503 and S5508 in the master MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S5804 and S5807 in the management CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means includes at least a first storage means (a first accumulation buffer 363 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a first history memory 371 in the nineteenth embodiment) and a second storage means (a second accumulation buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment),
The predetermined storage execution means
a first predetermined storage execution means for causing the predetermined information to be stored in the first storage means when the predetermined event occurs during a first period as the predetermined period, by causing the storage of information corresponding to the event to be executed in the first storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5404, S5409, and S5414 in the main MPU 342 in the 18th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S5704 in the management CPU 112 in the 19th embodiment);
a second predetermined storage execution means for causing the storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event in the second storage means when the predetermined event occurs during a second period as the predetermined period, thereby causing the predetermined information to be stored in the second storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5406, S5411, and S5416 in the main MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S5707 in the management CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the first periods and one of the second periods partially overlap.

According to feature L1, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information is stored in a predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and retain information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence pattern of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing and retaining the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the gaming machine calculates behavior information corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time using the specified information stored in the specified storage means. This makes it possible, for example, for the gaming machine to perform processing corresponding to the game results over a predetermined period of time itself, or to externally output behavior information that is the result of calculations using the specified information.

Furthermore, the specified storage means comprises a first storage means and a second storage means, and management is performed during a first period as a specified period using the first storage means, and management is performed during a second period as a specified period using the second storage means, with one first period and one second period partially overlapping. This makes it possible to derive behavior information corresponding to the management results during the first period partway through one second period, and to derive behavior information corresponding to the management results during the second period partway through one first period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving behavior information while ensuring that the first and second periods are available as periods during which management is performed. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving behavior information while ensuring that the first and second periods are available as periods during which management is performed, without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first and second storage means.

Feature L2. A gaming machine as described in Feature L1, wherein the first period and the second period have the same end conditions.

Feature L2 makes it possible to derive behavior information corresponding to a certain period of time even in a configuration in which management is performed using both the first storage means and the second storage means.

Feature L3: The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period immediately after one of the first periods when the first period ends,
the second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period immediately after one of the second periods has ended,
A gaming machine described in feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the difference between the first period and the second period is constant.

Feature L3 makes it possible to derive behavior information corresponding to each of the first and second periods while maintaining a certain degree of misalignment.

Feature L4: The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period immediately after one of the first periods when the first period ends, and when the one of the first periods ends and the state information for the first period is calculated by the information calculation means, initializes the first storage means or sets the order of storage areas to be stored in the first storage means to the initial order;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period immediately after one of the second periods when the second period ends, and when one of the second periods ends and the status information for the second period is calculated by the information calculation means, initializes the second storage means or sets the order of storage areas to be stored in the second storage means to the initial order.

According to feature L4, the first storage means has a capacity sufficient to store the specified information corresponding to the first period, and the second storage means has a capacity sufficient to store the specified information corresponding to the second period. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while keeping the capacity of the first storage means and second storage means low.

Feature L5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is equipped with means (in the 18th embodiment, a function for executing management processing in the main MPU 342) for causing content corresponding to the status information for the first period calculated by the information calculation means to be announced when the first period has elapsed, and for causing content corresponding to the status information for the second period calculated by the information calculation means to be announced when the second period has elapsed.

According to feature L5, by notifying the user of content corresponding to the behavior information as the first period and the second period progress, it is possible to notify the user of content corresponding to the behavior information in a situation that is relatively close to the current situation.

Note that any one or more of Features A1 to A41, Features B1 to B20, Features C1 to C19, Features D1 to D7, Features E1 to E4, Features F1 to F10, Features G1 to G7, Features H1 to H17, Features I1 to I5, Features J1 to J15, Features K1 to K7, and Features L1 to L5 may be applied to the configurations of Features L1 to L5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect through the combined configurations.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group H, feature group I, feature group J, feature group K, and feature group L can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, pachinko machines have a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls awarded to players. The gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launcher and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out to the tray storage section from, for example, a payout device. In addition, pachinko machines are also known that have a configuration in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section. In this case, gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launcher, and surplus gaming balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control, causing the reels to start spinning, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are spinning, the control means executes rotation stop control, causing the reels to stop spinning. If the result of the reels stopping after spinning has stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to that winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be managed appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is initiated by operating a start operating means, and the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the picture displayed after the stop.

10...Pachinko machine, 24a...Outlet, 31...General winning port, 32...Special electric winning device, 33...First operating port, 34...Second operating port, 41...Pattern display device, 61...Main control board, 62...MPU, 63...Main CPU, 65...Main RAM, 82...Display control device, 92...Payout CPU, 102...Reading terminal, 112...Management CPU, 116...Correspondence memory, 131...Calculation result memory, 151...Notification light-emitting unit, 163...Sound/light CPU, 171...normal counter area, 171a-171e...counters, 172...open/close execution mode counter area, 172a-172e...counters, 173...high frequency support mode counter area, 173a-173e...counters, 311...casing, 312...front door, 340...main control device, 341...main control board, 342...main MPU, 344b...advantageous game number counter, 345...board box, 349a, 349b...lighting device.

Claims (1)

a predetermined storage execution means for executing a predetermined storage process so that when a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, thereby causing the predetermined information to be stored in the predetermined storage means;
an information calculation means for calculating, each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, behavior information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period using the predetermined information;
a result storage execution means for sequentially storing the aspect information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means in a calculation result storage means;
Equipped with
the result storage execution means includes means for causing the mode information to be stored among the mode information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means to be stored in the calculation result storage means;
the state information obtained by the calculation by the information calculation means, which is not a storage target, is not stored in the calculation result storage means;
This gaming machine is
a predetermined control means capable of executing predetermined processes including a predetermined progression process for progressing a game and the predetermined storage process;
means for erasing the predetermined information from the predetermined storage means after the information calculation means has completed the calculation of the mode information;
a notification means capable of notifying the user of the content corresponding to the aspect information stored in the calculation result storage means;
Equipped with
In one processing cycle of the predetermined process, the predetermined progress process is executed, and then the predetermined storage process is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the supply of operating power is stopped, the notification means terminates the notification of content corresponding to the status information, but when the supply of operating power is resumed, the notification means issues a notification of content corresponding to the status information before the supply of operating power was stopped.